PROJECTSPECIFICATIONS MANUAL BID NO.
FOOTHILL HIGH SCHOOL KITCHEN REMODEL
5000 McCloud Drive Rio Linda, CA 95668
Twin Rivers Unified School District General Services – Purchasing 3222 Winona Way, Suite 200 North Highlands, CA 95660 DSA SubmittalApprovedBackchcek Bid Set
1 005858.00001 14602794.1 PROJECT MANUAL AND SPECIFICATIONS Twin Rivers Unified School District Foothill High School Kitchen Remodel Harrington Design Associates Project #. 2022.00
IDENTIFICATION STAMP DIV. OF THE STATE ARCHITECT
Owner: APP: 02-118746 INC: Twin Rivers Unified School District REVIEWED FOR 3222 Winona Way, Suite 200 ✔ DDIVISION OF✔SA THE STATE ARCHITECT✔ SS FLS ACS North Highlands, California 95660 DEPARTMENT APPLICATION OF GENERAL SERVICES (916) 566-1600 x50261 DATE:NO. 03/17/2021 02- Perry Herrera – Director of Maintenance and Facilities 115492
Architect: Harrington Design Associates 5875 Pacific Street, Suite E2 Rocklin, California 95677 (916) 577-5789
Francis J. Harrington, AIA California Registration #C-28875
Mechanical/Plumbing Engineer: LP Consulting Engineers, Inc. 1209 Pleasant Grove Blvd. Roseville, California 95678 (916) 771-0778
Sean Pourvakil California Registration #M32311
Electrical Engineer: LP Consulting Engineers, Inc. 1209 Pleasant Grove Blvd. Roseville, California 95678 (916) 771-0778
Alex Saev California Registration #E18211
Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
TABLE OF CONTENTS Technical Requirements
DIVISION SECTION TITLE
DIVISION 02 EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 41 00 Site Demolition
DIVISION 05 METALS 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications
DIVISION 06 WOODS, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry
DIVISION 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE CONTROL 07 21 00 Building Insulation 07 90 00 Joint Sealers
DIVISION 08 OPENINGS 08 11 00 Metal Doors and Frames 08 71 00 Door Hardware
DIVISION 09 FINISHES 09 21 16 Gypsum Board Systems 09 30 13 Ceramic Tile Work 09 90 00 Painting and Coating (Including Exhibit A)
DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES 10 14 00 Signage 10 28 00 Toilet and Bath Accessories 10 44 16 Fire Extinguishers
DIVISION 22 PLUMBING 22 05 10 Plumbing General Provisions 22 05 53 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 22 07 19 Plumbing Piping Insulation 22 10 05 Plumbing Piping 22 10 06 Plumbing Piping Specialties 22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures
DIVISION 23 MECHANICAL 23 05 10 Mechanical General Provisions 23 05 53 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of HVAC 23 31 00 HVAC Ducts and Casings 23 33 00 Air Duct Accessories
DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL 26 01 10 General Requirements, Electrical 26 05 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables (600 V and less) 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 34 Conduit 26 05 37 Boxes 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems
1
Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
26 09 23 Lighting Control Devices 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 26 28 16 Overcurrent Protective Devices 26 51 00 Interior Lighting
DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 13 13 Concrete Paving 32 17 23 Pavement Markings 32 17 26 Tactile Warning Surfacing
[END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS]
2
Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022020.002027.002.00 WoodridgeOrchardFoothill ES Toilet ESHS Kitchen KitchenBuilding Remodel Addition
SECTION 02 41 00
SITE DEMOLITION
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 INCLUSION OF OTHER CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 are fully applicable to this Section, as if repeated herein.
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Section 01500, Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls.
B. Section 015713, Erosion Control
C. Section 310000, Earthwork.
1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable jurisdictional authority regulations and codes for disposal of debris.
B. Coordinate clearing Work with utility companies.
C. Maintain emergency access ways at all times.
D. Contractor shall comply with all applicable laws and ordinances regarding hazardous materials, including contaminated soils, hazardous material transformers, and similar materials or components.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
A. Schedule: Submit a detailed sequence of demolition and removal work, including dates for shutoff, capping, and continuance of utility services.
B. Procedures: Submit written procedures documenting the proposed methods to be used to control dust and noise.
1.05 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Contractor shall acquaint himself with all site conditions. If unknown active utilities are encountered during work, notify Architect promptly for instructions. Failure to notify will make Contractor liable for damage to these utilities arising from Contractor's operations subsequent to discovery of such unknown active utilities. B. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent structures or items to remain. Maintain protected egress and access at all times.
1.06 PROTECTION
A. Adequate protection measures shall be provided to protect workmen and passers-by on and off the site. Adjacent property shall be fully protected throughout the operations. Blasting will not be permitted. Prevent damage to adjoining improvements and properties both above and below grade. Restore such improvements to original condition should damage occur. Replace trees and shrubs outside building area disturbed by operations.
02 41 00 - 1 HarringtonHarrington DesignDesign AssociatesAssociates TwinTwin RiversRivers UnifiedUnified SchoolSchool DistrictDistrict A/EA/E ProjectProject NumberNumber 2027.002022020.002027.002.00 WoodridgeWoodridgeOrchardFoothill ESES ToiletToilet ESHS Kitchen KitchenBuildingBuilding Remodel AdditionAddition
C. In accordance with generally accepted construction practices, the Contractor shall be solely and completely responsible for working conditions at the job site, including safety of all persons and property during performance of the work. This requirement shall apply continuously and shall not be limited to normal working hours.
D. Safety Precautions Prevent damage to existing elements identified to remain or to be salvaged, and prevent injury to the public and workmen engaged on site. Demolish roofs, walls and other building elements in such manner that demolished materials fall within foundation lines of building. Do not allow demolition debris to accumulate on site. Pull down hazardous work at end of each day; do not leave standing or hanging overnight, or over weekends.
E. Protect existing items which are not indicated to be altered. 1. Protect utilities designated to remain from damage. 2. Protect trees, plant growth, and features designated to remain as final landscaping as shown on drawings. 3. Protect bench marks from damage or displacement.
F. Trees: Carefully protect existing trees that are to remain. Provide temporary irrigation as necessary to maintain health of trees.
G. Fire Safety: The contractor shall conform to chapter 33 of the California Fire Code (CFC), "Fire Safety During Construction and Demolition”, at all times during the construction process. A copy of this chapter can be provided.
H. Any construction review of the Contractor's performance conducted by the Geotechnical Engineer is not intended to include review of the adequacy of the Contractor's safety measures, in, on, or near the construction site.
I. Surface Drainage: Provide for surface drainage during period of construction in manner to avoid creating nuisance to adjacent areas. The contractor shall make a reasonable effort on a daily basis to keep all excavations and the site free from water during entire progress of work, regardless of cause, source, or nature of water.
J. Adjacent streets and sidewalks shall be kept free of mud, dirt or similar nuisances resulting from earthwork operations.
K. The site and adjacent influenced areas shall be watered as required to suppress dust nuisance. Dust control measures shall be in accordance with the local jurisdiction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions of work in place before beginning work; report defects.
B. Report existence of hazardous materials or unsafe structural conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Scheduling: 1. General: Coordinate and schedule demolition work as required by the Owner and as necessary to facilitate construction progress.
02 41 00 - 2 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022020.002027.002.00 WoodridgeOrchardFoothill ES Toilet ESHS Kitchen KitchenBuilding Remodel Addition
B. Hazardous Materials: 1. General: Identify chemicals, gases, explosives, acids, flammables, or other dangerous materials before proceeding with demolition operations, and notify such jurisdictional agencies as may be required. Collect and legally dispose of such materials at official disposal locations away from the site. 2. Asbestos: If asbestos or materials containing asbestos are encountered, stop work immediately and contact the Owner. Do not proceed with demolition until directed by Owner.
C. Utility and Service Termination 1. Locate and identify existing utility, service and irrigation system components affected by work of this contract. Review existing record drawings, conduct site investigations, contact Underground Service Alert and other qualified cable/pipe/line locator services, and implement all other means necessary to define the location of underground systems. 2. Prior to beginning any demolition, properly disconnect all water, gas and electrical power supply at appropriate disconnect locations. Obtain all necessary releases and approvals from serving utility companies. 3. Prior to demolition or disconnect, obtain Owners approval that such system does not impact facilities or systems beyond the extent of this contract. 4. Mark location of disconnected systems. Identify and indicate stub-out locations on Project Record Documents. D. Verify that existing plant life and features designated to remain are tagged or identified.
1. The Architect will mark the features, trees, and shrubs to remain within the construction area. Contractor shall not commence clearing and grubbing operations until authorized by the Owner and all protective measures are in place.
E. Coordinate the time and duration of all system disconnects with Owner.
3.03 DEMOLITION
A. General Requirements 1. Clear areas required for access to site and execution of Work, including pavements, structures, foundations, vegetation, trash and debris. 2. Coordinate with Owner the time of day and route to remove demolished materials from premises. 3. Remove demolished materials from site as work progresses. Upon completion of work, leave areas of work in clean condition. 4. Remove all buried debris, rubble, trash, or other material not deemed suitable by the Geotechnical Engineer. 5. Fill all voids or excavations resulting from clearing, demolition, or removal of vegetation with specified fill material.
B. Fixture and Equipment Removal: 1. Remove existing fixtures and equipment as identified and shown on drawings and required by Architect. 2. Verify all service connections to fixtures and equipment designated for removal have been properly disconnected. 3. Remove all conductors from conduit at all abandoned circuits.
3.04 UTILITY AND BUILDING SERVICES REMOVAL AND RE-INSTALLATION
A. Where crossing paths and potential points of interference with existing utility services are shown or can be reasonably inferred from surface conditions or evidence of subsurface systems, such as meter boxes, vaults, relief vents, cleanouts and similar components. 02 41 00 - 3 HarringtonHarrington DesignDesign AssociatesAssociates TwinTwin RiversRivers UnifiedUnified SchoolSchool DistrictDistrict A/EA/E ProjectProject NumberNumber 2027.002022020.002027.002.00 WoodridgeWoodridgeOrchardFoothill ESES ToiletToilet ESHS Kitchen KitchenBuildingBuilding Remodel AdditionAddition
1. Review all contract documents showing crossing paths and potential points of interference. 2. Pot-hole or determine by other means the accurate depth and location of such utilities. 3. Incorporate all costs required to complete work under this contract, including additional trenching, re-routing of existing and new utilities, and all means necessary to construct work under this contract. 4. No additional cost to the Owner will be allowed for work necessary to accommodate utility conflicts where such crossing paths are shown on contract drawings or can be reasonably inferred from surface conditions or components.
B. Remove all conductors from conduit at all abandoned electrical circuits.
C. Seal off ends of all piping, drains and other components as directed by Architect and serving utility.
D. Where necessary to maintain service to existing utility and building systems, relocate or redirect all conduit and conductors, piping, drains, and associated system components. 1. Re-circuit all electrical as required. 2. Re-circuit all landscape irrigation valving and control systems as required. 3. Temporarily terminate landscape system components in approved boxes or with approved caps, suitable for re-connection or extension. 4. Extend or otherwise modify all site drainage systems, including catch basins, drain inlets and piping. Fine grade to maintain proper drainage flow pattern to drains.
E. Demolish structure in an orderly and careful manner. 1. Use of explosives prohibited.
3.05 SITE PAVEMENT REMOVAL
A. Remove sidewalk and curb where required for new construction as specified and as indicated on the Drawings. 1. Remove all paving by saw-cutting. 2. Remove concrete paving and curbing at locations shown on drawings. Locate closest adjacent expansion or weakened plane joint to define start of removal or saw-cutting.
B. Remove asphalt concrete paving areas where required for new construction as specified and as indicated on the Drawings. 1. Remove all paving by saw-cutting. 2. Remove paving assembly as required to expose subgrade.
3.06 LANDSCAPE AND IRRIGATION SYSTEMS DEMOLITION AND RENOVATION
A. Clearing, grubbing, and planting demolition. 1. Remove grass and grass roots to a minimum depth of two inches below existing grade. 2. Remove all shrubs, plants and other vegetation within the area of the work unless designated to remain. Grub and remove all roots of all vegetation to a depth of 24 inches below existing grade. 3. Remove only those trees which are specifically designated for removal, or as shown on the drawings, within the construction area. Remove all stumps. Remove root ball and root systems larger than 1 inch in diameter to a depth of two feet below existing or finished grades, whichever is lower and a minimum of five feet beyond the edge of paving, structure, wall or walkway.
02 41 00 - 4 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2027.002022020.002.00 WoodridgeOrchardFoothill ES Toilet ESHS KitchenKitchenBuilding Remodel Addition
4. Hand cut existing tree roots over 1 inch in diameter as necessary for trenching or other new construction, apply multiple coats of emulsified asphalt sealant especially made for horticultural use on cut or damaged plant tissues to cut faces and adjacent surfaces. Cover exposed roots with wet burlap to prevent roots from dying out until backfilling is complete. 5. Disking and mixing of vegetation, trash, debris, and other deleterious materials with surface soils prior to grading is not permitted. 6. Remove all buried debris, organic material, rubble, trash, or other material not deemed suitable by the Geotechnical Engineer. 7. Fill all voids or excavations resulting from clearing, demolition, or removal of vegetation with fill material in compliance with Section 310000. 8. Selected equipment of such sizes and capacities that the existing environment is disturbed as little as possible, and to afford ease of mobility within limited and relatively confined work areas. Make every effort to preserve the topography in its natural state. 9. Keep drains, catch basins, surface drainage courses and related drainage system components clear of debris and construction materials. 10. Remove irrigation piping and appurtenances as necessary within area of work, unless noted otherwise to remain. Replace irrigation piping and appurtenances to irrigate new and/or existing landscaping. Contractor shall be responsible for temporary landscape irrigation until such time that irrigation system is restored and operational.
3.07 DISPOSAL Demolished materials become property of the Contractor and shall be removed from premises, except those items specifically listed to be retained by Owner.
A. Dispose of all demolished material, trash, debris, and other materials not used in the work in accordance with the regulations of jurisdictional authority.
B. It is recommended that all materials that are of a recyclable nature, be transported to a suitable legal recycling facility instead of a dump or refuse facility (unless they are one-in-the same).
C. Burning and Burying of Materials: NOT ALLOWED.
D. Haul Routes: 1. Obtain permits as required by jurisdictional agencies. Establish haul routes in advance; post flagmen for the safety of the public and workmen. 2. Keep streets free of mud, rubbish, etc.; assume responsibility for damage resulting from hauling operations; hold Owner free of liability in connection therewith.
E. Remove demolished materials and debris from site on a daily basis.
3.08 CLEANING
A. Upon completion of work of this Section promptly remove from the working area all scraps, debris.
B. Clean excess material from surface of all remaining paved surfaces and utility structures.
C. Power wash all concrete surfaces to remove stains, dried mud, tire marks, and rust spots.
END OF SECTION [02 41 00]
02 41 00 - 5 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
SECTION 05 50 00
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Shop fabricated ferrous metal items, galvanized and prime painted.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 00 72 00: General Conditions.
B. Section 09 90 00: Painting: Paint finish.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A36 / A36M-14 - Carbon Structural Steel.
B. ASTM A53 / A53M-12 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless.
C. ASTM A123 / A123M-13 - Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
D. ASTM A283 / A283M-13 (2007) - Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates.
E. ASTM A307-14 - Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength.
F. ASTM A924 / A924M-14- General requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip process.
G. ASTM A501-14 - Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing.
H. AWS A2.1 - Standard Welding Symbols.
I. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code.
J. SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Council.
K. CBC - California Building Code, 20132019 Edition.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 00 72 00.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. Provide specific submittal for all ramp and sloped walk guide rails, handrails, and guardrails prior to fabrication clearly showing spacing of rails and embed details.
C. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.1 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths.
1.05 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Welders' Certificates: Submit under provisions of Section 00 72 00, certifying welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. 05 50 00 - 1 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
1.06 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Field verify all dimensions prior to fabrication.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. General: All material that will be exposed must be smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, trade names and irregularities.
B. Steel Sections: ASTM A36 / A36M-14.
C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A501-14.
D. Pipe and Downspouts: ASTM A53 / A53M-12, Type E, Grade B.
E. Plates: ASTM A283 / A283M-13.
F. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A307-14.
G. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded.
H. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: TNEMEC 10-99 - Red primer or Devoe DEVGUARD 4141.
I. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc rich type.
J. Metal Framing Channels: Channel members shall be fabricated from structural grade steel conforming to ASTM A924-14; P1000 as manufactured by Unistrut or approved equal. Finish shall be hot-dip galvanized coating.
K. Pipe/Conduit Clamps: Punch-press made from hot-rolled, pickled and oiled steel plates, strip or coil and conform to ASTM A36 / A36M-14; P2600 as manufactured by Unistrut or approved substitute. Finish shall be hot-dip galvanized coating.
L. Non-Shrink Grout: Euco-Dry Pack Grout, natural aggregate, high strength non-shrink. “Pac-It” - W.R. Meadows, or approved equal.
M. Removable Post Insert Sleeves: For mounting new posts/rails in new concrete, Wagner Companies EZ SLEEVE or equal. (888)243-6914.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Workmanship 1. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight, sharp edges. 2. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless indicated otherwise. 3. Form bent-metal corners to the smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. 4. Weld corners and seams continuously, complying with AWS recommendations. At exposed connections, grind exposed welds smooth and flush to match and blend with adjoining surfaces. Welds to be imperceptible in finished work. 5. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners wherever possible.
B. Assemblies 05 50 00 - 2 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
1. Use materials of sizes and thickness indicted or required to produce strength and durability in finished product for use intended. 2. Work to dimensions indicated. 3. Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to site. 4. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as required to receive finished hardware and similar items. 5. Exposed mechanical fasteners: When application will not permit concealed fasteners, locate exposed fasteners in unobtrusive manner, consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise. Use Phillips flat-head countersunk screws or bolts for exposed fasteners. 6. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise. 7. Fabricate joints exposed to the weather to be weather to be weather tight and provide weep holes as required. 8. All exterior items are required to be hot-dipped galvanized. They shall be assembled in the largest pieces possible and dipped as a large unit. Field welding shall be kept to a minimum to alleviate painted sections of metal. It is the intention of the District that the hot-dip finish be the final/exposed finish on the campus. 9. Any field welding shall be repaired and coated with a zinc-rich coating over entire affected area.
C. Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections, for delivery to site.
D. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.
E. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds.
F. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.
G. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located; consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise.
H. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise.
2.03 FINISHES
A. Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC SP 2.
B. Prime all surfaces that are not scheduled to receive galvanization, except, do not prime surfaces embedded in concrete nor in areas of field welds until welds are completed and inspected.
C. Surfaces scheduled to be galvanized: Galvanize in accordance with ASTM A123 / A123M-09, designated steel items. Provide minimum 1.25 oz/sq ft galvanized coating.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
B. Beginning of installation means erector accepts existing conditions.
C. Contractor shall conform all existing downspouts to remain are fully functional.
05 50 00 - 3 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required.
B. Supply items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting templates, to appropriate sections.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.
B. Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments.
C. Field weld components indicated on shop drawings.
D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1.
E. Obtain Architect approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled.
F. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete.
G. At all welded locations, coat with two coats of zinc-rich paint. Must contain either between 65% to 69% metallic zinc by weight or greater than 92% metallic zinc by weight in dry film.
3.04 SCHEDULE
A. The Schedule is a list of principal items only. Refer to Drawing details for items not specifically scheduled. 1. Steel pipe railing, (hot-dipped galvanized at exterior, primed at interior). 2. Pipe rail wall support brackets, (hot-dipped galvanized at exterior, primed at interior). 3. Steel pipe downspouts and downspout support brackets, galvanized. 4. Unistrut P-1000 Support System.
[END OF SECTION 05 50 00]
05 50 00 - 4 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
SECTION 06 10 00
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Description of requirements for materials, fabrications and installation of rough carpentry and associated items (except that which is specified elsewhere) indicated on Drawings and necessary to complete the work. Items include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Blocking, Backing, Stripping, Furring, and Nailers. 2. Rough Hardware. 3. Wood Framing. 4. Metal Fabrications.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 00 72 00: General Conditions
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer data: Submit product data for all materials specified under this section and as applicable to each site.
B. Coordinate the work of all trades to ensure proper placement of all materials, anchors, etc., as well as providing for openings and anchors for the installation of surface mounted materials and equipment.
C. Qualifications of Workmen: Provide sufficient skilled workmen and supervisors who shall be present at all times during execution of this portion of the work and who shall be thoroughly familiar with the type of construction involved and the materials and techniques specified.
D. Rejection: In the acceptance or rejection of rough carpentry, no allowance will be made for lack of skill on the part of the workmen.
E. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1. California Building Code Standard, No. 23-1, "Classification, Definition and Methods in California of Grading all Species of Lumber": 2. California Building Code (CBC), 20120196 edition.
F. References and Standards: Provide materials graded under latest Edition of the pertinent following Agencies: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 2. Lumber: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB), Rule 17, Standard Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber. 3. Lumber: Western Wood Products Association (WWPA); Western Lumber Grading Rules. 4. California Building Code, 20192016 edition.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 00 72 00.
06 10 00 - 1 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Protection, General: Protect wood from moisture while being stored and while work is in progress.
B. Protection: 1. After delivery, store all materials in such a manner as to ensure proper ventilation and drainage and to protect against damage and the weather. 2. Keep all material clearly identified with all grade marks legible; keep all damaged material clearly identified as damaged, and separately store to prevent its inadvertent use. Do not allow installation of damaged or otherwise non-complying material. 3. Use all means necessary to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades.
C. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.06 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements: Maintain uniform moisture content of lumber at 19 percent or less during installation and prior to close-in.
B. Sequencing: Coordinate details with other work supporting, adjoining, or fastening to rough carpentry work.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Wood: 1. Lumber (Blocking, Backing, Stripping, Furring, and Nailers): WCLIB Construction. 2. Lumber (Wood Framing): Meet requirements of following minimum grades: Item Species Grade Reference Studs D.F. No. 1 2 x 4 Light Framing WCLIB 124b Studs D.F. No. 1 WCLIB 121 Plates D.F. No. 1 WCLIB 123b Beams D.F. No. 1 WCLIB 130b Joists D.F. No. 1 WCLIB 123b Posts D.F. No. 1 WCLIB 131b 3. 4X and larger lumber shall be free of heart center.
B. Building Paper: Fed. Spec. UU-B-790a, Type I, Grade B (15 lb. min.).
C. Rough Hardware Fastenings and Connections: All types including bolts, lag screws, nails, spikes, screws, washers, framing devices and other rough hardware, or kinds that may be purchased and that require no further fabrication, shall be furnished and installed for all finish and rough carpentry. All exterior hardware shall be hot-dipped galvanized per ASTM A123 / A123M-09 Standards. 1. Nails: a. Common wire nails or spikes; box nails not permitted. 2. Bolts: ASTM A307-07b, Grade A, hexagonal heads, unless noted otherwise. 3. Washers: Washers for bearing against wood shall be provided under all bolt heads and nuts. Washers shall be as indicated on Drawings. 4. Powder Driven Fasteners: Tempered steel pins with special corrosive-resistant plating or coating. Pins shall have guide washers to accurately control 06 10 00 - 2 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
penetration, minimum 1-1/8 inch. Fastening shall be accomplished by low- velocity pistol-driven powder activated tool. Pins and tool shall be as manufactured by Hilti Fastening Systems; Impex Tool Corporation; or approved equal. ICC approved. 5. Fabricated Sheet Metal Timber Framing Connectors: CBC approved. Fabricate from hot-dipped galvanized steel. Connectors shall be at least 18 gauge minimum material (1/8" plate materials where welded, unless otherwise noted), punched for nailing. Nails and Nailing shall conform to the manufacturer's instructions with a nail provided for each punched hole. Types as noted on Drawings, manufactured by Simpson Co. or approved substitute. All framing connectors shall be stamped with manufacturer's logo, and model designation. 6. Lag Screws: Conform to ASTM A307-07b. Dimensions and installation shall conform to requirements described in the National Design Specification (NDS), 2015 edition.
D. Exterior Trim and Fascias: RIS Grade Stamped, Redwood, B Heart, Vertical Grain, Kiln Dried, surfaced sizes as indicated on the drawings.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Lumber: 1. Air- or kiln-dry to maximum 19 percent moisture content, prior to installation. Lumber must be 19 percent moisture content prior to close-in and finish. 2. Furnish S4S unless otherwise noted. 3. Size to conform with rules of governing standard. Sizes shown are nominal unless otherwise noted.
2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Grade Mark each piece of lumber. Marking must be done by recognized agency. Lumber Manufacturer's Association Certificates may be accepted in lieu of such grade and trademarks. 1. Douglas Fir shall bear WCLIB grade stamp.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Inspection: 1. Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly proceed. 2. Verify that rough carpentry may be performed in strict accordance with the original design and all pertinent codes and regulations.
B. Selection of Lumber Pieces: Carefully select all members. Select individual pieces so that knot and obvious defects will not interfere with placing bolts or proper nailing or making proper connections. Cut out and discard all defects which will render a piece unable to serve its intended function.
C. Lumber may be rejected by the Architect, whether or not it has been installed, for excessive warp, twist, bow, crook, mildew, fungus, or mold, as well as for improper cutting and fitting. No load carrying member shall be exposed to earthen materials.
D. Shimming: Do not shim any framing component.
06 10 00 - 3 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
3.02 FASTENING
A. Nailing: Except as otherwise indicated on Drawings or specified, all nailing shall be as scheduled on Drawings: 1. Nails or Spikes shall be common wire unless noted otherwise. Penetration of nails or spikes shall be one-half the length of the nail or spike into the piece receiving the point. However, to connect pieces 2 inches in thickness, 16d nails shall be used unless noted otherwise. a. Bore holes for nails wherever necessary to prevent splitting. b. Use finish or casing nails for finish work. c. Use of nailing guns is as limited by CBC, and must be approved by Architect and DSA. Submittal of guns and nails is required.
B. Bolts: Bolts shall be of sizes indicated. Drive fit with washers under nuts. Tighten all bolts and screws before closing in.
C. Framing Devices: As specified under Products, sizes as indicated. Use half-length nails where required.
D. Lag Screws: Pre-Bore lead holes and install per CBC 2016 edition, Chapter 23.
3.03 FRAMING AND ROUGH CARPENTRY
A. Plates: Shall be in long lengths and spliced as shown.
B. Blocking: Shall be same thickness and width of studs or joists unless shown otherwise. Blocking shall not be spaced over 8'-0" o.c. Install fire blocking in accordance with CBC 2016 edition, Section 717. Install blocking at all plywood joints unless otherwise noted on the drawings. Install blocking for fastening all surface applied items.
C. Joists and Beams: Shall be in long lengths and spliced over bearings unless shown otherwise. Install with crown side up. Beams or headers indicated to be built up of two or more joists shall be fabricated on the job using full length members. For two piece members, stitch nail pieces together with 16d common nails spaced not over 12" o.c. and staggered. Clinch nails protruding through members. 1. Provide double joists and headers at all openings through floors and roofs unless otherwise shown on Drawings. 2. Provide typical headers at all openings through walls where one or more studs are required to be cut. For penetration through walls narrower than stud spacing, provide solid backing on all sides for fastening finish materials.
D. Wood Furring, Stripping and Grounds: Install as shown or required to provide nailing of materials or passage of pipes, conduits, etc., not otherwise accommodated. Strips used for furring gypsum board wall finishes shall be in widths as wide as existing wood studs. Thickness of strips shall be field verified by Contractor as needed to obtain needed wall finish location.
E. Building Paper: Install two layers in all exterior locations. Install with weather lap edges a minimum of 2 inch horizontal and 6 inch vertical laps. Continue building paper minimum 6 inches around inside and outside corners. Fasten in place with appropriate staples.
F. Cuts or holes in preservative treated wood shall be treated in accordance with AWPB standard M4 in the field.
3.04 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY WORK
A. Miscellaneous Carpentry Work not included under other sections shall be furnished and 06 10 00 - 4 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
installed hereunder as indicated. Carefully locate and securely anchor such items to structure.
B. Shoring and Bracing: Shore or brace for temporary support of all work as required during the construction period except any shoring and bracing specified and included under other sections of these specifications.
C. Temporary Enclosures: Provide and maintain all barricades and enclosures required to protect the work in progress.
D. Protect all work in progress and all work installed, as well as the work of all other trades. Any work damaged as a result of the work under this section shall be corrected to its original condition or replaced if directed by the Architect and at no increase in cost to the Owner.
E. Protection Devices: Pedestrian walkways, barricades, lights, shoring and other protective structures and devices necessary for the protection of pedestrians shall conform in all respects to the requirements of CBC 2016 edition, Section 3303, Title 24 and to the requirements of the Department of Public Works.
3.05 FRAMING TOLERANCES
A. Maximum variation from true flatness: 1/4 inch in ten feet in any direction.
3.06 CLEAN-UP
A. Upon completion of the work of this Section, remove all surplus materials, rubbish and debris from the premises.
[END OF SECTION 06 10 00]
06 10 00 - 5
Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
SECTION 06 64 05 FIBERGLASS-REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) PANELING PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes:
1. Fiberglass-reinforced plastic (FRP) paneling.
2. Installation accessories.
a. Plastic trim.
b. Sealants.
B. Related Sections include: 1. Section 09 21 16 ’’Gypsum Board Systems” for gypsum board substrate behind FRP paneling.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (American Society for Testing and Materials):
1. ASTM C 834: Specification for Latex Sealants.
2. ASTM D 256: Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum Impact Resistance of Plastics.
3. ASTM D 570: Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics.
4. ASTM D 638: Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics.
5. ASTM D 696: Test Method for Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion of Plastics Between -30 deg C and 30 deg C with a Vitrious Silica Dilatometer.
6. ASTM D 790: Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials.
7. ASTM D 2583: Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of a Barcol Impressor.
8. ASTM D 5420: Test Method for Impact Resistance of Flat, Rigid Plastic Specimen by Means of a Striker Impacted by a Falling Weight (Gardner Impact).
9. ASTM E 84: Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
06 64 05 – 1
Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
B. California Department of Health Services: 1. Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers (including 2004 Addenda).
C. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR): 1. 40 CFR, Part 59, Subpart D: National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards.
D. South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD): 1. Rule 1168 - Adhesive and Sealant Applications.
E. USDA/FSIS: United States Department of Agriculture, Food Safety and Inspection Service.
1.4 DEFINITIONS A. VOC: Volatile Organic Compounds.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of panel and accessory.
B. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of plastic panel.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For fiberglass-reinforced plastic panels to include in maintenance manuals. Include manufacturer’s written cleaning instructions and precautions for use of cleaning agents, which could damage panels.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
B. Source Limitations: Obtain plastic paneling and trim accessories from a single manufacturer.
C. Installer Qualifications: A Firm or individual experienced in installing fiberglass- reinforced plastic paneling as specified in this Section, with a record of successful in- service performance.
D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide fiberglass-reinforced plastic panels with the following surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products applied with identical adhesives to substrates per ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:
1. Class A:
a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Follow manufacturer’s written instructions for delivery, storage, and handling of fiberglass-
06 64 05 – 2
Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
reinforced plastic panels.
B. Do not deliver panels until rooms in which they are to be installed are ready to receive them.
C. Store panels flat on a clean dry surface, protected from weather and sunlight.
1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install fiberglass-reinforced plastic paneling until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are at levels to be maintained after building is occupied.
B. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FIBERGLASS-REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) PANELS
A. General: Flat panel formed from modified polyester copolymer resin, homogeneously reinforced with glass fibers; meeting USDA/FSIS requirements for use in food preparation areas.
B. FRP Panel - Class A: Meeting Class A requirements for interior wall and ceiling finishes when tested per ASTM E 84.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Kemlite Company (Crane Composites); Fire-X Glasbord (FX).
b. Marlite, Inc.; Marlite FR.
c. Equal product in accordance with Division 1 requirements for product substitutions.
2. Panel Dimensions: 4 feet by 8 feet.
3. Panel Thickness: 0.09 inch.
4. Face Texture: Embossed pebble grain.
5. Physical Properties:
a. Flexural Strength: 10,000 psi minimum per ASTM D 790.
b. Flexural Modulus: 310,000 psi minimum per ASTM D 790.
c. Tensile Strength: 7,000 psi minimum per ASTM D 638.
06 64 05 – 3
Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
d. Tensile Modulus: 800,000 psi minimum per ASTM D 638.
e. Barcol Hardness: 35 minimum per ASTM D 2583.
f. Izod Impact Strength: 7.2 foot-lbs/inch minimum, notched, per ASTM D 256.
g. Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion: 1.7 x 10'5 inch/inch«deg F maximum per ASTM D 696.
h. Water Absorption: 0.72 percent maximum (24 hours at 77 deg F) per ASTM D 570.
6. Color: As specified in Section 09 06 00 "Colors and Finishes.”
C. FRP Panel - Class C: Meeting Class C requirements for interior wall and ceiling finishes when tested per ASTM E 84.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Kemlite Company (Crane Composites); Glasbord (PIF).
b. Marlite, Inc.; Marlite FRP.
c. Equal product in accordance with Division 1 requirements for product substitutions.
2. Panel Dimensions: 4 feet by 8 feet.
3. Panel Thickness: 0.09-inches.
4. Face Texture: Embossed pebble grain.
5. Physical Properties:
a. Flexural Strength: 8,500 psi minimum per ASTM D 790.
b. Flexural Modulus: 350,000 psi minimum per ASTM D 790.
c. Tensile Strength: 5,000 psi minimum per ASTM D 638.
d. Tensile Modulus: 9,430 psi minimum per ASTM D 638.
e. Barcol Hardness: 35 minimum per ASTM D 2583.
f. Izod Impact Strength: 6 foot-lbs/inch minimum, notched, per ASTM D 256.
g. Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion: 1.6 x 10'5 inch/inch»deg F maximum
06 64 05 – 4
Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
per ASTM D 696.
h. Water Absorption: 0.17 percent maximum (24 hours at 77 deg F) per ASTM D 570.
6. Color: As specified in Section 09 06 00 “Colors and Finishes.” PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. All surfaces to receive FRP shall be properly prepared in strict accordance with manufacturer's specifications and as specified herein. Fill all pin holes, cracks, and other surface imperfections with spackle and scrape off surface splatters and imperfections to leave substrate surfaces smooth and free of damage.
B. All other trade work that penetrates substrate shall be completed before beginning FRP application.
3.02 APPLICATION
A. FRP shall be installed with adhesive supplied by or recommended by the FRP manufacturer.
B. Apply FRP panels according to manufacturer's instructions. No horizontal seams will be permitted.
C. Install trim in longest practical lengths. “Piecing” of trim will not be allowed.
D. Remove excessive adhesive from surfaces immediately.
E. Ensure positive contact of FRP to adhesive material with all wall surfaces. Remove or replace damaged or improperly applied FRP.
F. Provide continuous bead of caulk around all penetrations and transitions to adjacent materials.
3.03 CLEAN-UP:
A. Upon completion of the work of this Section, remove all surplus material, and debris from the premises.
END OF SECTION 06 64 05
06 64 05 – 5
Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
SECTION 07 21 00
BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS
A. The requirements of Divisions 00 & 01 apply to all work of this Section.
1.02 SCOPE
A. Building insulation required for this work includes, but is not necessarily limited to: 1. Sound Insulation. 2. Thermal Insulation in walls and below roof deck.
1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Section 06 10 00: Rough Carpentry
1.04 STANDARDS:
A. CBC, California Building Code - 2019 Edition, as amended.
B. California Quality Standards for Insulating Materials.
C. CBC 2019 edition, Section 719.
1.05 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit the following items in accordance with Divisions 00 & 01: 1. List of materials. 2. Product data for each type of insulation specified. 3. Insulation Certificate: Installer shall submit a copy to the Architect and post in a conspicuous location in each building a certificate signed by the installer and the General Contractor stating that the installation conforms with the requirements of CBC 2019 edition, Title 24, Chapter 2–53, and that the materials installed conform with the requirements of the California Quality Standards for Insulating Materials. The certificate shall state the manufacturer's name and material identification and the installed "R" value. Submittal required.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver materials to the job site and store in a safe dry place with all labels intact and legible at time of installation.
B. Protect building insulation materials before installation and protect the installed work and materials of other trades.
C. In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner.
07 21 00 - 1 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
A. Johns-Manville.
B. Owens–Corning Fiberglass Corporation
C. Celotex Corporation
D. CertainTeed Corporation.
E. Approved equal.
2.02 MATERIALS:
A. Type A, Sound Insulation: A batt-like non-combustible, formaldehyde free product manufactured from inorganic fibers for installation in framed wall cavities. The nominal 16 inch, or as required x 96 inch batts shall be un-faced and sized to fit full depth of framed walls. 1. Un-faced insulation shall comply with ASTM C-665, Type I. 2. Minimum Thickness: As required to fill full depth of wall cavity. 3. Minimum R Value: 11.0 at 75 degrees F in accordance with ASTM C-518 and C-653. 4. Flame Spread = 25, Smoke Developed = 50. 5. Use at ALL interior framed walls to a minimum height of 6" above line of ceiling unless specifically noted otherwise. Additionally, provide minimum 16" wide continuous batt at perimeter of all lay-in acoustic ceilings where opposite side of wall is an occupiable space.
B. Type B, Friction-Fit Thermal Insulation: A blanket-like non-fire rated, formaldehyde free product manufactured from inorganic glass fibers for installation in framed exterior walls. The nominal 16 inch, or as required wide blankets shall be faced with a factory applied integral kraft vapor barrier for use at protected spaces and code approved for applications. 1. Faced insulation shall comply with ASTM C-665, Type II, Class C. 2. Minimum Thickness: As required to fill full depth of wall cavity. 3. Minimum R Value: 19 at 75 degrees F. at 6" or greater walls as shown on Drawings in accordance with ASTM C-518 or C-653. 4. Water Vapor Transmission (permeance): 1.0 perms maximum when tested in accordance with ASTM B-96, desiccant method. Moisture absorption less than 1% by volume. 5. Flame Spread = 25, Smoke Developed = 450. Product is covered by gypsum board wall finish. Flame and smoke ratings do NOT apply to facings per CBC 719.2.1. 6. Use at all non-rated exterior wall and attic wall cavities unless specifically noted otherwise.
C. Type C, Friction-Fit Rated Thermal Insulation: A blanket-like, formaldehyde free product manufactured from inorganic glass fibers for installation in framed exterior walls. The nominal 16 inch, or as required, wide blankets shall be faced with a factory applied integral foil vapor barrier which is flame resistant and code approved for exposed or rated applications. 1. Not used.
D. Type D, Friction-Fit Thermal Insulation: A blanket-like non-fire rated, formaldehyde free product manufactured from inorganic glass fibers for installation in framed ceiling and attic spaces. The nominal 16 inch, or as required wide blankets shall be faced with a factory applied integral kraft vapor barrier for use at protected spaces and code approved for unexposed applications. 1. Faced insulation shall comply with ASTM C-665, Type II, Class C. 2. Minimum Thickness: As required to fill full depth of wall cavity. 3. Minimum R Value: 30 at 75 degrees F. in accordance with ASTM C-518 or C-653. 4. Water Vapor Transmission (permeance): 1.0 perms maximum when tested in accordance 07 21 00 - 2 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
with ASTM B-96, desiccant method. Moisture absorption less than 1% by volume. 5. Flame Spread = 25, Smoke Developed = 450. Product is covered by gypsum board wall finish. Flame and smoke ratings do NOT apply to facings per CBC 719.2.1. 6. Use at all non-rated bottom of roof areas and as otherwise shown on Drawings.
2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS:
A. All other materials, such as additional insulation materials, fasteners, line wire, tape and retainers, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation of building insulation, shall be subject to submittal approvals. 1. Provide additional insulation materials selected from manufacturer's standard materials. These materials shall conform to the specified Codes, Standards and performance requirements as indicated in the Contract Documents or as required for the complete and proper construction of the building envelope.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION:
A. Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect and verify that the installed work of all other trades is complete to the point where this installation may begin.
B. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect. Do not proceed with installation in discrepant areas until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved.
3.02 INSTALLATION:
A. Batt, Blanket Insulation: Provide insulation barrier system with no voids in system. Keep end joints to a minimum. Install with vapor barrier to warm (interior) side. Fit ends and edges tight to framing members. Keep all piping and other work on warm side of insulation. Provide tape vapor barrier joints. Tape as required.
3.03 PROTECTION:
A. Protect installed insulation from damage until covered.
[END OF SECTION 07 21 00]
07 21 00 - 3 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
SECTION 07 90 00
JOINT SEALERS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Preparing sealant substrate surfaces.
B. Concrete Joint Sealants.
C. Sealant and backing.
D. Fireproof Firestopping and firesafing materials and accessories.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 00 72 00: General Conditions.
B. Section 05 50 00: Metal Fabrications
C. Division 26: Electrical.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C834-10 - Latex Sealants.
B. ASTM C920-05 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
C. ASTM E84-10 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
D. ASTM E119-07a - Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
E. ASTM E814-02 - Test Method for Fire Tests of Through Penetration Firestops.
F. FM (Factory Mutual) - Fire Hazard Classifications.
G. UL - Fire Hazard Classifications.
H. UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
I. UL 723 - Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
J. UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops.
K. FS TT-S-00227 - Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Multi-Component.
L. FS TT-S-00230 - Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Single Component.
M. FS TT-S-001543 - Sealing Compound, Silicone Rubber Base.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer’s product data under provisions of Section 00 72 00 for each product required.
07 90 00 - 1 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
B. Submit product data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, limitations, and color availability.
C. Submit samples under provisions of Section 00 72 00.
D. Submit standard color ranges of exposed materials for Architect selection.
E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 00 72 00.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum three years experience.
B. Applicator: Company specializing in applying the work of this section with minimum three years experience, with projects of a similar size and type.
C. Conform to Sealant Waterproofering and Restoration Institute requirements for materials and installation.
D. Prior to installation of joint sealants, field test adhesion to joint substrates. 1. Install joint sealants in 5-foot joint lengths. Allow to cure before testing. Test adhesion by pulling sealant out of joint. 2. Perform field tests for each type of elastomeric sealant and joint substrate. 3. Arrange for tests to take place with joint sealant manufacturer’s technical representative present. 4. Report whether or not sealant in joint connected to pulled out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of product and joint substrate. 5. Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of non-compliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrate during testing.
1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not install solvent curing sealants in enclosed building spaces.
B. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation.
C. Do not install sealants under adverse weather conditions or when temperatures are above or below manufacturer's recommended limitations for installation.
D. Deliver materials in the unopened, original containers or unopened packages with manufacturer’s name, labels, product identification, color, expiration period, curing time and mixing instructions for multi-component materials.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. Provide two year warranty for materials and workmanship under provisions of Section 00 72 00.
B. Warranty: Include coverage of installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve air tight and watertight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.
07 90 00 - 2 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 SEALANTS
A. Silicone Sealant: Silicone Sealant (use at concrete, masonry, or glazing applications): FS TT-S-01543, Class A, low modulus type; Spectrum I as manufactured by Tremco, Inc.
B. Interior Building Sealant: Acrylic-emulsion; one-part, nonsag, mildew-resistant. Complying with ASTM C834-10, formulated to be paintable; Pecora Corp. “AC-20”, Sonneborn “Sonolac”, Tremco Inc. “Tremco Acrylic Latex 834” or approved equal.
C. Sanitary Sealant: One-part mildew-resistant silicone; ASTM C920 Type S; Grade NS Class 25; Uses NT, G, A and O; formulated with fungicide for sealing interior joints with nonporous substrates around ceramic file, showers, sinks and plumbing fixtures; Dow Corning Corp. “786 Mildew Resistant”, or approved equal.
D. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce transmission of airborne sound; Pecora Corp. “BA-98”, Tremco Inc. “Tremco Acoustical Sealant” or approved equal.
E. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed Joints: Nonoxidizing, skinnable, paintanle, gunnable sealant recommended for sealing interior exposed joints to reduce transmission of airborne sound; Pecora Corp. “AC-20”, USG “Sheetrock Acoustical Sealant” or approved equal.
F. Concrete Expansion Joints: Joint sealing material shall be a two-component, self-leveling, polyurethane elastomeric sealant. Product shall be Sikaflex 2cSL as manufactured Sika Corporation, or equal. Color shall be shall be chosen from the full range of manufacturer’s standard colors.
G. Sheet Metal Flashings, Trims, Gutters, & Joints: Joint sealing material shall be a two-component, self-leveling, polyurethane elastomeric sealant. Product shall be Sikaflex 2cSL as manufactured Sika Corporation, or equal. Color shall be shall be chosen from the full range of manufacturer’s standard colors. Provide Sikaflex 260 Primer at all stainless steel and/or galvanized substrate location for proper adhesion of Sikaflex 2cSL.
H. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 00 72 00.
I. Color of sealant shall be as selected by Architect.
2.02 FIRESTOPPING SEALANTS
A. Firestopping Material: One-Piece insert conforming to the following: 1. All fire stopping shall be one part, two stage intumescent sealants and puttys. 2. All fire stopping sealants shall be capable of maintain an effective barrier against flame, heat, and smoke in compliance with the requirements of ASTM E814-09, UL 1479, ASTM E119-09c, UL 723, ASTM E84-10 and UL 263. 3. Fire stopping materials shall be classified in the Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Fire Resistance Directory or listed in the Warnock Hersey International Directory. 4. Fire stopping materials shall be paintable or capable of receiving finish materials in those areas which are exposed to view and which are scheduled to receive finishes. 5. Acceptable Manufacturers: Hilti Firestop Systems, International Protective Coating Corporation “Flamesafe” Systems, 3M Fire Protection Products or approved equal. 6. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 00 72 00.
07 90 00 - 3 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.
B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials.
C. Joint Backing: Non-staining; compatible with sealant and primer; such as round, closed cell polyethylene foam rod; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width. Materials impregnated with oil, bitumen or similar materials shall not be used. Sealant shall not adhere to back-up material.
D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.
E. Solvents; cleaning agents or other accessory materials shall be as recommended by the sealant manufacturer.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces and joint openings are ready to receive work and field measurements are as shown on Drawings and recommended by the manufacturer.
B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing surfaces.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant.
C. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.
D. Perform preparation in accordance with sealant manufacturer's recommendations.
E. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration.
F. Clean concrete, masonry, unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile and similar porous surfaces, by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or acid washing to produce a clean, sound substrate. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints.
G. Clean metal, glass, glazed surfaces of ceramic tile and other non-porous surfaces by chemical cleaners or other means which are not harmful to substrates or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Caulk all exterior joints and openings in the building envelope that are observable sources of air infiltration.
C. Measure joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios.
07 90 00 - 4 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
D. Install joint backing to achieve a neck dimension no greater than 1/3 the joint width. Roll the material into the joint to avoid lengthwise stretching. Do not twist or braid rod stock.
E. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.
F. Prime surfaces to receive joint sealant with primer recommended by sealant manufacturer.
G. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. Apply masking tape where required to protect adjacent surfaces from sealant application.
H. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.
I. Tool joints concave.
J. At all surface mounted light fixtures mounted on gypsum board ceilings, contractor shall caulk light fixture body to ceiling finish to eliminate gap between metal body and fixture. Coordinate locations with drawings.
K. Firestopping: 1. Apply materials in exact accordance with manufacturer’s latest published instructions, requirements, specifications, details and approved submittals. 2. Installation shall be in accordance with the appropriate UL Fire Resistance Directory or Listing with the appropriate Warnock Hersey International Listing. 3. Seal holes or voids made by penetrating items to ensure an effective fire and smoke barrier. 4. Seal intersections and penetrations of floors, ceilings, walls and columns. 5. Seal around cutouts for lights, cabinets, pipes, plumbing, HVAC ducts and electrical boxes, etc. 6. Where floor openings are four inches or more in width and subject to traffic or loading, install cover plate systems capable of supporting same loading as floor. 7. Interface with Other Projects: Coordinate and cooperate with adjacent, contiguous and related materials trades, (such as concrete, drywall, plumbing, conduit, electrical wiring, communication systems) to ensure a proper and timely installation. 8. Seal steel deck flute openings.
3.04 CLEANING AND REPAIRING
A. Clean work under provisions of Section 00 72 00.
B. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces. Use a solvent or cleaning agent as recommended by the sealant manufacturer.
C. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this Section.
3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Protect finished installation under provisions of Section 00 72 00.
B. Protect sealants until cured.
C. Do not paint sealants until sealant is fully cured.
D. Do not paint silicone sealant.
[END OF SECTION 07 90 00] 07 90 00 - 5 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
SECTION 08 11 00
METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Non-Rated Steel Doors.
B. Non-rated Metal Frames.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 00 72 00: General Conditions.
B. Section 06 10 00: Rough Carpentry: Framed Opening.
C. Section 08 71 00: Door Hardware
D. Section 09 90 00: Painting.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/SDI-100 - Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
B. ANSI Z97.1 - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Used in Buildings.
C. ASTM A366/A366M-97e1 - Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold-Rolled, Commercial Quality.
D. ASTM A924 / A924M-09a - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.
E. ASTM A1011 / A1011M-09b - Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High- Strength Low-Alloy High Strength Low Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength
F. ASTM A1008 – Standard Specifications for Steel Sheet, Cold -Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High- Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability.
G. ASTM A568 – Standard Specifications for Sheet Steel and Strip, Carbon, and High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, General Requirements for
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide door and frame complying with Steel Door Institute "Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Door and Frames" (SDI 100), and as herein specified.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 00 72 00.
B. Shop Drawings: Include illustrations and schedule of finish hardware, door and frame size, type, material, construction, finishing, anchoring, accessories, and preparation for installing hardware. 1. Method of attachment of frames to structure shall be approved by Architect.
C. Templates: Furnish hardware templates to fabricator of frames and doors to be factory prepared 08 11 00 - 1 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
for installation of hardware.
D. General Contractor to confirm field measurements of all openings prior to submittal and fabrication of doors and frames.
1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Deliver all materials under protective cover and store in upright position within a dry enclosed space in a manner that will prevent rust and damage. Do not create a humidity chamber by using a plastic or canvas shelter that is not adequately vented.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Steelcraft Manufacturing Co. a. Doors: L Series with Polystyrene Core b. Frames: F Series B. Curries Doors a. Doors: 707 Series b. Frames: M Series C. Ceco a. Doors: Legion Series b. Frames: S Series D. Approved Equal
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip for Frames: Commercial quality carbon steel, complying with ASTM A1011 / A1011M-09b.
B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets for Doors: Commercial quality carbon steel, complying with ASTM A1008 / A1008M-09a.
C. Factory Applied Primer Paint: Manufacturer standard rust inhibitor primer.
2.03 METAL DOOR FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate to sizes shown, providing necessary clearances and bevels to permit operation without binding. Door shall be free from warp, wave, buckle or other defect. Field verify size of all doors. 1. Flush Door Construction: Door shall be fabricated with face sheets of 16 gauge steel. Weld face sheets 2 inches on center, minimum. Door shall be flush with edge seams filled and ground smooth. Bevel lock and hinge edges 1/8" in 2". Door shall be provided with top and bottom inverted 16 gauge steel channels welded within the door. Door shall be polystyrene core. No exposed seams shall occur on the door face or vertical edge. The top and bottom of the door shall be closed with a recessed channel and flush end closure treatment.
B. Preparation of Hardware: Door shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped at the factory from templates for all mortise hardware listed in the hardware schedule. Door shall be reinforced only for surface applied hardware such as closers, checks, escutcheons and kickplates, the drilling and tapping for which is to be done in the field by the door erector. Reinforcement shall consist of 12 gauge for locksets and latchsets, and 14 gauge for surface applied hardware, except butts, which shall have 3/16" thick plate. Door shall be provided with reinforcing unit as recommended by lock manufacturer. A continuous 12 ga. reinforcement shall be provided for continuous hinge prep and installation. 08 11 00 - 2 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
C. Hardware Mounting Heights and Door Clearances: In accordance with ANSI Industry Standards.
2.04 METAL FRAME FABRICATION
A. General: Pressed metal frames shall be formed to shapes shown. General Contractor to field verify size of all frames. Head and jambs are to be notched, mitered, fully welded and finished to present a smooth surface for painting. 1. Frames shall be fabricated from 16 gauge galvanized A60 steel, and shall be designed with integral rabbet, stop and trim. 2. At locations where existing wood/metal door frame is being replaced in existing wall, knock-down frames are acceptable. Contractor shall shim between rough opening and new frame as required.
B. Anchors: Frame shall be securely anchored to wooden structures with spot welded anchor straps and to existing masonry structure with masonry fasteners, punched and dimpled frames. Where anchorage is not specifically delineated, anchorage shall be as for a similar assembly, or approved manufacturer’s standard type, to securely fasten frames to wall construction involved (wire anchors not acceptable); also provide adjustable floor anchor at bottom of each door jamb. Provide minimum 3 anchors, equally spaced, at jamb end of frames. Anchors shall provide stiffness and rigidity to keep frames square, in accurate position without twisting, buckling or warping. It is acceptable for flush anchor heads to be left exposed.
C. Preparation for Hardware: Frames shall be prepared at the factory for all hardware using templates furnished by hardware supplier. Locations of miscellaneous hardware shall conform to the recommendations for the Door and Hardware Institute. Mortise, reinforce, drill and tap for all mortise type hardware. Reinforce for surface applied hardware, the drilling and tapping for which is to be done in the field door erector. 1. All hardware cutouts shall have steel plate reinforcements with tapped holes welded to frame. Reinforcement shall include 3/16” butt reinforcement; 12 gauge lock strike; 14 gauge for surface applied items. 2. Provide for three (3) rubber door silencers at single doors and (2) silencers at head of pair doors. Omit holes at frames to receive unitized weatherstripping; refer to Section 08 71 00 Door Hardware.
2.05 FINISH
A. All surfaces shall be cleaned, phosphatized, and given one coat rust-inhibiting prime paint in accordance with the Steel Door Institute Specification "Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Primer Painted Steel Doors and Frames".
B. Field paint doors and frames under provisions of Section 09 90 00.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Set Frame level and plumb, and brace adequately to prevent damage or distortion. Secure standard height frames to structure with minimum of three anchors at each jamb. Provide one additional anchor per 18” above standard height. 1. Attach to wooden structure with 16d nails on both sides of each strap into stud. 2. Attach to existing masonry structure with masonry anchors of appropriate length to penetrate masonry a minimum of 2”. Bondo screw heads, sand smooth to conceal fasteners. 3. Removable Spreaders: Size opening by inserting wood spreader cut to the exact opening width and fasten sill anchor at strike jamb with nails or screws. Remove spreader. Insert 08 11 00 - 3 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
adjusting screw cover. 4. If knock-down frame is used, contractor shall shim between new frame and existing rough opening. Gap shall be fully filled all around frame.
B. Door Installation: Fit hollow door accurately in the frame with a tolerance of 1/8” at jamb and head.
C. Fit hollow metal door in existing wood framed opening (jamb) with a tolerance of 1/8” at jamb and head.
3.02 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straight edge, corner to corner.
B. New doors shall have maximum 3/8” undercut above finished floor with no threshold and 3/4" undercut above finished floor with threshold.
3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Prime Coat Touch-Up: Immediately after erection, sand smooth all rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch-up of compatible air-drying primer. Touch-up shall not be obvious.
B. Cleaning and Finishing: Upon completion of the work, clean all exposed surfaces, removing any discoloration or foreign matter, and touch up all abraded or cut areas and exposed edges with finishing material recommended by the manufacturer. Touch-up of finish shall not be obvious.
C. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating finish hardware in hollow metal work just prior to final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition.
D. Defective Work: Remove and replace defective work, including doors and frames which are warped, bowed or otherwise damaged as directed by the Architect, with no additional cost to the Owner.
E. Protection: Protect installed hollow metal work against damage from other construction work.
3.04 CLEAN-UP
A. Upon completion of the work of this section, remove all excess materials, rubbish and debris from the premises.
[END OF SECTION 08 11 00]
08 11 00 - 4 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
SECTION 08 71 00
DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Hardware for hollow steel.
1.02 WORK FURNISHED BUT INSTALLED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
A. Furnish templates to Section 08 11 00 for door and frame preparation.
B. Furnish templates to Section 08 71 00 for door and frame preparation.
1.03 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 00 72 00: General Conditions.
B. Section 06 20 00: Finish Carpentry.
C. Section 08 11 00: Metal Doors and Frames.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ANSI A117.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Disabled People.
B. AWS - Architectural Woodwork Standards.
C. BHMA - Builders' Hardware Manufacturers Association.
D. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute.
E. NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers.
F. 2019 California Building Code Chapter 10 & 11B.
G. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.
H. SDI - Steel Door Institute
1.05 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work of this Section with other directly affected Sections involving manufacturer of any internal reinforcement for door hardware.
B. Contractor to confirm field measurements, all hinge prep locations and threshold conditions prior to submission of submittals.
C. Contractor shall salvage all existing door hardware for owner. After owner’s evaluation of salvaged hardware, contractor shall dispose of any hardware not kept by owner.
08 71 00 - 1 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers: Companies specializing in manufacturing door hardware with minimum three years documented experience.
B. Hardware Supplier: Company specializing in supplying institutional door hardware with minimum three years documented experience.
C. Hardware Supplier Personnel: Employ a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) to assist in the work of this Section.
D. Hardware Installer Personnel: All hardware must be installed by a qualified installer with a minimum of 3 years installation experience of door hardware. Individual(s) must be approved prior to start of work.
E. Mandatory pre-installation meeting required with manufacturer representatives, Inspector of Record and Construction Manager.
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. Schedules to be in vertical format, listing each door opening, and organized into “hardware sets” indicating complete designations of every item required for each door opening to function as intended. Hardware schedule shall be submitted within two (2) weeks from date the purchase order is received by the finish hardware supplier. Furnish four (4) copies of revised schedules after approval for field and file use. Note any special mounting instructions or requirements with the hardware schedule. Schedules to include the following information: 1. Location of each hardware set cross-referenced to indications on drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. 2. Handing and degree of swing of each door. 3. Door and frame sizes and materials. 4. Keying information. 5. Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item. 6. Elevation drawings and operational descriptions for all electronic openings. 7. Name and manufacturer of each hardware item. 8. Fastenings and other pertinent information. 9. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols and codes contained in schedule 10. Mounting locations for hardware when varies from standard.
B. Submit schedule, shop drawings, and product data under provisions of Section 00 72 00.
C. Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware. D. Provide product data on specified hardware.
E. Submit manufacturer's parts lists, templates, and installation instructions under provisions of Section 00 72 00.
F. Perform field measurements for contractor determined heights of stop/hold open devices prior to submitting the hardware submittal.
G. Provide submittal for proposed installer(s) with statement of qualifications.
1.08 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 00 72 00.
B. Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance. 08 71 00 - 2 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
C. Include parts list.
1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 00 72 00.
B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 00 72 00.
C. Package hardware items individually, label and identify all hardware with door opening code and hardware group/number to match hardware schedule. Ensure each package contains all screws, and miscellaneous items required for a complete and operational scheduled installation.
D. Deliver Schlage PRIMUS permanent keys, Schlage PRIMUS permanent cylinders, and Schlage Standard permanent cylinders to the designated location as specified by the Construction Manager.
E. Protect hardware from theft and/or damage by cataloging and storing in secure area. Temporary storage facilities are to be provided by the Contractor.
1.10 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Provide special wrenches and tools applicable to each different or special hardware component.
B. Provide maintenance tools and accessories supplied by hardware component manufacturer.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Provide guarantee (minimum of) from hardware supplier as follows: 1. Continuous Hinges: Lifetime 2. Closers: Ten years (except electronic closers, two years) 3. Exit devices: Ten years. Contact Mark Wootton with IR Security and Safety at (916)600- 7700 to obtain ten year warranty. 4. All other hardware: Two years.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Butt Hinges: wide throw ball bearing hinge for doors requiring throw in excess of 2 13/16” as manufactured by Ives Model No. 5BB1HW X NRP; Stanley; McKinney; or approved equal. 1. Furnish a minimum of four butts per door. For doors over seven feet provide additional butt for every 30” in height. 2. Unless otherwise noted or specified, the size of the butts will be determined by the following table: a. Hinge Height: Doors 1-3/4" thick and up to 36" wide, 4-1/2" Doors 1-3/4" thick and 37" to 48" wide, 5" b. Hinge Width: Provide widths sufficient to clear trim and/or veneer projection when door swings 180 degrees. 3. Provide non-removable pins at all exterior out-swinging doors and where required by owner for security reasons.
B. Locksets and Latch Sets: Schlage (Ingersoll-Rand Company). No or-equals or substitutions allowed. 1. Locks: Schlage “D” series with Rhodes lever design (Vandlgard function at exterior doors 08 71 00 - 3 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
ONLY). 2. Strikes: a. Furnish standard strikes with extended lips where required to protect trim from being marred by latch bolt. b. Provide strike cup in hollow metal frames. c. Verify whether standard or ANSI cutouts are provided in metal frames. 3. Mounting Height: 34” to 44” above finish floor.
C. Door Closers: LCN (Ingersoll-Rand Company) or Norton (ASSA ABLOY Inc) are allowed. LCN model number 4111 or Norton model number 7500. 1. Hold Open CUSH/Stop: LCN model #4111HCUSH 2. Door closers must be sized according to manufacturer's recommended schedule of sizes. 3. Supply drop plates at narrow top rail doors and parallel-arm closers at reverse bevel doors and where doors swing a full 180 degrees. 4. Provide long-arm at doors with wide-throw hinges. 5. Closer Pull effort – must meet ADA requirements, but not exceeding the following: a. Interior: 5 pounds maximum. b. Exterior: 5 pounds maximum. c. Rated Doors: 15 pounds maximum.
D. Door/Wall stops: See Hardware Groups below.
E. Kick-plates Plates: See Hardware Groups below.
F. Weatherstrip: See Hardware Groups below.
G. Door Bottom: See Hardware Groups below.
H. Thresholds, Floor Plates: See Hardware Groups below.
I. Lock Protector: See Hardware Groups below.
J. Fasteners: Furnish necessary screws, bolts, nuts and other items as required, per manufacturers installation instructions. 1. Fasteners shall match hardware materials and finish. 2. Furnish required expansion shields, sex bolts, toggle bolts, and other anchors as recommended by the hardware manufacturer. 3. Furnish only machine screws on hollow metal doors, except door closers and lock protectors attachment (sex bolts).
K. Door Frame Top Rain Drips: See Hardware Groups below.
L. Substitutions and “or equals”: See provisions under Section 00 72 00.
2.02 KEYS AND KEYING
A. Construction Keying: 1. Contractor to provide the temporary construction keying system during the construction period for exterior and interior locks. 2. Contractor to provide 20 (ea.) temporary construction keys. 3. The Owner or Construction Manager will void the operation of the construction keys using the Extractor Key near project completion.
B. Quantity of blank keys to be supplied under this contract: 1. Twenty (20).
08 71 00 - 4 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
2.03. FINISHES
A. Finish on hardware shall match 626 (dull chrome) unless specified otherwise.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and field verified dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings.
B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install all hardware in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and requirements of SDI.
B. Use the templates provided by hardware item manufacturer. Mounting heights for hardware from finished floor to centerline of hardware item shall be between 34” to 44” and conform to ANSI standards.
C. Field measure latch to strike distance prior to mounting Exit Devices.
D. Conform to Title 24 and 2019 CBC, Chapter 11B for positioning requirements of the disabled.
E. Hinge Installation: 1. All fasteners for hinge in new metal frame are to be install per manufacture typical installation recommendations into appropriate steel backing required under section 08 11 00.
F. Door Closer Installation: 1. Sex bolts are mandatory for attachment of closer to door. (Door must be prepared with spacer at closers to prevent dimpling of doors.) 2. Closers to be fitted with appropriate length arm to accommodate throw of hinge and enable door to open 180 degrees. See Paragraph 2.01-D-3 for more information. 3. Closers Push & Pull effort - must meet disable access requirements: a. Exterior and Interior: 5 pounds maximum. b. Rated Doors: The Authority having Jurisdiction, may increase the maximum effort to operate fire doors to achieve positive latching, but not to exceed 15 lbs. maximum. c. Door closers and gate closers shall be adjusted so that from an open position of 90 degrees, the time required to move the door to a position of 12 degrees from the latch is 5 seconds minimum. 4. All fasteners for door closer fasteners in existing wood frame are to penetrate a minimum of 2” into solid wood (structural framing).
G. Attachment of door/wall stop: 1. At wall mounted door stops, anchor wall portion of stop to solid wood backing. If backing does not align with door stop, provide 1/4” thick galvanized steel plate surface mounted to face of building spanning to backing on both sides.
H. Weather-stripping Installation: 1. Install with manufacture screws within 1” from all ends. If trimming is required, cuts shall be smooth, burr-free, and metal material shall not be warped or deformed. Cleanly cut weather-stripping material. 08 71 00 - 5 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
I. Lock Protector Installation: 1. Install with sex bolts for flush installation.
3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Lubricate moving parts with lubrication type recommended by the manufacturer. Replace units, which cannot be adjusted and lubricated to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application made.
B. At completion of the work all protective coverings shall be removed and all hardware shall be cleaned and polished.
C. Check and re-adjust operation of all finish hardware just prior to final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition.
3.04 SCHEDULES:
A. The following hardware groups and keying schedule refers to types of hardware required for the project. The contractor and hardware supplier shall confirm field measurements and field conditions necessary to facilitate the coordination of work of this and related sections, prior to submittal of finish hardware. The Contractor and hardware supplier shall be responsible for making their own take-off. Hardware for a complete installation is required, whether specifically mentioned or not. Any discrepancies shall be brought to the attention of the Architect in the hardware submittal. Hardware part numbers refer to listed manufacturer's underlined in Paragraph 2.01. Refer to the door schedule and/or floor plans and/or sill details for threshold types.
(Hardware Groups Follow)
Interior Doors
Hardware Group I01: Interior Communicating Doors
Hinges, Butt (3) Ives 5BB1HW 626 Lockset (1) Schlage ND82PD 626 Closer (1) LCN 4111HCUSH x EDA (push-side) --- Kickplate (1) Ives 8400 x 10” x 2” LDW 630 Door Stop (1) Ives WS 402CCV
Hardware Group I02: Interior Staff Restrooms
Hinges, Butt (3) Ives 5BB1HW 626 Lockset (1) Schlage ND85PD 626 Closer (1) LCN 4111HCUSH x EDA (pull-side) --- Kickplate (1) Ives 8400 x 10” x 2” LDW 630 Door Stop (1) Ives WS 402CCV
[END OF SECTION 08 71 00]
08 71 00 - 6 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
SECTION 09 21 16
GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Gypsum board.
B. Taped and sanded joint treatment.
C. Accessories.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 00 72 00: General Conditions.
B. Section 06 10 00: Rough Carpentry.
C. Section 07 90 00: Joint Sealants.
D. Section 09 90 00: Painting: Surface finish.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASTM C1396 / C1396M-13- Gypsum Wallboard.
B. ANSI/ASTM C514-04(2009)e1 - Nails for the Application of Gypsum Wallboard.
C. ANSI/ASTM C630/C630M-03e1 - Water Resistant Gypsum Backing Board.
D. Gypsum Association GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board Products.
E. ASTM C645-13 - Non-Load Bearing (Axial) Steel Studs, Runners (Track), and Rigid Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board.
F. ASTM C840-11 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.
G. ASTM C955-11C- Load Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs, Runners (Track) and Bracing or Bridging, for Screw Application of Gypsum Board.
H. ASTM C1002-07 - Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Wallboard.
I. ASTM C1047-10A - Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator: Company specializing in gypsum board systems work with minimum five years experience.
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver: All materials shall be delivered in original packages or bundles with the manufacturer's labels intact and legible.
B. Handling and Storage: Materials shall be kept dry, stacked off the ground and properly supported 09 21 16 - 1 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
and protected from weather. Protect all edges and surfaces. Stack wallboard flat.
1.06 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Building Temperature and Ventilation: Do not install wallboard and joint compounds if building temperature is below 55 degrees F and proper ventilation is not provided to eliminate excessive moisture from building.
B. Protect work in progress as well as work of other trades. Clean surfaces that have been spotted during wallboard application.
C. Contractor shall remove and reinstall all existing conduit, wiremold, light fixtures, fire alarm devices, etc. as required to perform work as listed in this specification. Suspend all wiring as required during work where equipment cannot be disconnected.
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 00 72 00.
B. Provide product data on metal framing, gypsum board, joint tape, and topping compound.
C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 00 72 00.
D. Submit 2' x 2' sample of machine applied drywall texture finish.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEM
A. U.S. Gypsum Co.
B. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products: 1. Pabco Gypsum Co. 2. Domtar America, Inc. 3. Gold Bond Building Products. 4. Georgia-Pacific Corp. 5. National Gypsum. 6. Or approved equal.
C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 00 72 00.
2.02 GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS
A. Mold Tough Firecode Cores Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C473, ASTM D3273, ASTM C1396 and ASTM C630, Firecode Core(Type X), 5/8 inch thick, with tapered and wrapped edges. Provide on entire wall where moisture will be present such as toilet rooms, janitor rooms, kitchens, behind new ceramic wall tile and other areas where water will be present. Also provide within 5 feet of all sinks and drinking fountains. USG Model No. WB2390.
B. Regular Firecode Cores Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C1396, ASTM C840, 5/8 inch thick, Firecore Core(Type X), maximum permissible length; ends square cut, tapered edges. USG Model No. WB1473.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Acoustical Sealant: Non-hardening, non-skinning, for use in conjunction with gypsum board; 09 21 16 - 2 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
"Acoustical Sealant" manufactured by Tremco.
B. Corner Beads: Fine mesh expanded metal wing type, zinc coated in conformance with ASTM A525, G90 coating designation.
C. Edge Trim: GA 216; Type "J" bead.
D. Joint Materials: GA 216; reinforcing tape, joint compound, adhesive, water, and fasteners.
E. Fasteners: General provide specific fasteners required for fire rated assemblies. 1. Use Type S screws for gypsum board attachment to light steel framing. 2. Use Type S screws for gypsum board attachment to 20 gauge and heavier steel framing. 3. Use Type W screws for gypsum board attachment to wood framing. 4. Use Type G screws for gypsum board attachment to gypsum board. 5. Use Annular ring nails, conforming to ANSI/ASTM C514, sufficient length to provide a minimum of 3/4 inch penetration into framing members.
F. Setting Compound: Durabond as manufactured by USG. For use at all locations where gypsum board is in direct contact with concrete curbs.
G. Electrical Box Sealer: Lowry's "Electrical Box Pads", 6" x 8" x 1-1/8" resilient sealer pads.
H. Provide new stainless steel duplex outlet covers and light switch covers at all existing and new devices. No plastic covers accepted. Minimum (2) light switch covers per room and (6) electrical outlet covers per room.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings.
B. Check framing for accurate spacing and alignment.
C. Do not proceed with installation of wallboard until deficiencies are corrected and surfaces to receive wallboard are acceptable.
D. The Painting Contractor shall not be required to accept the gypsum wallboard installation until after he has applied sealer. At that time he shall inspect the installation and report to the General Contractor, with a letter to the Architect, of any surface damage, defects or uneven walls. Uneven walls shall mean those that are not straight, plumb or of an even, true plane. All such discrepancies shall be the responsibility of gypsum wallboard installer, and shall be connected by him prior to application of further wall decoration.
E. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing surfaces substrate.
F. At all existing gyp. board surfaces to be refinished as shown on the drawings, Contractor shall rough sand all surfaces prior to skim coat for acceptable adhesion.
3.02 ACOUSTICAL ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION
A. Install acoustical sealant within partitions in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install resilient sealer pads over backs and sides of electrical junction boxes.
09 21 16 - 3 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
3.03 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION
A. Prior to installation of any gypsum board product, Contractor shall review locations of all toilet room accessories with owner as required by Section 10 88 00 to place all backing required.
B. Install gypsum board in accordance with GA 216 and ASTM C840-08.
C. Erect single layer standard gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing.
D. Use screws when fastening gypsum board to metal furring or framing, or 1x framing.
E. Use screws when fastening gypsum board to wood furring or framing.
F. Fasteners for all vertical gypsum boards shall be placed at 8” at the perimeter and 12” in field U.O.N. on drawings.
G. Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board with sealant.
H. Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces as indicated by Architect.
I. Place corner beads at external corners. Use longest practical length. Place edge trim where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials.
J. Contractor shall provide new mud ring extensions for all electrical switch and outlets to allow device to flush with face of new gypsum board surface.
K. At all locations where gypsum board extends past bottom sill plate and contacts face of curb, apply Durabond product to back side of gypsum board per manufacturer’s recommendations to secure to face of concrete curb. Provide moderate pressure and temporary nailing or shoring to ensure adequate bond.
3.04 JOINT TREATMENT AND FINISH TEXTURE
A. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes.
B. Feather coats onto adjoining surfaces so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch.
C. At toilet room areas, finish smooth, ultralite orangepeel texture. Gyp. board shall be finished to Level 4 as described the USG Corporation. Where existing gypsum board remains in toilet room, it shall be skim-coated as required to match adjacent new gypsum board. Existing and/or new ceiling system shall be skimmed to match Level 4 finish for consistent finish from wall to ceiling. Contractor shall remove and reinstall all devices/equipment from ceiling as required to provide work as required.
D. All new non-toilet room drywall surfaces to receive finish painting shall be finished to Level 4 as described by the USG Corporation and receive a spray applied, light orangepeel texture; where new gypsum board abuts existing finish to match existing adjacent texture.
3.05 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction.
3.06 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Cleaning and Repair: Clean surfaces that have been spotted or soiled during wallboard 09 21 16 - 4 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
application. Contractor shall clean all light fixture lenses, fire alarm devices, electrical outlets, as performing work.
B. Defective Work: Remove and replace defective work which cannot be satisfactorily repaired, at the direction of the Architect, with no additional cost to the Owner.
C. Protection: Protect installed work against damage from other construction work.
3.07 CLEAN-UP
A. Upon completion of the work under this Section, remove all surplus material, rubbish and debris from the premises and leave floors "broom clean".
[END OF SECTION 09 21 16]
09 21 16 - 5 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
SECTION 09 30 13
CERAMIC TILE WORK
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Ceramic tile wall and base finish using the thin-set application method TCA W242 U.O.N.
B. Ceramic tile repair work.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 00 72 00: General Conditions.
B. Section 07 90 00: Joint Sealers.
C. Section 09 21 16: Gypsum Board.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/TCA A118.4 - Latex-Portland Cement Mortar.
B. ANSI/TCA A137.1 - Specifications for Ceramic Tile.
C. TCA (Tile Council of America) - Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation.
D. ASTM C144-04 - Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.
E. ASTM C150 /C150M-09 - Portland Cement.
F. ASTM C171-07 - Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete.
G. ASTM C226-07 - Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt used in Waterproofing.
H. ISO 13007 – Standards for ceramic tiles, grouts and adhesives.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 00 72 00.
B. Submit shop drawings indicating tile layout, perimeter conditions, junctions with dissimilar materials, thresholds, and setting details.
C. Submit product data under provisions of Section 00 72 00.
D. Submit product data indicating material specifications, characteristics, and instructions for using adhesives and grouts.
E. Submit samples under provisions of Section 00 72 00. Provide existing tile sample with new sample for comparison at patch repair work.
F. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 00 72 00.
G. Submit maintenance data under provisions of Section 00 72 00.
09 30 13 - 1 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
H. Include recommended cleaning and stain removal methods, and cleaning materials.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to ANSI/TCA A137.1
B. Conform to TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation, latest edition.
1.06 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in the manufacture of products specified in this Section with minimum three years experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in applying the work of this Section with minimum three (3) years’ experience.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 00 72 00.
B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 00 72 00.
C. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not install adhesives in a closed, unventilated environment.
B. Maintain 50 degrees F during installation of mortar materials.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS - TILE
A. DAL-TILE
B. AMERICAN OLEAN
C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 00 72 00.
2.02 TILE MATERIAL
A. Ceramic Tile Wall Base: Shall match floor tile.
B. Ceramic Floor Tile: Size 2” x 2” x ¼" Edge Cushioned Surface Finish Unglazed, Smooth Color See Finish Schedule in Drawings
2.03 MISCELLANEOUS TILE MATERIALS:
A. Special Shapes and Trim Shapes: Provide as shown or required for a complete installation of tile work. Special shapes provided shall include special corners, caps, stops, returns, trimmers; curb tiles, coved shapes, etc. Provide surface bull nose at exposed edges where tile abuts dissimilar materials. Provide in colors to be consistent with related tile types (floor, base or wall). 09 30 13 - 2 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
2.04 INSTALLATION MATERIALS: A. Installation Materials for Restroom: 1. Concrete Primer: As recommended by waterproofing membrane manufacturer. 2. Waterproofing Membrane Thin set: Self curing liquid rubber polymer which is cold applied with an integral reinforcing fabric to form a seamless heavy duty waterproofing membrane suitable for direct application of thin set tile, in conformance with ANSI A118.10. a. Laticrete International Inc.; Laticrete 9235 Waterproof Membrane. b. Mapei Corporation; Mapelastic HPG. 3. Adhesive: a. Floors and Base: 1) Compatible with waterproofing membrane. 2) Manufacturers: a) Laticrete International Inc.; Laticrete 15 Premium Mastic. b) Mapei Corporation; Ultramastic ECO. c) Or accepted equal. b. Walls: Latex Portland cement mortar, in conformance with ANSI A118.4. 4. Leveling Grout and Grout: a. Epoxy; color to be selected by the Architect. b. Manufacturers: 1) Laticrete International Inc.; Latapoxy SP-100. 2) Bostik; EzPoxy Colored Epoxy Setting & Grouting System. 3) Mapei Corporation; Kerpoxy.
2.05 ACCESSORIES: A. Cleaning Materials: 1. Cleaning materials for ceramic tiles as per tile manufacturer's recommendations. B. Sealer: 1. Over all grout joints and unglazed tile work of this Section, provide a sealer listed in the "Tested Materials" list of the Ceramic Tile Institute, and applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and as recommended by tile manufacturer. C. Provide all additional materials and accessories required for a complete installation. Provide as required or recommended by manufacturer's instructions or referenced standards.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive Work.
B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts condition of existing substrate.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Protect surrounding work from damage or disfiguration.
B. Vacuum clean existing substrate and damp clean.
C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness tolerances.
D. Apply sealer to surfaces as recommended by adhesive manufacturer.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install all tile in accordance with TCA Handbook, latest edition, for Ceramic Tile Installation. 09 30 13 - 3 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
B. Request tile pattern from Architect if not shown. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings.
C. Cut and fit tile tight to penetrations through tile and provide caulk joint. Form corners and bases neatly. Align floor, base, and wall joints.
D. Place tile joints uniform in width. Make joints watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout.
E. Sound tiles after setting and replace any hollow units.
F. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting.
G. Provide control joints around all dissimilar materials, penetrations, transition at wall to ceiling and walls to floor, inside corners, over existing building joints and in field at TCA recommended intervals. All control joints shall extend through setting bed and be caulked with sanded sealant to match grout joints.
H. Jointing Pattern at Interior Corners: Unless otherwise shown, tile color shall not wrap at interior corners. Start with alternate color to not interrupt pattern. See pattern detail in drawings for pattern reference.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean work under provisions of 00 72 00.
B. Clean tile surfaces.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect finished installation under provisions of Section 00 72 00.
B. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface.
[END OF SECTION 09 30 13]
09 30 13 - 4 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY A. Work includes furnishing of materials and equipment, preparation of surfaces, and completion of painting and finishing of surfaces as required by Drawings and specified herein: 1. Related Work: a. Factory, pre-finished items as specified in various sections. b. Shop painting specified in respective sections. c. Architectural woodworking. d. Surfaces not to be painted: 1) Pre-finished wall, ceiling and floor coverings. 2) Items with factory-applied final finish. 3) Concealed ducts, pipes and conduit. Except where visible through grills and screens, refer to Drawings. 4) Surfaces specifically scheduled or noted on Drawings not to be painted. B. Related Sections (Including but not limited to): 1. Section 05 50 00: Metal Fabrications. 2. Section 07 62 00: Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 3. Section 09 21 16: Gypsum Board Systems.
1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D16 apply: 1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85- degree meter. 2. Eggshell refers to low sheen finish with a gloss range between 20 and 35 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 3. Semigloss refers to medium sheen finish with a gloss range between 35 and 70 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 4. Full gloss refers to high sheen finish with a gloss range more than 70 when measured at a 60-degree meter.
1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Submit technical data and information for block fillers, primers, paints, and coatings, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material proposed for use: a. Indicate manufacturer's instructions for special surface preparation procedures, substrate conditions requiring special attention. b. Material List: Provide inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify
09 90 00 - 1 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
each material by manufacturer's catalog number, series, and general classification. B. Samples: 1. Submit for each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat: a. Provide stepped samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use representative colors when preparing samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved. b. Provide list of material and application for each coat of each sample. Label each sample as to location and application. c. Submit samples on following substrates for review of color and texture only: 1) Concrete: Provide two 4-inch square samples for each color and finish. 2) Concrete Masonry: Provide two 4" x 8" samples of masonry, with mortar joint in the center, for each finish and color. 3) Painted Wood: Provide two 12-inch square samples of each color and material on hardboard. 4) Ferrous and Nonferrous Metals: Provide two 4-inch square samples of flat metal and two 4” X 8” samples of solid metal for each color and finish. C. Product List: Submit product list of each paint system, color, and location of application. Use same product and location designations indicated in Finish Schedule. D. Coating Maintenance Manual: Upon conclusion of the project, the Contractor or paint manufacturer/supplier shall furnish a coating maintenance manual. Manual shall include an Area Summary with Finish Schedule, Area Detail designating where each product/color/finish was used, including product data pages, Manual Safety Data sheets, care and cleaning instructions, touchup procedures, and color samples of each color and finish used. E. Colors are to be selected or approved by Architect and actual color chips shall be supplied to Contractor for matching. All undercoats shall be tinted to approximately half the color of finish coat. F. Approval of final colors: Do not apply final coat of paint until colors have been approved by Architect. G. The number of colors to be used shall be as determined by Architect. Architect reserves the right to vary colors throughout the project.
1.5 QUALITY CONTROL A. Use Professional-grade paint selections that include Manufacturer’s warranty for commercial applications, whenever possible.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver paint materials in sealed original-labeled containers bearing manufacturer’s name, type of paint, stock number, color and instructions for reducing or mixing, where applicable. B. Paint materials and equipment: 1. Store only acceptable project materials on site. 2. Store in a suitable location. 3. Restrict storage to paint materials and related materials. 4. Comply with health and fire regulations. PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
09 90 00 - 2 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
A. Basis of Specifications: Behr Paint Company, Santa Ana, California 92705. Other manufacturers to conform to materials listed and be approved by District and Architect: 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide first quality, 100% acrylic, commercial or industrial products of one of the specified manufacturers. Residential products are not permitted: a. Proprietary Names: 1) Paint Schedule is based on a single manufacturer for convenience with exception to the paint used in specific areas where specialized coatings are required (Refer to Drawings). 2) Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that named products are required to the exclusion of comparable products of specified manufacturers. 3) Furnish product technical data, including per cent solids by weight and volume: (Method 24 analysis) a) VOC content limits and emissions data. b) Certificates of performance for comparable paint products of specified manufacturer. 4) Use MPI index to coordinate performance based a) Paint Products: 5) Behr Paint Company. All Base, Secondary and Trim colors to be Behr Paints, Refer to Drawing Finish Schedule for color designations and exact locations. (Refer to PART 5 REFERENCED Color Schedule Below) 6) Dulux Design Theatre Black: Theater Black (Where applicable for Interior use only, see Drawing Finish Schedule) Flat Black background paint on visible surfaces behind vents, registers, or grilles. a) Aluminum and Steel Paint Products: (To be coordinated with other sections) These are the colors selected for the metal fascia and trim, refer to Drawings Finish Schedule for color designations. (Refer to PART 5 REFERENCED Color Schedule Below) 7) Gutterman’s Choice, 1620 NE Argyle Drive, Portland, OR 97211. (503) 285- 2500. B. Material Compatibility: Provide each paint system including block fillers, primers, and finish coats, that are compatible with one another and with substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. C. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best quality commercial paint material of the various coating types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. Coating systems for each type surface shall be the product of a single manufacturer. D. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. Residential quality paint products are not permitted. E. Chemical Components of Interior Paints and Coatings: 1. Provide products complying with limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): b. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or
09 90 00 - 3 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
more benzene rings). c. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain components restricted by the EPA. F. Accessories: Materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified, of commercial quality. G. Patching Materials: Latex filler compatible with paint systems. H. Fastener Head Cover Materials: Latex filler. I. Theater Black: No Exceptions or alternates. J. Do not thin-finish coats without the manufacturer’s approval. K. Unsuitability of specified products: Claims concerning unsuitability of any material specified or inability to satisfactorily produce the work will not be entertained, unless such claim is made in writing to District/Architect in the submittal phase and before work is started. L. Number of coats scheduled is minimum. Apply additional coats at no additional cost, if necessary, to completely hide base materials, produce uniform color, and provide satisfactory finish result. M. Submitted paints and coatings will comply with air- quality regulations and established VOC content limits of the North Coast Unified Air Quality Management District (NCUAQMD) having jurisdiction.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations as to environmental conditions under which coatings and coating systems can be applied. Do not apply paint or coatings when temperature is below 50°F. B. Do not apply exterior paint in damp or rainy weather; ensure that the surface has dried thoroughly before proceeding. Surface temperature must be at least 5°F above dew point before painting. C. Do not apply finish in areas where dust or contaminants are being generated. D. Use low odor, low VOC products to minimize impact on indoor environmental air quality.
3.2 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces scheduled to receive paint and finishes for conditions that will adversely affect execution, permanence or quality of work and which cannot be put into acceptable condition through preparatory work as included in Article 3.3 "Preparation." Notify Owner’s Representative in writing of any defects or conditions which will prevent a satisfactory installation. B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. C. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: 1. When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: d. Concrete: 12 percent. e. Portland Cement Plaster and Stucco: 12 percent. f. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent. g. Wood: 15 percent. h. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
09 90 00 - 4 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
D. Portland Cement Plaster Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured. E. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. F. Proceed with surface preparation and coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Application of coating is construed as acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.3 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces to receive paint thoroughly of substances, which could impair adhesion of paints, including dust, dirt, oil and grease before application of any coatings. Prepare surfaces as follows: 1. Wood Substrates: a. Remove mill glaze and dust, sand smooth. Fill open joints, cracks, nail holes, and other pits or depressions flush and smooth with wood filler after priming. Use wood putty to match finish paint coat. Touch up knots or sap streaks with a stain-blocking sealer before priming. 2. Concrete: a. Remove release agents, curing compounds, loose particles, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surface to be coated exceeds that permitted in the manufacturer’s written instructions. Prime with an alkali- resistant primer. 3. Cement Plaster Substrates: a. Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections on surfaces with patching compound. Smooth off to match adjacent surfaces. Apply an alkali-resistant primer or wash with fresh water and neutralize high alkalinity surfaces where they occur. 4. Masonry Substrates: a. Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surface to be coated exceeds that permitted in the manufacturer’s written instructions. Prime with an alkali-resistant primer. 5. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: a. Solvent clean according to SSPC-SP1. Remove loose primer and rust, contaminants, and foreign matter. Prime bare steel and touch up abrasions with a ferrous metal primer. 6. Steel, Ferrous Metal Substrates: a. Remove rust, mill scale, foreign substances, and shop primer. Clean according to SSPC- SP3, “Power Tool Cleaning”, or abrasive blasting cleaning according to SSPC- SP6 “Commercial Blast Cleaning” as required. Protect surface from corrosion until application of primer. 7. Galvanized Metal: a. Remove oils, passivators, and clean entire surface with an appropriate solvent. Pre- treat with a phosphoric acid etching solution to promote adhesion of subsequently applied coatings. 8. Phosphatized Metal or Galvannealed Metal: a. Shall not be chemically etched. Clean and apply suitable metal primer. 9. Aluminum Substrates:
09 90 00 - 5 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
a. Solvent clean according to SSPC-SP1. Remove loose surface oxidation. 10. Gypsum Board Substrates: a. Remove dust and foreign matter. Fill pits flush and smooth with joint compound and where required, apply skim coat to provide the required finishing level based on GA- 214-96, Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish before application of decoration. B. Surfaces, which cannot be prepared or painted as specified, shall be immediately brought to attention of District/Architect in writing: 1. Starting of work without such notification will be considered acceptance by the Contractor of surfaces involved. 2. Replace unsatisfactory work caused by improper or defective surfaces as directed by Architect at no additional cost to Owner.
3.4 APPLICATIONS A. Do not apply initial coating until moisture content of surface is within limitations recommended by paint manufacturer. B. Application: 1. Apply paint with suitable brushes, rollers, or spraying equipment. 2. Apply stain in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 3. Rate of application shall not exceed that as recommended by paint manufacturer for surface involved. C. Comply with recommendations of product manufacturer for drying time between succeeding coats. D. Leave parts of molding and ornaments clean and true to details with no undue amount of paint in corners and depressions. E. Make edges of paint adjoining other material or color clean and sharp with no overlapping. F. Refinish whole wall where portion of finish is not acceptable. G. Apply materials evenly with appropriate film thickness and free of runs, sags, skips and other defects. H. Hard, glossy finishes shall be sanded lightly between coats, dusted, and cleaned before recoating. I. Remove hardware, hardware accessories, plates, lighting fixtures, and similar items in place prior to painting, and replace upon completion of each space. J. Disconnect heating and other equipment adjacent to walls using workmen skilled in appropriate trades and move to permit wall surfaces to be painted. Following completion of painting, they shall be expertly replaced and reconnected. K. Paint visible surfaces behind vents, registers, or grilles flat black (Theater Black): L. Wash exposed metal with solvent, then prime and paint as scheduled. M. Spray paint wherever practical. N. Do not paint over Underwriters’ labels, fusible links or sprinkler heads. O. Exposed Plumbing and Mechanical Items: 1. Items without factory finish such as conduits, pipes, access panels, and items of similar nature shall be finished to match adjacent wall and ceiling surfaces unless otherwise directed.
3.5 CLEANUP
09 90 00 - 6 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
A. Upon completion of work, remove equipment, excess material, and debris. Remove paint splatter and leave area in a neat and orderly condition.
3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, or replacing and repainting, as acceptable to Architect. B. Provide “wet paint” signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work after completion of painting operations: 1. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.
PART 4 SCHEDULE
4.1 FINISH SCHEDULE A. Finish surfaces in accordance with schedule, refer to Finish Drawings, Catalog names and numbers refer to products as manufactured or distributed by the Behr Paint Company, Santa Ana, California 92705, except as otherwise specified and authorized by District/Architect. B. Metal gutters and Facia Finish surfaces in accordance with schedule, refer to Finish Drawings, Catalog names and numbers refer to products as manufactured or distributed by the Gutterman Choice Co. C. Provide paint finishes of even, uniform color, free from cloudy or mottled appearance. Properly correct non-complying work to satisfaction of the District/Architect and representative of the Behr Paint Company and the Gutterman Choice Co.. D. Some colors, especially accent colors, may require multiple finish coats for adequate coverage and opacity. E. The specified number of primer and finish coats is minimum acceptable. If full coverage and opacity is not obtained with specified number of coats, apply additional coats to produce project required finish.
4.2 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Cement Plaster: 1. Satin, 100% Acrylic: a. First Coat: BEHR® Multi-Surface Interior/Exterior Primer & Sealer (436). b. Second Coat: BEHR Marquee® Exterior Satin Enamel (9450). c. Third Coat: BEHR Marquee® Exterior Satin Enamel (9450). 2. Semi-Gloss, 100% Acrylic: a. First Coat: BEHR® Multi-Surface Interior/Exterior Primer & Sealer (436). b. Second Coat: BEHR Marquee® Exterior Semi-Gloss Enamel (5450). c. Third Coat: BEHR Marquee® Exterior Semi- Gloss Enamel (5450). B. Concrete, Pre-Cast Concrete, Concrete Tilt-Up, and Poured-In-Place Concrete: 3. Satin, 100% Acrylic: a. First Coat: BEHR® Multi-Surface Interior/Exterior Primer & Sealer (436). b. Second Coat: BEHR Marquee® Exterior Satin Enamel (9450). c. Third Coat: BEHR Marquee® Exterior Satin Enamel (9450).
09 90 00 - 7 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
4. Semi-Gloss, 100% Acrylic: a. First Coat: BEHR® Multi-Surface Interior/Exterior Primer & Sealer (436). b. Second Coat: BEHR Marquee® Exterior Semi-Gloss Enamel (5450). c. Third Coat: Marquee® Exterior Semi-Gloss Enamel (5450). C. Concrete Masonry Units (CMU): 5. Satin, 100% Acrylic: a. First Coat: BEHR PRO™ Block Filler Primer (PR50). b. Second Coat: BEHR Marquee® Exterior Satin Enamel (9450). c. Third Coat: BEHR Marquee® Exterior Satin Enamel (9450). 6. Semi-Gloss, 100% Acrylic: a. First Coat: BEHR PRO™ Block Filler Primer (PR50). b. Second Coat: BEHR Marquee® Exterior Semi-Gloss Enamel (5450). c. Third Coat: BEHR Marquee® Exterior Semi- Gloss Enamel (5450). D. Cement Board: 7. Satin, 100% Acrylic: a. First Coat: BEHR® Multi-Surface Interior/Exterior Primer & Sealer (436). b. Second Coat: BEHR Marquee® Exterior Satin Enamel (9450). c. Third Coat: BEHR Marquee® Exterior Satin Enamel (9450). 8. Semi-Gloss, 100% Acrylic: a. First Coat: BEHR® Multi-Surface Interior/Exterior Primer & Sealer (436). b. Second Coat: BEHR Marquee® Exterior Semi-Gloss Enamel (5450). c. Third Coat: BEHR Marquee® Exterior Semi- Gloss Enamel (5450). E. Concrete - Horizontal Surfaces: 9. Eggshell (Satin) – Premium High-Performance Epoxy/Acrylic: ® a. Two Coats: BEHR PREMIUM 1-Part Epoxy Acrylic Concrete & Garage Floor Paint (900). F. Concrete, Sealer - Wet Look (Vertical or Horizontal Substrates): 10. High-Gloss –Premium, Acrylic: ® a. Two Coats: BEHR PREMIUM Wet-Look Sealer (985). G. Wood Substrates, Paint Finish: 11. Satin, 100% Acrylic: a. First Coat: BEHR ® Multi-Surface Interior/Exterior Primer & Sealer (436). b. Second Coat: BEHR Marquee® Exterior Satin Enamel (9450). c. Third Coat: BEHR Marquee® Exterior Satin Enamel (9450). 12. Semi-Gloss, 100% Acrylic: a. First Coat: BEHR ® Multi-Surface Interior/Exterior Primer & Sealer (436). b. Second Coat: BEHR Marquee® Exterior Semi-Gloss Enamel (5450). c. Third Coat: BEHR Marquee® Exterior Semi- Gloss Enamel (5450). H. Wood, Stain Finish, Water-Based Semi- Transparent: 13. Flat – Premium, 100% Acrylic: ® a. Two Coats: BEHR PREMIUM Semi- Transparent Waterproofing Stain &Sealer (5077 Tint Base; 5330 Redwood; 5533 Cedar Naturaltone). I. Wood, Stain Finish, Solid Color: 1. Flat – Premium, 100% Acrylic: ® a. Two Coats: BEHR PREMIUM Solid Color Waterproofing Stain & Sealer (5011 White; 5013 Deep Base; 5533 Cedar Naturaltone).
09 90 00 - 8 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
J. Steel, Ferrous Metal: 1. Satin, 100% Acrylic: a. First Coat: BEHR® Interior/Exterior Metal Primer (435). b. Second Coat: BEHR Marquee® Exterior Satin Enamel (9450). c. Third Coat: BEHR Marquee® Exterior Satin Enamel (9450). 2. Semi-Gloss, 100% Acrylic: a. First Coat: BEHR® Multi-Surface Interior/Exterior Primer & Sealer (436). b. Second Coat: BEHR Marquee® Exterior Semi-Gloss Enamel (5450). c. Third Coat: BEHR Marquee® Exterior Semi- Gloss Enamel (5450). K. Galvanized Metal: 1. Satin, 100% Acrylic: a. Pretreatment: Klean Strip Phosphoric Prep & Etch (GKPA30220). b. First Coat: BEHR® Interior/Exterior Metal Primer (435). c. Second Coat: BEHR Marquee® Exterior Satin Enamel (9450). d. Third Coat: BEHR Marquee® Exterior Satin Enamel (9450). 2. Semi-Gloss, 100% Acrylic: a. Pretreatment: Klean Strip Phosphoric Prep & Etch (GKPA30220). b. First Coat: BEHR® Interior/Exterior Metal Primer (435). c. Second Coat: BEHR Marquee® Exterior Semi-Gloss Enamel (5450). d. Third Coat: BEHR Marquee® Exterior Semi- Gloss Enamel (5450).
4.3 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Gypsum Board: 1. Matte, Latex, Low Odor/VOC: a. First Coat: BEHR DRYWALL PLUS® Interior Primer & Sealer (73). b. Second Coat: BEHR Marquee® Interior Matte Paint (1450). c. Third Coat: BEHR Marquee® Interior Matte Paint (1450). 2. Eggshell, Latex, Low Odor/VOC: d. First Coat: BEHR DRYWALL PLUS® Interior Primer & Sealer (73). e. Second Coat: BEHR Marquee® Interior Eggshell Enamel (2450). f. Third Coat: BEHR Marquee® Interior Eggshell Enamel (2450). 3. Semi-Gloss – Professional, Latex, Low Odor/VOC: g. First Coat: BEHR DRYWALL PLUS® Interior Primer & Sealer (73). h. Second Coat: BEHR Marquee® Interior Semi-Gloss Enamel (5450). i. Third Coat: BEHR Marquee® Interior Semi- Gloss Enamel (5450). B. Gypsum Board – Ceilings 1. Flat – Premium, 100% Acrylic– Low VOC: j. First Coat: BEHR DRYWALL PLUS® Interior Primer & Sealer (73). k. Second Coat: BEHR ULTRA® Stain-Blocking Ceiling Paint (5558). ® l. Third Coat: BEHR ULTRA Stain-Blocking Ceiling Paint (5558). C. Concrete, Concrete Pre-Cast, Plaster, and Masonry: 1. Matte, Latex, Low Odor/VOC: m. First Coat: BEHR® Interior Stain-Blocking Primer & Sealer (75). n. Second Coat: BEHR Marquee® Interior Matte Paint (1450). o. Third Coat: BEHR Marquee® Interior Matte Paint (1450). 2. Eggshell, Latex, Low Odor/VOC:
09 90 00 - 9 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
p. First Coat: BEHR® Interior Stain-Blocking Primer & Sealer (75). q. Second Coat: BEHR Marquee® Interior Eggshell Enamel (2450). r. Third Coat: BEHR Marquee® Interior Eggshell Enamel (2450). 3. Semi-Gloss, Latex, Low Odor/VOC: s. First Coat: BEHR® Interior Stain-Blocking Primer & Sealer (75). t. Second Coat: BEHR Marquee® Interior Semi-Gloss Enamel (5450). u. Third Coat: BEHR Marquee® Interior Semi- Gloss Enamel (5450). D. Concrete Masonry Units (CMU): 1. Matte, Latex, Low Odor/VOC: a. First Coat: BEHR PRO™ Block Filler Primer (PR50). b. Second Coat: BEHR Marquee® Interior Matte Paint (1450). c. Third Coat: BEHR Marquee® Interior Matte Paint (1450). 2. Eggshell, Latex, Low Odor/VOC: a. First Coat: BEHR PRO™ Block Filler Primer (PR50). b. Second Coat: BEHR Marquee® Interior Eggshell Enamel (2450). c. Third Coat: BEHR Marquee® Interior Eggshell Enamel (2450). 3. Semi-Gloss, Latex, Low Odor/VOC: a. First Coat: BEHR PRO™ Block Filler Primer (PR50). b. Second Coat: BEHR Marquee® Interior Semi-Gloss Enamel (5450). c. Third Coat: BEHR Marquee® Interior Semi- Gloss Enamel (5450). E. Wood Substrates, Paint Finish: ® 1. Eggshell – Professional, Latex, Low Odor/VOC: dc. First Coat: BEHR Interior Stain- Blocking Primer & Sealer (75). a. Second Coat: BEHR Marquee® Interior Eggshell Enamel (2450). b. Third Coat: BEHR Marquee® Interior Eggshell Enamel (2450). 2. Semi-Gloss – Professional, Latex, Low Odor/VOC: a. First Coat: BEHR® Interior Stain-Blocking Primer & Sealer (75). b. Second Coat: BEHR Marquee® Interior Semi-Gloss Enamel (5450). c. Third Coat: BEHR Marquee® Interior Semi- Gloss Enamel (5450).
09 90 00 - 10 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
PART 5 DISTRICT STANDARDS
5.1 INTERIOR PAINT COLORS: A. Paint Manufacturer: Behr paints 1. INTERIOR COLOR #1 BEHR COLOR MATCH; KELLY MOORE 23 SWISS COFFEE
[END OF SECTION 09 90 00]
09 90 00 - 11 TWIN RIVERS UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT
EXHIBIT A
REQUIREMENTS FOR DISTURBANCE OF LEAD
PART 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.1 INTRODUCTION
These specifications are designed to minimize and control potential lead hazards during the disturbance of materials that contain lead. These procedures and precautions apply to the disturbance of lead that may result from the drilling into, cutting into, or removal of building components containing or covered with lead, or the demolition of buildings and/or structures that contain lead either in or on their surfaces.
The primary focus of these specifications is to address the work practices and procedures that the Contractor and/or other subcontractors must follow when conducting activities that may disturb lead in paint or other coatings or lead in ceramic tile glaze.
All paint on structures in California must be treated as “presumed lead-based paint” unless the paint is on a home built after 1978 or a school built after 1992. THEREFORE THE PAINT IN ALL SCHOOLS COVERED BY THIS PROJECT THAT WERE CONSTRUCTED BEFORE 1993 MUST BE TREATED AS LEAD-BASED PAINT UNLESS TESTED AND PROVED OTHERWISE.
The Owner has conducted bulk sampling of paints found on the buildings included in this project in the past. The results indicated multiple colors of paints present with lead in various amounts to include amounts requiring several paints be classified as lead based. As a result, all paints associated with the buildings to be impacted are considered lead based and these specifications and lead related work practices apply.
Owner/Owner’s Representative anticipates enforcing Cal/OSHA and Department of Public Health (CDPH) regulations regarding the training of workers disturbing lead and the containment and work practices utilized during that disturbance. The training requirements for workers and supervisors on this project are summarized in Part 1.5. Lead Training Requirements. The Contractor and other subcontractors disturbing lead must be familiar with the CDPH requirements regarding containment of lead debris and the Cal/OSHA lead in construction standard. Those requirements are summarized below in Part 1.3 Regulatory Compliance.
In summary, the Contractor and subcontractors shall utilize engineering controls to limit the release of lead dust or debris. These engineering controls may include, but are not limited to, using wet methods, using tools with vacuum recovery systems with High Efficiency Air Particulate (HEPA) filtration, using vacuums with HEPA filtration, using negative air pressure differential systems, and by the prompt clean up of any lead-containing debris that the work might produce. Dry scraping, sanding, grinding, or abrading lead-containing materials is not permitted. All work that disturbs lead will require a containment. The containment may be as simple as plastic sheeting on the floor or ground when drilling minor penetrations or scraping paint on exterior surfaces. Or, for the demolition of ceramic tile and any painted wall systems, it is likely to require the Contractor construct a full containment for the area and utilize a negative air pressure differential system. The requirements for work practices and containment are described in Part 3.5 Work Site Preparation & Containment Requirements.
The requirements of this specification apply to all employers who have employees who may reasonably be exposed to lead on this project. This includes the Contractor, who will normally be an environmental contractor such as an asbestos abatement contractor, or a painting contractor utilizing California Department of Public Health (CDPH) lead certified workers and supervisors. In addition, this specification applies to all subcontractors conducting work on this project who have employees who may disturb lead by drilling, cutting, scraping, or demolishing materials containing lead.
No Contractor shall begin work which will disturb known or suspect lead-containing surfaces or materials in a manner that may expose a worker to lead containing dust, create a potential for building contamination, or create possible lead containing waste, until all required pre-construction documentation 1
has been reviewed and written approval has been received from the Owner and/or Project Monitor.
Activities expected to disturb lead-containing materials include, but are not limited to, painting preparation work such as scraping or sanding, penetration of painted surfaces through drilling or cutting, demolition of painted surfaces, removal of painted building components, and removal, drilling, or cutting of ceramic wall tiles. If the Contractor or subcontractors are observed conducting such activities without having written approval from the Owner and/or Project Monitor, they will be instructed to stop work. Work will not be allowed to resume until the Owner and/or Project Monitor provides approval for the work to begin.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
Action Level - Airborne exposure to lead at or above 30 g/m3 over an eight-hour-time-weighted average as discussed in 8 CCR 1532.1. Typically, when employees are exposed over the Action Level, the employer must provide blood testing, training in compliance with 8 CCR 1532, and air sampling.
Air Filtration Unit - A portable exhaust system equipped with HEPA filtration and capable of maintaining a constant low velocity air flow into contaminated areas from adjacent uncontaminated areas. At a minimum, the air intake for the air filtration device must have a pre-filter on it which can be changed within the containment area. In most cases, air filtration devices will need to pass challenge testing by DOP before they are allowed to be used on site.
Airlock - A system for permitting ingress and egress with minimum air movement between a contaminated area and an uncontaminated area, typically consisting of two curtained doorways separated by a distance of at least three feet such that one passes through one doorway into the airlock, allowing the doorway sheeting to overlap and close off the opening before proceeding through the second doorway, thereby preventing flow-through contamination. Air Monitoring - The process of measuring the content of a known volume of air collected during a specific period of time.
Blood Testing - Blood testing for lead and zinc protoporphyrin in compliance with the requirements for medical surveillance as listed in 8 CCR 1532.1.
Cal/OSHA - California Division of Occupational Safety and Health. A California agency that implements and enforces numerous health and safety standards regarding lead.
Certified Lead Supervisor and Worker - Supervisors and workers currently certified by the California Department of Public Health (CDPH).
Challenge Testing - Process used to verify that HEPA-filtered equipment does not leak or exhaust asbestos, lead, or other particulate. This testing must be done by a testing company, not affiliated with the Contractor, and approved by the Owner and Project Monitor. Challenge testing normally uses an oil mist as the challenge agent and measures how much, if any, of the agent is exhausted from the machine being tested.
Clean Room - An uncontaminated area or room which is a part of the worker decontamination enclosure system with provisions for storage of workers' street clothes and clean protective equipment. The term also includes the uncontaminated area or room of a Waste Transfer Airlock.
Containment - Isolation of the work area from the rest of the building to prevent escape of lead in dust, debris or in the air.
Contractor - The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Contract Documents as being responsible for the environmental work as done in response to and in accordance with this document. References to the "Contractor" include the Contractor’s authorized representatives. The Contractor may be a sub-contractor to the Primary Contractor. The Contractor normally will be responsible for paint preparation work that disturbs lead, paint scraping done prior to the demolition of structures, or the demolition of ceramic tile. The Contractor will typically need to use CDPH certified lead workers and supervisors to conduct their work that disturbs lead. Those employers disturbing smaller amounts of lead 2
such as through drilling, cutting, or small component removal are typically known as a subcontractor for the purposes of this specification.
Critical Barrier - Critical Barriers are used to restrict water and airflow. Critical Barriers are the barriers placed over openings in the walls and ceilings of a work area in order to ensure that lead dust cannot escape the work area via these openings. Unless otherwise specified in these Specifications, critical barriers shall be constructed of at least one layer of six-mil thick poly.
Curtained Doorway - A device to allow ingress or egress from one room to another while permitting minimal air movement between the rooms. These are typically constructed by placing two overlapping sheets of plastic over an existing or temporarily framed doorway, securing each along the top of the doorway, securing the vertical edge of one sheet along one vertical side of the doorway and securing the vertical edge of the other sheet along the opposite vertical side of the doorway. Other effective designs are permissible as long as they are approved by the Project Monitor.
Decontamination Enclosure System - A series of connected rooms, separated from the work area and from each other by air locks, for the decontamination of workers, containers, and equipment. This unit shall be constructed with at least two layers of six mil poly for the floors, walls, and ceiling. The floor of the dirty room shall consist of two layers of six mil poly plus a third layer of poly, four mil or thicker, to be used as a removable drop layer. Drop layer is to be removed as needed, but at least daily.
CDPH - California Department of Public Health. State agency that regulates the disturbance of lead in public buildings and on all structures in California. This agency and relevant regulations are primarily concerned with preventing childhood lead poisoning.
DOP - Dioctylphthalate particles, a testing agent for the efficiency of HEPA filters.
DOT - Department of Transportation, a Federal agency which has regulations and labeling requirements for the transportation of hazardous waste.
DTSC - Department of Toxic Substances Control, a department within the California Environmental Protection Agency charged with implementing and enforcing hazardous waste regulations.
Dust or Debris - Any visible dust or debris remaining in work area will be considered lead-containing residue.
EPA - U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, a Federal agency that developed and enforces various asbestos and lead regulations.
HVAC - Heating, ventilation and air conditioning system.
HEPA Filter - A high efficiency particulate air filter capable of removing particles 0.3 microns in diameter from an air stream with 99.97% efficiency.
HEPA-Filtered-Vacuum Recovery System - This is a mechanical tool that has a shroud or covering over the area of a surface disturbed by a mechanical system in order to eliminate or significantly reduce the amount of dust released to the ambient air by the mechanical process. The shroud must be attached to a working vacuum with HEPA filtration.
HEPA Vacuum - A vacuum system equipped with HEPA filtration. Typically these units will need to be challenge tested before being allowed to be used inside of buildings on this project.
Lead-Based Paint - Materials meeting the definition of lead-based paint as defined by the California Department of Public Health and the United States Environmental Projection Agency. Currently defined as containing lead in concentrations equal to or greater than 1 mg/cm2, 5000 ppm, or 0.5% by weight.
Lead-Containing Material - Materials that contain measurable, quantifiable amounts of lead. The disturbance of these materials is regulated by Cal/OSHA. 3
Lead-Containing Hazardous Waste - Materials required by the State of California to be packaged, labeled, transported, and disposed of as a lead hazardous waste.
Lead-Containing Waste Material - Lead-containing waster material that does not need to be treated as a lead-containing hazardous waste.
Lead Project Management or Monitoring Firm – The firm hired by Owner to provide third-party oversight of the disturbance of lead performed on the Owner’s property by the Contractor or subcontractors.
Mil - An abbreviation for millimeter. Generally used when referring to the thickness of plastic (poly) sheeting used to contain the regulated area.
Movable Object - An unattached piece of equipment or furniture in the work area which can be removed from the work area.
Negative Air Machines - See Air Filtration Units.
NIOSH - The National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health. All respirators used on this project must be approved by NIOSH.
Outside Air - The air outside buildings and structures.
Owner - Property owner where the disturbance of lead will take place. For example, this may be a private building owner or manager, a government body such as a city or county agency, a military base, or a school district. This includes the Owner’s authorized representatives and employees.
PEL - Permissible Exposure Limit (as used in 8 CCR 1532.1)
Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL) - Airborne exposure to lead above 50 g3 over an eight-hour, time- weighted average as discussed in 8 CCR 1532.1. Typically, when employees are exposed over the PEL, the employer must provide blood testing, respirators, protective clothing, shower decontamination, CDPH certification, regulated areas, and air sampling.
Poly - Flame-retardant polyethylene sheeting used to seal critical barriers, create cleaning barriers and drop layers, and to protect surfaces from damage or contamination.
Primary Contractor - The Contractor may not work directly for the Owner but instead subcontract with another contractor such as a general contractor or demolition contractor. The Primary Contractor is the entity responsible for hiring the Contractor if it is not the Owner.
Pre-start Meeting - Meeting held before the beginning of the project in which final details of the project are discussed and Contractor provides project monitor with pre-job submittal packet.
Project Monitor - An individual qualified by virtue of experience and education, designated as the Owner’s representative and responsible for overseeing the work that disturbs lead on this project.
Project Monitoring - Activities undertaken by the Project Monitoring Firm for the purpose of monitoring the work done by the Contractor on this project in regards to the disturbance of lead.
Regulated Area - Term used by Cal/OSHA in 8 CCR 1532.1 to indicate a work area where exposure to airborne lead might exceed the Permissible Exposure Limit or where “Trigger Activities” may be performed. The area must be demarcated with signs and barriers designed to keep unauthorized people out of the area. Additionally “Regulated Area” means any measure used to restrict access to an area where personnel impacting lead-containing materials are required to wear respiratory protection and/or protective clothing by the project specifications regardless of airborne concentration of lead.
4
Shower Room - A room between the clean room and the equipment room in the decontamination enclosure with hot and cold or warm running water controllable at the tap and suitably arranged for complete showering during decontamination. Unless specified elsewhere in these specifications, or determined otherwise by the program monitor, the shower shall be on a metal pan to contain water splashed, leaked or spilled out of the shower unit.
Specifications - These written requirements describing procedures the Contractor must follow for this project. Subcontractor - Contractors working for the Primary (General) Contractor but who are not primarily responsible for environmental work. For example, they may be responsible for, demolition, electrical, plumbing, general construction, minor painting, or other special trades.
Submittals - Pre-construction, interim construction, and post construction documents submitted by the contractor to the Owner as indicated in General Requirements and Bidding Requirements.
Trigger Task - Term commonly used to describe the tasks described by Cal/OSHA in 8 CCR 1532.1 (d)(2). These are tasks or activities that Cal/OSHA believes are expected to result in airborne exposures over the PEL until air monitoring proves otherwise. In brief, trigger tasks include manual demolition, scraping, sanding, using HEPA-attached equipment, using heat guns to remove lead paint, welding, torch cutting, and using other more aggressive techniques. (This is a summary list and does not list all tasks that are considered trigger tasks.) In addition, trigger tasks include any activity reasonably expected to result in airborne exposures to lead above the Permissible Exposure Limit.
View Ports - Clear windows into the regulated work area that allow authorized persons to view work activities inside the regulated area without entering the area. The view ports must be of sufficient number, constructed of materials of sufficient clarity, and be located in areas determined and/or approved of by the Project Monitor. All regulated work areas including mini-enclosures will require view ports unless specifically determined not to be feasible by the Project Monitor.
Visible Emissions - Any emissions containing particulate material that are visually detectable without the aid of instruments. For example, dust, debris, and water leaks are considered visible emissions.
Waste Load-out/Transfer System - A decontamination system utilized for transferring containerized waste from inside to outside of the work area. A series of connected rooms used for the load-out of lead- containing materials that have been properly containerized.
Waste Bags - Waste bags for lead-containing waste must be a minimum of six-mil thickness. In general, double bagging will be required.
Waste Containers - Waste containers are the containers into which lead-containing waste is placed. They may be bags of at least six-mil thickness, metal or fiber barrels, or other containers such as cardboard boxes approved by the Project Monitor. The Contractor is responsible for assuring that the type of container chosen is acceptable to the waste landfill to which the waste will be transported. Waste containers must be labeled according to the requirements of the California Department of Occupational Safety and Health (Cal/OSHA), Department of Toxic Substances Control (DTSC), Department of Transportation (DOT), and the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA).
Waste Transfer Airlock - A decontamination system utilized for transferring containerized waste from inside to outside of the work area.
Wet Cleaning - The process of eliminating lead contamination from building surfaces and objects by using cloths, mops, or other utensils which have been dampened with water and afterwards thoroughly decontaminated or disposed of as lead-contaminated waste.
Work Area - Designated rooms, spaces, or areas of the project in which the disturbance of lead is to be undertaken or which may become contaminated as a result of such action. A contained work area is a work area which has been sealed off from adjacent areas.
5
Work Plan - Contractor’s written plan describing how the Contractor will perform the work in compliance with these specifications. The work plan shall include information on preparation of the work area, personal protective equipment, employee experience, training and assigned responsibilities during the project. It will also list decontamination procedures for personnel, work area and equipment, removal methods and procedures, required air monitoring program, procedures for handling and disposing of waste materials and procedures for final decontamination and cleanup.
Worker - A person who successfully meets the training requirements for the disturbance of lead as described in these specifications.
8 CCR 1532.1 - Chapter 8 of the Labor Code, California Code of Regulations, Section 1532.1: Lead (Known as the Lead Standard for the Construction Industry)
8 CCR 1544 - Chapter 8 of the Labor Code, California Code of Regulations, Section 1544: Respiratory Protection Standard.
1.3 REGULATORY COMPLIANCE
Various agencies regulate work that disturbs lead-containing materials. The following is a summary of the most important agencies and regulations that apply during the disturbance of lead during construction work. This list is not to be considered comprehensive. The Contractor is responsible for complying with all applicable federal, state, and local regulations that may apply to the specific work they are conducting.
1.3.1 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA) Lead: Identification of Dangerous Levels of Lead; Final Rule (40 CFR Part 745 Subpart D)
The EPA defines lead-based paint as paint and coatings that contain lead in concentrations equal to or more than one milligram per square centimeter (1 mg/cm2), 5000 parts per million (5000 ppm), or one half of one percent (0.5%) by weight. EPA regulations apply to all housing and child-occupied facilities built before 1978. When the term “lead-based paint” is used in the context of these specifications, the term is used only to refer to paint that contains lead in concentrations equal to or greater than that defined by the EPA as lead-based paint. (This is to differentiate lead-based paint from the term “lead-containing paint” as used for compliance with Cal/OSHA.)
1.3.2 HOUSING AND URBAN DEVELOPMENT (HUD) Requirements for Notification, Evaluation and Reduction of Lead-Based Paint Hazards in Federally Owned Residential Property and Housing Receiving Federal Assistance (24 CFR Part 35)
The HUD Rule for Federal Housing (shortened name) applies to all residential properties built before 1978 that receive Federal financial assistance. This regulation uses the same definition of lead-based paint as the EPA. The work practices and procedures described in these specifications are designed to comply with occupant and worker protection regulations as mandated by OSHA and Cal/OSHA regulations for work that disturbs lead and are not designed to comply with all the requirements of 24 CFR Part 35. Should this project be covered by this regulation, the Owner may require additional practices and procedures in the scope of work for activities conducted in properties covered by the HUD Rule for Federal Housing.
1.3.3 CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC HEALTH (CDPH)
Accreditation, Certification, and Work Practices For Lead-Based Paint And Lead Hazards (Title 17, CCR, Division 1, Chapter 8, Sections 35000-361000)
This regulation primarily applies to residential and public buildings located in California. The definition of a public building is one that is “generally accessible to the public.” Some aspects of this regulation, particularly those that pertain to the definition of “presumed lead-based paint” and 6
the containment requirements for disturbing lead-based paint apply to all structures in California.
This CDPH regulation definition of lead-based paint is identical to the EPA/HUD definition of 1 mg/cm2, 5000 ppm, and 0.5% by weight. In addition, this regulation requires all paint on structures in California to be treated as “presumed lead-based paint” unless the paint is on a home built after 1978 or a school built after 1992. THEREFORE THE PAINT IN ALL SCHOOLS COVERED BY THIS PROJECT THAT WERE CONSTRUCTED BEFORE 1993 MUST BE TREATED AS LEAD-BASED PAINT UNLESS TESTED AND PROVED OTHERWISE AS DESCRIBED ELSEWHERE IN THESE SPECIFICATIONS.
The CDPH regulation differentiates between work that disturbs lead as part of renovation or maintenance work and work that disturbs lead as part of “abatement” work as defined in Title 17. The work practices and procedures described in these specifications are designed to comply with occupant and worker protection regulations as mandated by Cal/OSHA regulations for work that disturbs lead as part of renovation, demolition, and maintenance work. These specifications are not designed to comply with the requirements for abatement as defined in the CDPH Title 17 regulation. Unless stated specifically otherwise in these specifications, the Owner does not anticipate any work being done as part of this project that meets the definition of abatement as used in Title 17. Therefore, unless specifically directed otherwise by this specification or by the direction of the Owner and/or Project Monitor, the Contractor and/or subcontractors shall NOT submit Form 8551, “ABATEMENT OF LEAD HAZARDS,” to the CDPH since that form provides inappropriate notice for the work done on this project. The Contractor may be required to complete and submit this form should the scope of the work or the work practices change.
This regulation has significant penalties associated with the creation of “lead hazards.” Lead hazards are defined as: “...disturbing lead based paint or presumed lead-based paint without containment, or any other nuisance which may result in persistent and quantifiable lead exposure.” The requirements discussed in Part 3.5 Work Site Preparation & Containment Requirements are designed to meet CDPH requirements. Should a Contractor and/or subcontractor conduct work without a containment or release lead-contaminated dust or debris outside of the containment, they are in violation of this regulation. The Project Monitor will stop all work, consider the Contractor and/or subcontractor to be in violation of these specifications and the contract documents. Work will not be allowed to begin again until the Contractor and/or subcontractor takes adequate steps to correct their violation and convinces the Owner and/or Project Monitor that the violation will not occur again.
1.3.4 CALIFORNIA OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH ADMINISTRATION (CAL/OSHA) Lead Standard for the Construction Industry (8 CCR 1532.1)
This standard regulates work done by employees who may disturb lead as part of demolition, construction, renovation or maintenance work. Painting activities that may disturb lead are covered by this standard. General construction work that disturbs lead is covered, as is the demolition of building components or entire structures.
Cal/OSHA regulates lead whenever lead is determined to exist in a material. When the term “lead-containing paint” is used in the context of these specifications, the term is used to refer to paint that contains lead in an amount equal to or above the reporting limit for the laboratory analysis or that detected by an X-ray Fluorescent Analyzer (XRF).
In addition, Cal/OSHA uses the EPA/HUD/CDPH definition of lead-based paint (1 mg/cm2, 5000 ppm, or 0.5% by weight) for their pre-job notification requirements discussed in Part 1.4 Lead- Work Pre-Job Notification Requirements.
The following information summarizes the significant requirements in the Cal/OSHA standard. This summary is not meant to substitute for the Contractor reading and being familiar with the Cal/OSHA requirements. 7
a. The Cal/OSHA lead standard is very complex. Cal/OSHA regulates lead in materials when a laboratory can quantify the amount of lead. This means materials are regulated even when they contain very small amounts of lead. The standard sets an “Action Level” for airborne lead at or above 30 g/m3 over an eight-hour-time-weighted average. Typically, if employees are expected to be exposed to this airborne lead level, the employer must conduct air sampling, provide blood lead testing, and provide specialized training. The standard sets a “Permissible Exposure Limit” or “PEL” for airborne lead at or above 50 g/m3 over an eight-hour-time-weighted average. The employer must continue the requirements needed at the Action Level but must now provide respirators, protective clothing, a shower decontamination system, and a written compliance program.
b. In 8 CCR 1532.1 (p), employers are required to notify Cal/OSHA before employees conduct a trigger task that will disturb more than 100 square or linear feet of material that contains lead in concentrations equal to or above 1 mg/cm2, 5000 ppm, or 0.5% by weight. The notification also applies to welding or torch cutting that takes more than one hour in a shift. Trigger tasks are described in 8 CCR 1532.1 (d)(2). In brief, they include manual demolition, scraping, sanding, using HEPA-attached equipment, using heat guns to remove lead paint, welding, torch cutting, and using other more aggressive techniques. This is a summary list and does not list all task that are considered trigger tasks.
c. The California standard defines lead-containing paint at the Consumer Product Safety Commission’s (CPSC) level of 0.06% by weight or 600 ppm for non-trigger tasks. The lead standard would not apply if the paint contains less than 600 ppm and the employees do not conduct trigger tasks. However if the employees do conduct trigger tasks, the entire standard applies.
d. Cal/OSHA requires CDPH lead training and certification for any supervisors or workers who are “shown to be exposed” to airborne lead levels above the PEL in residential or public buildings. The Owner and Project Monitor believe that there is a reasonable expectation that those workers scraping paint prior to repainting, and those demolishing ceramic tile are likely to be exposed over the PEL. Therefore, on this project, that work must be done by CDPH certified workers and supervisors.
e. Cal/OSHA requires the supervisor to establish a “regulated area” whenever employees may be exposed to airborne lead over the PEL or if they will perform trigger tasks as defined in 8 CCR 1532.1 (d)(2). The establishment of regulated areas is discussed in Part 3.5 Work Site Preparation & Containment Requirements.
1.4 LEAD-WORK PRE-JOB NOTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS
The Contractor is responsible for complying with the Lead-Work Pre-Job Notification as specified in 8 CCR 1532.1 (p). If notification is required for this project, the Contractor must provide the notification to Cal/OSHA and provide a copy of this notification to the Owner and/or Project Monitor as part of the Contractor’s pre-work submittal package.
Unless the material is tested as described elsewhere in these specifications, the Contractor and subcontractors must anticipate notifying Cal/OSHA if they plan to manually demolish or perform another type of trigger task (such as paint scraping or sanding) on any painted surface or ceramic wall surface on this project if the amount of material to be disturbed equals or is greater than 100 square feet.
Notification to Cal/OSHA is not required if the paint on the painted surface is primarily intact (not loose and peeling) and the painted material is removed in a manner that does not disturb the paint. For example, door or window frames may be removed without providing the notification if the paint or coating on the frames is intact and the building components can be removed without significantly disturbing the coating.
8
Unless stated otherwise in these specifications, or directed otherwise by the Project Monitor, the Contractor and/or subcontractors shall NOT submit Form 8551, “ABATEMENT OF LEAD HAZARDS,” to the CDPH since that form provides inappropriate notice for the work done on this project since no lead “abatement” as defined by CDPH will be conducted as part of this project.
1.5 LEAD TRAINING REQUIREMENTS
At a minimum, the Contractor and subcontractors must meet the lead training requirements as specified by 8 CCR 1532.1. This will include training all employees who drill, cut, scrape, abrade, remove, clean up debris, or in any other way are exposed to lead from painted surfaces or ceramic tile found on the buildings or structures covered by this project. The different types of training are summarized below for the typical types of work that are expected to disturb lead on this project.
1.5.1 MINIMAL TRAINING REQUIRED FOR ALL WORKERS EXPOSED TO LEAD
This training will be sufficient for those who disturb lead in only minor ways. Those disturbing lead in more significant amounts will need to meet the training requirements stated in Part 1.5.2 or 1.5.3.
For example, this training applies to those workers who, for a total of less than one hour in an eight-hour shift, will drill or cut through painted surfaces, remove painted components (when the paint is intact), or remove ceramic tile significantly intact. (This time frame is guidance and not an official Cal/OSHA time frame. This time frame is suggested because it is thought that these tasks, done for such a short time frame, do not pose a realistic chance that workers will be exposed over the Action Level based on an eight-hour time-weighted average.) In some cases, however, depending on the surface and type of work being conducted, the Project Monitor may determine that more training is needed even if the worker disturbs lead for less than an hour. In general, workers with this training conducting this type of minimal disturbance of lead will not need to wear respirators while conducting this work.
The training must comply with the training requirements as listed 8 CCR 1532.1(l)(1)(A). In summary, this training must comply with Hazard Communication Training for lead as discussed in 8 CCR 5194. This training is also known as “hazard communication,” or “lead awareness” training and is usually done in less than hour depending on the work the employee will conduct.
The Contractor and subcontractors will need to provide the Owner and/or Project Monitor written proof that this training has been provided before workers will be allowed to conduct work that disturbs lead even in minimal amounts. Owner/Owner’s Representative can provide this training for the Contractor and/or subcontractors or they can obtain this training from any source the employer believes is qualified.
Proof of this training is not required if the employees are trained to the levels listed in Part 1.5.2 and/or 1.5.3.
1.5.2 REQUIRED TRAINING FOR THOSE EXPOSED OVER THE ACTION LEVEL OR WHO CONDUCT TRIGGER TASKS
This training must be done for all those workers who conduct trigger tasks or are expected to be exposed above the Action Level. Typically, this training will be required for workers who conduct a trigger task such as paint scraping or manual demolition of painted components and the work will take more than one hour in an eight-hour shift. (This is a guidance and not an Cal/OSHA time frame.) The Project Monitor may determine that this training is needed for some workers who conduct tasks for even less than an hour.
The training must comply with the training requirements as listed 8 CCR 1532.1 (l)(1)(B) and (l)(2)(A-H). In summary, the standard requires the worker to be trained in series of subjects. The length of training depends on the experience and previous training of the worker, the type of work they will conduct, and whether or not they already have been trained and approved to wear 9
respirators. Workers receiving this training and conducting this type of work will typically need to wear respirators and protective clothing while they conduct the work. An environmental contractor, or a contractor with environmental work experience, previous training, and a written respiratory protection program generally conducts this type of work. The Owner and Project Monitor do not recommend subcontractors attempt this type of work. However, subcontractors will be allowed to conduct this type of work on this project if they can demonstrate proof of training and carry out the work according to these specifications.
The Contractor and subcontractors will need to provide the Owner and/or Project Monitor written proof that this training has been provided all workers conducting the tasks that require this training. Owner/Owner’s Representative can provide this training for the Contractor and/or subcontractors or they can obtain this training from any source the employer deems is qualified.
This training is not required if the employees are trained to the levels listed in Part 1.5.3.
1.5.3 REQUIRED TRAINING FOR THOSE WHO ARE REASONABLY EXPECTED TO BE EXPOSED OVER THE PEL AND/OR CONDUCT TRIGGER TASKS ON OVER 100 SQUARE FEET OF MATERIAL
Workers and supervisors must be CDPH Certified Lead-Related Construction Workers or Supervisors if they will conduct trigger tasks or other work reasonably expected to exceed the PEL and/or conduct this work on over 100 square feet of material. (This is a guidance amount and not a Cal/OSHA regulatory requirement. However this amount of material and type of work is reasonably expected to potentially release airborne exposures over the PEL and thus trigger the CDPH certification requirement.) This includes work such as the manual demolition of painted surfaces, ceramic walls, paint preparation work (sanding and scraping), and other tasks as described in 8 CCR 1532.1 (d)(2). Proof of training will be a currently valid CDPH certification card. Workers who can show a completed course completion form and a completed application form for certification will be allowed to work pending their being fully certified.
Exception: Licensed asbestos contractors performing paint scraping work on the outside of buildings only for the purpose of removing loose and peeling paint prior to the demolition of the building, or the demolition of a structure, will not be required to have the workers or on-site supervisor be CDPH certified. They must, however, show proof of training in compliance with 8 CCR 1532.1 (l)(2) for employees who may be exposed above the Action Level. In summary they must meet the training requirements of this specification as stated in Part 1.5.2. In addition, however, the Contractor must have a CDPH certified supervisor approve the containment setup at the start of each shift that will disturb lead, approve the work practices and personal protective equipment worn by the workers, verify that proper air monitoring is being collected, must be able to return to the site within two hours if requested by the Project Monitor, and must approve the final cleanup of the work area prior to a visual inspection of the work area being conducted by the Project Monitor. The certified supervisor will always be required to approve the initial set up of the containment, personal protection, and work practices at the start of the job, but then depending on the quality of the work demonstrated, the Project Monitor may not require the certified supervisor to inspect the work site at the start of each shift. This exemption will be revoked should air sampling on this project demonstrate airborne lead levels above the Action Level on workers or supervisors.
1.6 REQUIRED SUBMITTAL DOCUMENTS
While additional documents may be required by the scope of work for this project, at a minimum, the Contractor will be required to provide the Owner and/or Project Monitor with the following documents regarding the Contractor’s ability to safely disturb lead-containing materials.
1.6.1 SUBMITTALS PRIOR TO THE START OF WORK
All Contractors and subcontractors who will have employees disturb lead on this project must, at a minimum, provide proof of item number 1.6.1.e.1., lead hazard communication training in 10
compliance with 8 CCR 1532.1 (l)(A)(1). This is the only submittal that must be provided by these employers as long as they do not disturb conduct more disturbance of lead than is described in Part 1.5.1.
The following submittals must be provided by all Contractors and subcontractors who will, at a minimum, have employees who will conduct trigger tasks for more than one hour per shift, will potentially be exposed above the Action Level, or will conduct other activities as determined by the Project Monitor that may result in significant exposure to lead. a. A written lead compliance plan in compliance with 8 CCR 1532.1 must be provided that includes the following:
1. A description of equipment and materials, controls, crew size, job responsibilities, and operations and maintenance procedures for each activity in which lead is disturbed and potentially emitted;
2. A description of specific control methods (wet methods, engineering controls, etc.) that will be used to ensure workers are not exposed above the PEL;
3. Technology considered in meeting the Cal/OSHA permissible exposure level (PEL);
4. Air monitoring data documenting sources of lead emissions;
5. A detailed implementation schedule for the compliance plan, including the schedule for inspections by a competent person;
6. A description of the lead work practice program which will be used to control worker exposures. This includes the use of protective work clothing, equipment, hygiene facilities and practices, and housekeeping practices;
7. A description of the steps the Contractor or subcontractor will take to minimize the generation of hazardous waste produced on this project. This includes, but is not necessarily limited to how the contractor will separate waste streams. For example, how will the Contractor or subcontractor keep potentially hazardous waste such as paint chips and dust from being disposed of with other potentially non-hazardous construction materials and debris?
Note: If a Contractor or subcontractor is found conducting lead-related work not specifically mentioned and described in the compliance plan, the work will be stopped until a compliance plan including that work is submitted, reviewed, and approved by the Owner and/or Project Monitor. b. Copy of the Contractor or subcontractor’s written respirator program in accordance with the requirements of 8 CCR 1544. c. Proof that all employees expected to wear respirators on this project have medical approval to wear a respirator. d. Copies of respiratory fit-tests for all workers expected to wear a respirator on this project. Fit testing must be done as required by and in accordance with 8 CCR 1544. e. Proof of training required by Part 1.5 for type of work employee will do.
1. Proof of Hazard Communication Training for Lead done within the last calendar year for those exposed to lead or who will perform trigger tasks for less than one hour. (Proof may be a certificate or written statement stating training was completed and a list of names of those individuals who were trained. Proof of 11
this training is not needed if employee provides proof of training required by items e. 2, or e 3.)
2. Proof of training in compliance with 8 CCR 1532.1 (l)(2) done within the last calendar year for all employees who will conduct trigger tasks as defined in 8 CCR 1532.1 (d)(2) for more than one hour or who will reasonably be expected to be exposed to lead above the Action Level. (Proof may be a certificate or written statement stating training was completed and a list of names of those individuals who were trained.)
3. Proof of CDPH lead certification for those workers who will conduct trigger tasks as defined in 8 CCR 1532.1 (d)(2) or will reasonably be expected to be exposed to airborne levels of lead above the PEL on projects that will disturb more than 100 square feet of lead-containing material. (Proof of certification will be a currently valid CDPH certification card as a worker or supervisor. Workers who can show proof of a valid course completion form and application being submitted to CDPH, will be allowed to work while awaiting full certification from CDPH.)
4. Proof of current CDPH certification as a lead supervisor for the on-site competent person for projects involving the conduction of trigger tasks or other activities reasonably expected to exceed the PEL on all projects that will disturb more than 100 square feet of lead-containing material. (Proof of valid certification will be a currently valid CDPH certification card a worker.)
5. If exception to requirement for CDPH certified supervisor listed in Part 1.5.3 is requested, then provide proof of CDPH certified supervisor who will verify containment, personal protection and work practices, and will be able to respond to the project within two hours of request by the Project Monitor. f. Copies of all current MSDS for chemicals used on this project. g. Manufacturers' certifications that high efficiency particulate air (HEPA) vacuums, pressure differential units and other local exhaust ventilation equipment conform to ANSI Z9.2-79 for all HEPA-filtered equipment that will be used on this project. (This is proof that the equipment is actually HEPA filtered. This is separate from the challenge testing requirement needed for equipment used in interior spaces.) h. Name and contact information of independent testing company who will challenge test all vacuums and air filtration devices used on this project (in interior spaces).
I. Statement regarding compliance with all Cal/OSHA exposure monitoring required for this project. j. Name and contact information for laboratory who will analyze air samples or waste samples and documentation of their certification to conduct such analysis. k. Name of Waste Transporter who will transport hazardous waste on this project and documentation that the Transporter is allowed to transport lead hazardous waste. l. Name of Waste Landfill to which lead hazardous waste will be sent and documentation that such landfill is allowed to accept such waste. m. Should waste water filtration be required on this project, submit manufactures documentation pertaining to the capability of waste water filters to filter particles of, at a minimum, five micrometers in size. n. List of all rented equipment to be used within a lead regulated area, or a statement that 12
no rental equipment will be used on this project.
1. If rental equipment is to be used, submit written statements from each rental company indicating the rental company's acknowledgment that the equipment is provided for and may be used in areas where airborne levels of asbestos and/or lead may be present.
o. Submit emergency plans. At a minimum submit the following:
1. Submit non-emergency telephone numbers, other then 911, for the appropriate Police, Sheriff, and Fire Departments.
2. Name, pager or cell phone numbers of the on-site supervisor and his immediate company supervisor.
3. Submit detailed written directions from the project site to the medical facility to be used in case of an emergency. Also include a map which sufficiently shows the route to be taken from the site to the designated medical facility.
4. Submit written emergency procedures pertinent to the work to be performed and which can be implemented by site personnel if the need arises.
p. Local sanitation district Wastewater Discharge Permit for Surface Washers (if required).
The above listed documents must be provided prior to the start of work that will disturb lead. Under no circumstances will workers or supervisors be allowed to work on this project prior to the receipt, review, and acceptance of this documentation by the Owner and/or Project Monitor. In addition, documentation for rental equipment must be provided before the equipment may be used in a lead regulated area. All delays resulting from the failure of the Contractor and/or subcontractors to provide this information in the required time frame is solely the responsibility of the Contractor and/or subcontractor.
The Contractor must use the Pre-Work Submittal Checklist provided at the end of these specifications to provide the Owner and/or Project Monitor these submittals. Failure to use the form will likely lead to the rejection of the submittal package and a delay in the project that will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor and/or subcontractor.
The Contractor is responsible for maintaining current documents and resubmitting copies to the Owner and/or Project Monitor for any worker whose documents expire during the project. Any worker observed on a job site who either is not approved to conduct work by the Owner and/or Project Monitor or has been approved but documentation pertaining to training, medical evaluation, or respiratory fit testing has expired, will be instructed to stop work until these documents are received by the Owner and/or Project Monitor and the worker is approved to perform work that disturbs lead.
1.6.2 SUBMITTALS PROVIDED DURING THE WORK OR FOLLOWING COMPLETION OF THE WORK IF APPLICABLE
Depending on the document, these documents must be provided the Owner and/or Project Monitor on an ongoing basis during the work, or if appropriate following completion of the physical activities associated with the project. The documents must be received and approved by the Owner and/or Project Monitor before the work is considered complete. (Failure to provide these documents means the work is not complete, even though the physical activities may be completed.)
a. Daily sign-in sheet for each worker entering a lead regulated area.
b. The Contractor must provide the results of exposure sampling done to comply with the 13
requirements of 8 CCR 1532.1 (d) and the requirements of this specification.
c. The Contractor must provide blood sampling and analysis results of lead (BLL) and zinc protoporphyrin (ZPP) levels for all workers who are represented by air monitoring results that exceed the Action Level. Typically, the Project Monitor will require blood lead sampling for all workers on a work shift if one or more air sampling results for that shift is above the Action Level.
The written results of the blood sampling analysis must be provided the Owner and/or Project Monitor within 21 days of the exposure over the Action Level or within 12 days of the completion of the project, whichever comes first. d. Copies of job progress reports and project documentation. This must include the names of all employees onsite, the hours worked and a brief description of the work completed at the site(s).
e. The Contractor must provide all waste disposal documentation.
1.7 THIRD-PARTY OVERSIGHT
The Owner is utilizing an independent third-party consultant to provide oversight of all work that disturbs lead on this project. The Contractor shall treat this third-party consultant as a designated representative of the Owner. The third-party consultant for this project is known as the Project Monitor. The Project Monitor is expected to perform some or all of the following activities on this project, but may also conduct other activities as needed: a. Visually monitor the work practices of the Contractor’s employees to determine that the work is being done in compliance with these specifications. The Project Monitor may conduct this activity on a continual basis or may make unannounced random visits to the project site to check on the Contractor’s performance. b. Visually inspect for the presence of visible emissions suspected to contain lead. c. Conduct personal and area air monitoring in accordance with accepted methods. d. Collect bulk samples of relevant materials to determine the presence or absence of lead. e. Visually inspect the work area for cleanliness after completion of the work.
1.8 AIR SAMPLING BY THE OWNER AND/OR PROJECT MONITOR
The Owner and/or Project Monitor may determine it appropriate to collect air samples to evaluate the effectiveness of the Contractor’s engineering controls and work practices. The Contractor and/or subcontractors shall allow the Project Monitor to attach and collect personal air samples on the workers and shall instruct the workers to comply with the directions for that sampling as given by the Project Monitor.
Air sampling may also be used to verify the effectiveness of the Contractor’s containment system. The Project Monitor may choose to collect area air samples within the work area. These samples results may be used to generate an eight-hour, time-weighted average. The result of area samples in a lead work area should normally be far below what the workers are breathing. Therefore should the Project Monitor collect area air samples within the work area that result in exposures above half the Action Level (15 g/m3), the Project Monitor will require the Contractor and/or subcontractors to re-evaluate their work practices, engineering controls, and containment system.
The Project Monitor may also choose to collect area samples downwind, outside of the regulated work area. These sample results will be compared to background air samples upwind or samples collected prior to the beginning of work. Sample results indicating airborne lead emissions at or above 5 g/m3 above background levels will be interpreted to mean that the Contractor and/or subcontractors 14
containment or engineering controls are inadequate. This may result in the temporary stoppage of work until the Project Monitor is assured that airborne lead levels will significantly diminish by the change in work practices or engineering controls.
1.9 NOTIFICATION OF EMPLOYERS OF EMPLOYEES IN ADJACENT AREAS
The Contractor and subcontractors who will disturb lead are responsible for ensuring that employers of employees in areas adjacent to the work being conducted have been notified that work disturbing lead will take place.
Typically this notification is in addition to the posting of lead regulated area signs. In summary, this notice shall be provided to all other contractors and subcontractors in areas adjacent to the work. Those employers must be notified in advance of any upcoming work that will disturb or impact lead in a manner that may generate airborne levels of lead that could present a potential exposure to workers at or above the Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL) as defined in 8 CCR 1532.1©). This notice shall also provide information on the control measures being implemented and a warning that the employer’s employees are to remain outside of the posted regulated areas. The Contractor and/or subcontractors anticipating the need for such notification shall coordinate this notification with the Owner and/or Primary Contractor.
1.10 SUSPENSION OF WORK
The Owner and/or Project Monitor may suspend all work that disturbs lead if any controls (such as barriers) fail, if debris known or suspected to contain lead is detected outside the containment, or if work is on the exterior of a structure and wind speeds are more than fifteen miles per hour, or if in the judgement of the Project Monitor, other factors exist that determine the work must be stopped because of the potential for the creation of lead hazards. For example, the Project monitor may conduct perimeter monitoring and discover that lead is being released in concentrations above 5 g/m3 above background levels or work area air monitoring that is above half the Action Level. In either case, the Owner and/or Project Monitor may suspend work until more effective containment, work practices, and engineering controls are utilized.
1.11 PRE-START MEETING
The Project Monitor typically recommends that there be a pre-start meeting with the Contractor or subcontractor’s representative and the Project Monitor approximately five days prior to the expected start of work. The Contractor will be expected to provide the majority of pre-work submittals described in Part 1.6.1 at that meeting. This meeting is designed to answer questions about the project and address issues of concern of either the Contractor, subcontractor, or Project Monitor. Should this meeting be determined not to be necessary, the submittals must be delivered to the Owner and/or Project Monitor no later than five working days in advance of the work.
1.12 TESTING FOR LEAD IN PAINTS, COATINGS, CERAMIC TILE, AND OTHER MATERIALS
The Owner has already investigated the paints present in and on the building associated with this project and does not anticipate paying for additional testing.
PART 2.0 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
2.1 FIRE RESISTANT PLASTIC SHEETING (POLY)
All plastic sheeting used on this project must be fire resistant whether used inside or outside of buildings.
2.2 CHALLENGE TESTING OF HEPA FILTRATION SYSTEMS
All HEPA-equipped vacuums and air filtration units to be used on this project in interior spaces during operations that may disturb lead must be challenge tested and meet ANSI requirements using DOP or an equivalent testing agent. Except for HEPA air filtration units used to create negative pressure differentials for the demolition of ceramic tile, this testing must take place within ten calendar days prior to their use 15
and after replacement of any HEPA filter removed from previously tested equipment. Air filtration units used in conjunction with the demolition of ceramic walls must be challenge tested on site. They do not need to be retested as long as they remain on site. They will need to be retested if they are moved off site. Copies of all testing certifications must be provided to the Owner and Project Monitor prior to use of the equipment.
Exception: Subcontractors using HEPA vacuums for incidental cleanup of lead dust resulting from the minimal disturbance of lead as discussed in Part 1.5.1 are exempt from the challenge testing requirement unless, in the judgement of the Project Monitor, there is a reasonable expectation that the subcontractor’s HEPA vacuums are leaking.
2.3 VACUUM-ASSISTED TOOLS
When using power tools to disturb lead, the Contractor shall only use tools that have a HEPA-filtered- vacuum recovery system.
2.4 POWER WASHING
NOT APPLICABLE TO THIS PROJECT
2.5 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
The Contractor shall use respirators and personal protective equipment as required by 8 CCR 1532.1 and as appropriate based on personal air monitoring results. All respirators must be approved by NIOSH.
Respirator fit test records and the respiratory protection program shall be retained on site as part of the project documentation if respiratory protection is used on this project. Disposable dust/mist respirators shall not be used.
At a minimum, half-face respirators with P-100 (HEPA) cartridges will be required during surface preparation where there is manual scraping or sanding that will take more than one hour to complete. Dry scraping or sanding, mechanical scraping, abrading, sanding, or similar actions will trigger the need for respirators regardless of the duration of the activity.
Regardless of the duration of the work, all workers scraping lead-containing paint or removing or demolishing ceramic tile must wear disposable protective clothing over their wear home clothes. Workers demolishing surfaces that contain ceramic tile must wear full body protective clothing including hoods and gloves.
At a minimum, the Contractor and subcontractors must ensure that no lead dust or debris is tracked out of the contained, regulated area. The Contractor and subcontractors must ensure that all those allowed into the regulated area wear adequate foot coverings that ensure that they will not track contaminated material out of the area when the leave.
2.6 RENTAL EQUIPMENT
Any equipment rented for the purpose of disturbing lead or used within a lead regulated area must be accompanied with documentation verifying that the rental agency has been notified, and acknowledges receipt of notification that the equipment being rented will be used for work inside a lead regulated area. This documentation must be submitted to the Project Monitor prior to the equipment being used on the job site.
PART 3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 SUMMARY
Contractors and subcontractors conducting lead related construction work will be evaluated on a performance standard which includes, but is not limited to, cleanliness of work area, work practices as 16
verified by exposure monitoring, containment set up, and ultimately, the clean up of paint chips, dust, and debris.
Any work practice that creates paint chips, dust, glazed ceramic or painted debris must be conducted within a regulated area as defined in 8 CCR 1532.1 and within a containment at least as stringent as required by Title 17 and/or described in these specifications.
The containment system shall be designed and constructed to prevent visible dust or debris from escaping the work area as well as the escape of airborne lead emissions at or above 10 g/m3 above background levels. Should dust or debris generated by the work be found outside the containment, or the airborne lead outside the containment exceed background levels, the Project Monitor will determine that the containment is inadequate, in violation of Title 17 requirements, and work will be stopped until the Contractor and/or subcontractors redesign the containment to be more effective.
3.2 COMPLIANCE WITH REQUIREMENTS FOR THE PEL AND ACTION LEVEL
Contractors and subcontractors strictly adhering to the requirements listed in these specifications who conduct minimal disturbance of lead such as by the conduction of trigger task work amounting to less than one hour, may begin work assuming the Cal/OSHA Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL) will not be exceeded.
Contractors and subcontractors not strictly conforming to suggested work practices must start work assuming the PEL will be exceeded. This means they must comply with all OSHA requirements specified for work that results in exposures over the PEL. This will include, but is not limited to, complying with requirements for training, personal protection, regulated area development, blood testing, personal air monitoring, the development of a written compliance plan, and the notification of employers in adjacent areas.
Contractors and subcontractors must assume the PEL will be exceeded each time they conduct trigger activities that will exceed one hour in duration. This will trigger the need to wear respirators and protective clothing, meet the training requirements specified earlier in these specifications, conduct personal air sampling, develop a written compliance plan and all other actions described as necessary by 8 CCR 1532.1 and these specifications.
3.2.1 PERSONAL AIR SAMPLING
The Contractor and subcontractors are responsible for conducting personal air monitoring during disturbance of lead in compliance with the requirements of 8 CCR 1532.1. At a minimum, Contractors and subcontractors shall conduct representative exposure monitoring on workers on a daily basis whenever those workers will conduct trigger task activities that will take longer than one hour to complete in an eight-hour shift. In addition, air sampling must be done for any work for which the Project Monitor believes has a reasonable potential for generating airborne lead at or above the Action Level. The Project Monitor will not allow work to proceed if the Contractor is not prepared to conduct the necessary air monitoring.
Sample information must include (but is not restricted to) the name of the individuals wearing the samples, the individuals’ Social Security Number or Company ID number, the date the samples were collected, identification by unique method of the area where the work is being performed, and identification of the work being performed. EXAMPLE: James Black, 000-11-222, 06/25/03, Bill Jackson Elementary School, Building H, Classroom 5, East covered walkway, paint surface preparation work.
Laboratory results shall be provided to the Owner and/or Project Monitor within 72 hours of sample collection. Paper copies must be received within 14 days of the Contractor receiving the results from the laboratory. Contractor and/or subcontractor must submit proof that laboratory has the required licenses to analyze air samples for lead.
Should they wish to make use of the exceptions to air sampling stated in 8 CCR 1532.1 (d)(3)©) 17
& (D), the Contractor and/or subcontractors must submit the required information to the Owner and/or Project Monitor and receive written approval from the Owner and/or Project Monitor prior to reducing the personal protection, containment, or engineering controls stated in this specification. In general, air sampling results that are intended for use to reduce personal protection requirements must be collected on this project. Air sampling results from other projects will not be allowed to create a negative exposure assessment for use on this project.
Contractor and/or subcontractors must submit a signed statement that they will conduct personal air sampling according to Cal/OSHA requirements for all work where that sampling is required by these specifications. Typically sampling will be required whenever the Contractor and/or subcontractor conduct a trigger task for more than one hour in an eight or more hour shift.
3.3 WORK INVOLVING WHOLE COMPONENT REMOVAL OR DEMOLITION OF ENTIRE STRUCTURES
Intact lead-containing paint on construction debris is generally not considered a hazardous waste in California. However, loose and peeling paint on structures may result in all construction debris from that site being considered a hazardous waste.
Therefore prior to the demolition or removal of painted material and the disposal of that material, all loose, peeling or flaking paint must be removed. This includes objects such as fences, built-in furniture or cabinets, other similar structures, as well as entire structures being demolished.
Any paint debris generated during this work must be separated into appropriate waste streams and handled as a hazardous waste, or as deemed appropriate as discussed in Part 3.11 Lead Waste Management.
The manual demolition or removal of painted components involving over 100 square feet of material does not trigger the Cal/OSHA pre-work notification as stated in 8 CCR 1532.1 (p) if the paint is intact and will largely remain undisturbed by the removal or demolition process. For example, if door or window frames with intact paint are removed, and the amount of material is over 100 square feet, the Cal/OSHA notification does not need to be provided if the paint is intact and won’t be disturbed by the removal process.
3.4 PROHIBITED WORK PRACTICES
The following work activities are prohibited on the project:
a. Open-flame burning or torching.
b Machine sanding or grinding of lead materials or surfaces coated with lead unless the machine is equipped with a HEPA-filtered-vacuum recovery system.
c. Un-contained hydro-blasting or high-pressure washing.
d. The use of power washing to remove loose and peeling paint.
e. Abrasive blasting or sandblasting without a HEPA-filtered-vacuum recovery system or done outside of a negative pressure enclosure.
f. Heat guns operating above 1,100 F.
g. Dry scraping, except for limited areas where electrical hazards create a higher risk than lead or unless specifically approved by the Project Monitor.
h. Use of methylene chloride based paint strippers.
3.5 COMPETENT PERSON 18
The Contractor and/or subcontractors disturbing lead shall have a competent person (as defined by Cal/OSHA for construction activities) onsite at all times to supervise and oversee all activities which may disturb materials containing lead. This person must be a CDPH Certified Lead Supervisor for all work that involves the conduction of trigger tasks on more than 100 square feet of lead-containing material.
The above requirement is not required for environmental contractors conducting work limited to the removal of loose and peeling paint on structures scheduled for demolition. In those situations, the on-site supervisor must meet the lead training requirements as stated in Part 1.5.2 Required Training For Those Exposed Over the Action Level Or Who Conduct Trigger Tasks. In addition, the Contractor must have a CDPH certified supervisor approve the containment setup at the start of each shift that will disturb lead, approve the work practices and personal protective equipment worn by the workers, verify that proper air monitoring is being collected, be able to return to the site within two hours if requested by the Project Monitor, and approve the final cleanup of the work area prior to a visual inspection of the work area being conducted by the Project Monitor. The certified supervisor will always be required to approve the initial set up of the containment, personal protection, and work practices at the start of the job, but then depending on the quality of the work demonstrated, the Project Monitor may not require the certified supervisor to inspect the work site at the start of each shift. This exemption will be revoked should air sampling on this project demonstrate airborne lead exposures to workers or supervisors are above the Action Level.
3.6 WORK SITE PREPARATION & CONTAINMENT REQUIREMENTS
The Contractor and/or subcontractor is required to contain the disturbance of lead in a manner that prevents lead-contaminated dust, debris, water, or air from leaving the regulated work area in an uncontrolled fashion. The containment must be developed in compliance with the requirements of Title 17 and these specifications. The presence of lead dust, debris, or air above background levels will indicate that the containment is inadequate. Work will be stopped and the Contractor and/or subcontractor must adjust work practices, engineering controls, or the containment in a manner that convinces the Project Monitor that the material will no longer be able to escape the regulated work area.
3.6.1 EXTERIOR WORK SITE PREPARATION & CONTAINMENT
NOT APPLICABLE TO THIS PROJECT
3.6.2 INTERIOR SITE PREPARATION & CONTAINMENT
NOT APPLICABLE TO THIS PROJECT
3.6.3 ADDITIONAL CONTAINMENT REQUIREMENTS FOR DEMOLITION OF CERAMIC TILE AND/OR MECHANICAL DISTURBANCE OR BLASTING OF LEAD-CONTAINING MATERIALS WITHOUT A HEPA-FILTERED-VACUUM RECOVERY SYSTEM
NOT APPLICABLE TO THIS PROJECT
3.6.4 DECONTAMINATION PROCEDURES
Decontamination procedures shall be established by the Contractor and subcontractor depending upon the airborne concentrations of lead as well as the amount of dust and debris created by the work. At a minimum, the decontamination procedures shall be in compliance with 8 CCR 1532.1 (I)(1-5). As stated in 8 1532.1 (I)(1-5), the Contractor shall assure that these decontamination facilities are used by the supervisor and workers.
For work that does not exceed the PEL, and/or does not include the disturbance of more than 100 square feet of material, the Contractor and/or subcontractor must assure that a hand-washing station is available and used by the supervisor and workers. For work that exceeds the PEL, or involves the breakage of ceramic tile in amounts over 100 square feet, the Contractor must ensure that workers shower, at a minimum at the end of the work shift as required by 8 CCR 19
1532.1.
3.6.5 AVOIDING CONTAMINATION OF ADJACENT AREAS BY PROPER DECONTAMINATION
Should the Owner and/or Project Monitor discover that an occupant of the regulated area left the regulated area without properly decontaminating, the Contractor will be required to clean the adjacent areas that in the opinion of Project Monitor may have been exposed to lead dust or debris from this action. Failure to properly decontaminate is demonstrated by wearing protective clothing outside the regulated area that was previously worn in the area or by wearing footwear outside the regulated area that was not properly covered and/or decontaminated. The failure to adequately decontaminate will trigger the following cleaning. In all areas determined necessary by Project Monitor, the Contractor will be required to HEPA vacuum, then wet wash, then HEPA vacuum again all potentially contaminated areas and items to the satisfaction of the Project Monitor. The Project Monitor will not need to demonstrate the need for this cleaning by the presence of visible dust and will not need to collect settled dust samples in order to require the Contractor to implement the cleaning routine.
3.6.6 APPROVAL PRIOR TO START OF WORK
The Project Monitor shall visually inspect any regulated area for compliance with this specification before the contractor and/or subcontractor may begin work that may disturb lead. The contractor and/or subcontractors may not begin work disturbing lead without approval from the Project Monitor. The contractor and/or subcontractor must contact the Project Monitor sufficiently in advance of needing the visual inspection and coordinate with the Project Monitor in order to minimize any delays resulting from the need for this visual inspection.
Typically, once the Project Monitor has reviewed the contractor and/or subcontractors regulated work area set up, the work site supervisor will be told that they may start work at future regulated work areas without prior authorization from the Project Monitor as long as they assure the Project Monitor that the containment and work practices will be implemented as approved by the Project Monitor.
3.7 WET WORK PRACTICES
Unless determined infeasible by the Project Monitor, all disturbance of lead-containing materials must utilize wet methods for dust suppression.
3.8 PROMPT CLEANUP OF DEBRIS
Removed lead-containing material shall be kept wet and promptly placed in the type of waste containers required by this specification. The Contractor and subcontractors are encouraged to place debris in containers shortly after it has been removed. However, at a minimum, all bulk debris must be containerized before any work stoppages such as for breaks, lunch, or the end of a shift. Bulk debris must be kept adequately wet until it is containerized. The Contractor must plan only to disturb amounts of material that can be cleaned up and containerized before the next work stoppage. Delays and additional costs incurred by the Contractor for failing to adequately calculate the amount of time needed to clean up debris will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. For example, if a crew must work overtime to containerize debris before ending the shift, those additional costs are the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
The Contractor and/or subcontractor must not allow excessive amounts of dust and debris to gather on the floor containment barriers. If in the opinion of the Project Monitor, too much debris is being allowed to gather on the floor poly, the Project Monitor will require the Contractor or subcontractor to either assign a worker to conduct continual cleanup, or the workers scraping paint or conducting other work disturbing lead will have to contain the debris before it falls to the ground. Typically this is done by scraping paint directly into a cardboard box held by the worker as he or she scrapes off the loose and peeling paint.
3.9 FINAL CLEANUP OF THE WORK AREA 20
3.9.1 EXTERIOR WORK AREAS
The Contractor and/or subcontractor must HEPA vacuum up all visible dust and debris off containment barriers. Then gently roll and/or fold poly barriers in on themselves in order to avoid releasing any remaining dust to adjacent areas during this process.
The final step will be to vacuum up any visible dust or debris in the work area or regulated area that is suspected to contain lead. The area must be visually clean of all lead-related dust and debris, and all poly barriers must be removed before the workers leave the job site. The regulated area barrier tape and/or signs must be taken down. Critical barriers erected on windows and HVAC systems may be left in place if work will take place in those same areas during the next work shift. Otherwise those barriers must also be removed before the workers leave at the end of the shift.
3.9.2 CLEANUP OF INTERIOR WORK AREAS
NOT APPLICABLE TO THIS PROJECT
3.10 FINAL INSPECTION OF THE WORK AREA
The Project Monitor will inspect work areas for visual signs of dust and debris related to the disturbance of lead. The Project Monitor will not inspect or evaluate the quality of paint preparation work such as paint scraping. The contractor who will be painting the prepared surfaces is responsible for the quality and workmanship of the surface preparation. However, if the work involves the removal of loose and peeling paint prior to the demolition of a structure, the Project Monitor will evaluate the completeness of that work.
For exterior work, the Project Monitor will visually inspect the work area to determine that there is no visible dust or debris still in the area that is reasonably expected to have been generated by the work. All poly barriers (except for on critical barriers in areas needed for the next shift) and barrier tape and signs must be removed.
Until told otherwise by the Project Monitor, the supervisor must notify the Project Monitor in advance of the end of the shift in order for the Project Monitor to visually inspect the work area prior to the workers leaving for the day. Typically this will not be required after the workers demonstrate that they consistently properly clean the work area before leaving.
For interior work, the Project Monitor will conduct a thorough visual inspection for dust and debris that may be related to the disturbance of lead. All surface areas must be clean. Residue dust will be assumed to contain lead and must be cleaned.
Until told otherwise by the Project Monitor, the supervisor shall notify the Project Monitor when the supervisor believes the work is complete and ready for a visual inspection. Prior to calling the Project Monitor for the visual inspection, the supervisor must personally inspect the area and determine that it is clean and ready for a final inspection.
The Project Monitor typically will not collect dust wipe samples to verify the cleanliness of an area unless specifically stated otherwise elsewhere in these specifications. However, dust wipes may be collected in either of the following circumstances. In both cases the supervisor will be told of the possibility of the collection of dust wipes and encouraged to conduct extra cleaning of the areas.
a. Ceramic Tile Removal Closely Adjacent To Kindergarten Classrooms, Daycare Facilities, or Food Preparation Areas Including Kitchens and Eating Areas.
The Project Monitor is likely to conduct dust wipe sampling on the floor in the area between the decontamination unit and occupied areas of the property where children under the age of six routinely may be present. The supervisor will be told in advance that 21
this testing will take place and is encouraged to clean the area between the decontamination area and where the sample will be collected. This sample will be collected within 20 feet of the decontamination chambers unless the Project Monitor believes that poor work practices or decontamination procedures have contaminated the area as discussed below.
b. Failure To Comply With Work Practices, Engineering Controls, Or Decontamination Procedures
If in the judgement of the Project Monitor, the Contractor and/or subcontractor has not followed the requirements of this specification regarding work practices, engineering controls, and decontamination procedures, the Project Monitor will collect dust wipe samples in areas believed contaminated by the Contractor or subcontractors’ actions. The supervisor of the project will be told in advance if such testing will be conducted and given time to clean those areas. For example, Part 3.6.5. describes actions that will lead to additional cleaning by the Contractor.
Should dust wipe sampling be necessary, the Project Monitor will conduct such testing with the specified intent of verifying whether the containment process and decontamination processes used by the Contractor and/or subcontractor were adequate in preventing the release of lead dust from the work area. The samples will be collected according to the procedures required in Title 17. The containment will be judged appropriate if the results of the samples do not indicate a dust lead hazard for floors as specified in Title 17.
3.11 POWER WASHING OF EXTERIOR BUILDING SURFACES
NOT APPLICABLE TO THIS PROJECT
3.12 LEAD WASTE MANAGEMENT
Proper testing and disposal of all waste material is the responsibility of the Contractor.
The Contractor must plan the work in order to minimize the generation of hazardous waste during the disturbance of lead-containing materials. The Contractor must create separate waste streams as necessary. This particularly includes the separation of any loose paint chips or flakes or ceramic tile debris from other construction debris. All waste streams must be identified by the Contractor before the work begins and separated during the course of the project to minimize costs of disposal.
The Contractor is responsible for all costs associated with the testing, removal, packing, loading, shipping, and disposal of lead containing waste generated during this project. This does not include waste water testing done to determine if power washing is permitted. The cost of that testing will be covered by the Owner.
The Contractor is required to comply with all regulations in Title 8 Section 1532.1 Lead in Construction and Cal/EPA Title 22 for waste classification and disposal.
3.12.1 LEAD WASTE TESTING
The Contractor must conduct appropriate waste stream characterization testing and/or filtering prior to disposal of waste products such as water, sand, paint chips, vacuum debris, and filters generated during surface preparation activities. Once completed, the test analysis results must be submitted to the Owner and/or Project Monitor for review. The Contractor is responsible for all costs associated with waste stream testing. Contractors may choose to avoid some waste testing by presuming that the waste is a lead hazardous waste. Waste must be tested if the Contractor wishes to treat it as a non-hazardous waste.
The Contractor may not remove or dispose of the identified materials from the job site until this 22
review has been completed and the Contractor has been informed by the Owner and/or Project Monitor of their concurrence that the materials have been properly tested and meet the requirements allowing the materials to be classified as non-hazardous.
3.12.2 HAZARDOUS WASTE MANIFESTS
For all hazardous waste that requires an EPA manifest, the Contractor must coordinate with the Owner for signature of the manifest. In general, the Contractor must notify the Owner a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the need for a signature. Hazardous waste cannot be transported without an authorized signature so it is the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate with the Owner the time waste transporters will need the signature. Delays resulting from the failure of the Contractor to obtain an authorized signature from the Owner will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, unless the Owner was provided 24 hour in advance notice and the transporter arrived on time during the regular work hours of the Owner.
3.12.3 WASTE CONTAINERS
All debris generated in the regulated work area shall be placed in containers approved by the Project Monitor. The containers shall be leak tight and meet the requirements as stated in these specifications. Bags and other containers shall not be overfilled.
If in the judgement of the Project Monitor, the Contractor’s method of containerizing debris is inadequate and either results in the release of dust or debris or is reasonably expected to result in such a release, the Contractor will be forbidden to continue waste containerization or load out until the containers meet the approval of the Project Monitor. This may result in the Contractor being required to change from one type of container to another. It must be understood that the Contractor is responsible for proper containerization of waste and therefore, will be required to provide for adequate and appropriate containers regardless of cost incurred due to failure of one system of containerization being required over another.
When utilizing bags to contain lead hazardous waste, two bags at least six-mil in thickness must be used. The inner bag may be sealed with adequate amounts of tape necessary to secure the opening of the bag. Only the second or final bag must be gooseneck sealed.
Regardless of the wastes characterization or designation as construction debris or hazardous waste, all waste containers shall be stored in designated and secure areas separate from the work area prior to testing and/or disposal.
The Contractor is responsible for proper storage and labeling of all hazardous waste containers while they are being used as storage and before they leave the job site according to the requirements of DTSC and DOT.
Building components such as wood with loose and flaking paint must, at a minimum, be wrapped in one layer of six-mil poly and adequately sealed with tape to secure the containerized material.
Concentrated lead waste such as sludge from paint stripping operations, lead containing paint chips and/or dust, HEPA vacuum contents and filters must be assumed to be hazardous waste until properly tested and must, at a minimum, be placed in poly lined, DOT approved steel drums.
Hard edged materials such as floor tile, gypsum board, plaster, stucco, ceramic tile, and other materials that may tear bags must be assumed to be hazardous waste until properly tested and must, at a minimum, be placed in poly lined, ridged-walled containers such as fiber drums or cardboard boxes as the final container.
Sharp edged components with peeling, blistering or flaking paint (e.g., nails, screws, metal lath, tin sheeting, door frames, etc.) must, at a minimum, be wrapped in one layer of six-mil 23
poly sheeting, or a single six-mil thick bag and adequately sealed with tape to secure the containerized material.
3.13 ALTERNATIVE WORK PLANS
The Contractor and/or subcontractors may submit alternate work plans to the suggested work practices and containment strategies as stated in these specifications. These alternate work plans or containment strategies must be approved by Owner and/or Project Monitor prior to their implementation.
This specification was developed by:
Douglas R. Colley Phone: (916) 632-6800 DOHS#I/S/M-5785 Fax: (916) 632-6812 September 5, 2009 PART 4.0 DOCUMENTATION SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
Pre-Start Submittal Form
This form must be completed, signed, and submitted with the Contractor and/or subcontractors’ documents required prior to the start of work. This form and these documents must be submitted to the Owner and/or Project Monitor in the time specified in the project documents prior to the start of work disturbing lead.
Please attach submittals in the order listed below. Please check off each item that is submitted. Write NA in spaces for which you believe the requirement is Not Applicable.
All Contractors and subcontractors who will have employees disturb lead on this project must, at a minimum provide proof of item number 1.6.1.e.1., lead hazard communication training in compliance with 8 CCR 1532.1 (L)(A)(1). This is the only submittal that must be provided by these employers as long as they do not disturb more lead than is described in Part 1.5.1.
The following submittals must be provided by all Contractors and subcontractors who will, at a minimum, have employees who will conduct trigger tasks for more than one hour per shift, will potentially be exposed above the Action Level, or will conduct other activities as determined by the Project Monitor that may result in significant exposure to lead.
a. A written lead compliance plan in compliance with 8 CCR 1532.1 must be provided that includes the following:
1. A description of equipment and materials, controls, crew size, job responsibilities, and operations and maintenance procedures for each activity in which lead is disturbed and potentially emitted;
2. A description of specific control methods (wet methods, engineering controls, etc.) that will be used to ensure workers are not exposed above the PEL;
3. Technology considered in meeting the Cal/OSHA permissible exposure level (PEL);
4. Air monitoring data documenting sources of lead emissions;
5. A detailed implementation schedule for the compliance plan, including the schedule for inspections by a competent person;
6. A description of the lead work practice program which will be used to control worker exposures. This includes the use of protective work clothing, equipment, hygiene facilities and practices, and housekeeping practices; 24
7. A description of the steps the Contractor or subcontractor will take to minimize the generation of hazardous waste produced on this project. This includes, but is not necessarily limited to how the contractor will separate waste streams. For example, how will the Contractor or subcontractor will keep potentially hazardous waste such as paint chips and dust from being disposed of with other potentially non-hazardous construction materials and debris. b. Copy of the Contractor or subcontractor’s written respirator program in accordance with the requirements of 8 CCR 1544. c. Proof that all employees expected to wear respirators on this project have medical approval to wear a respirator. d. Copies of respiratory fit-tests for all workers expected to wear a respirator on this project. Fit testing must be done as required by and in accordance with 8 CCR 1544. e. Proof of training required by Part 1.5 for type of work employee will do.
1. Proof of Hazard Communication Training for Lead for those exposed to lead or who will perform trigger tasks for less than one hour. (Proof may be a certificate or written statement stating training was completed and a list of names of those individuals who were trained. Proof of this training is not needed if employee provides proof of training required by items e. 2, or e. 3.)
2. Proof of training in compliance with 8 CCR 1532.1 (l)(2) for all employees who will conduct trigger tasks as defined in 8 CCR 1532.1 (d)(2) for more than one hour or who will reasonably be expected to be exposed to lead above the Action Level. (Proof may be a certificate or written statement stating training was completed and a list of names of those individuals who were trained.) Not required if providing proof of training required in item e.3 and/or item e.4.
3. Proof of CDPH lead certification for those workers who will conduct trigger tasks as defined in 8 CCR 1532.1 (d)(2) or will reasonably be expected to be exposed to airborne levels of lead above the PEL. This is required for this work on all projects that will disturb more than 100 square feet of lead-containing material. (Proof of certification will be a currently valid CDPH certification card as a worker or supervisor. Workers who can show proof of a valid course completion form and application being submitted to CDPH, will be allowed to work while awaiting full certification from CDPH.)
4. Proof of current CDPH certification as a lead supervisor for the on-site competent person for projects involving the conduction of trigger tasks or other activities reasonably expected to exceed the PEL. This is required for this work on all projects that will disturb more than 100 square feet of lead-containing material. Proof of valid certification will be a currently valid CDPH certification card a worker.)
5. If exception to requirement for CDPH certified supervisor listed in Part 1.5.3 is requested, then provide proof of CDPH certified supervisor who will verify containment, personal protection and work practices, and will be able to respond to the project within two hours of request by the Project Monitor. (Only applicable for paint scraping work done prior to the demolition of buildings or structures.) 25
f. Copies of all current MSDS for chemicals used on this project.
g. Manufacturers' certifications that high efficiency particulate air (HEPA) vacuums, pressure differential units and other local exhaust ventilation equipment conform to ANSI Z9.2-79 for all HEPA-filtered equipment that will be used on this project. (This is proof that the equipment is actually HEPA filtered. This is separate from the challenge testing requirement needed for equipment used in interior spaces.)
h. Name and contact information of independent testing company who will challenge test all vacuums and air filtration devices used on this project (in interior spaces).
I. Statement regarding compliance with all Cal/OSHA exposure monitoring required for this project.
j. Name and contact information for laboratory who will analyze air samples or waste samples and documentation of their certification to conduct such analysis.
k. Name of Waste Transporter who will transport hazardous waste on this project and documentation that the Transporter is allowed to transport lead hazardous waste.
l. Name of Waste Landfill to which lead hazardous waste will be sent and documentation that such landfill is allowed to accept such waste.
m. Should waste water filtration be required on this project, submit manufactures documentation pertaining to the capability of waste water filters to filter particles of, at a minimum, five micrometers in size.
n. List of all rented equipment to be used within a lead regulated area, or a statement that no rental equipment will be used on this project.
1. If rental equipment is to be used, submit written statements from each rental company indicating the rental company's acknowledgment that the equipment is provided for and may be used in areas where airborne levels of asbestos and/or lead may be present.
o. Submit emergency plans. At a minimum submit the following:
1. Submit non-emergency telephone numbers, other then 911, for the appropriate Police, Sheriff, and Fire Departments.
2. Name, pager or cell phone numbers of the on-site supervisor and his immediate company supervisor.
3. Submit detailed written directions from the project site to the medical facility to be used in case of an emergency. Also include a map which sufficiently shows the route to be taken from the site to the designated medical facility.
4. Submit written emergency procedures pertinent to the work to be performed and which can be implemented by site personnel if the need arises.
p. Local sanitation district Wastewater Discharge Permit for Surface Washers (if required).
The above listed documents must be provided in the time specified in the project documents prior to the start of work that will disturb lead. Under no circumstances will workers or supervisors be allowed to work on this project prior to the receipt of this documentation by the Owner and/or Project Monitor. In addition, documentation regarding rental equipment, but must be provided before the equipment may be used in a 26
lead regulated area. All delays resulting from the failure of the Contractor and/or subcontractors to provide this information in the required time frame is solely the responsibility of the Contractor and/or subcontractor.
Name, Signature, and Contact Information of Contractor's Personnel Completing Pre-Start Submittal Package
NAME: (Print or Type)
SIGNATURE:
Telephone:
Fax:
Mailing Address:
27
The following information is reprinted from earlier in these specifications in order to assist the Contractor and/or subcontractors in providing the necessary submittals during and following the work.
1.6.2 Submittals Provided During The Work (Or Following Completion Of The Work If Applicable)
The following documents must be provided the Owner and/or Project Monitor following completion of the physical activities associated with the project. The following documents must be received and approved by the Owner and/or Project Monitor before the work is considered complete. (Failure to provide these documents means the work is not complete, even though the physical activities may be completed.)
a. Daily sign-in sheet for each worker entering a lead regulated area.
b. The Contractor must provide the results of exposure sampling done to comply with the requirements of 8 CCR 1532.1 (d) and the requirements of this specification.
c. The Contractor must provide blood sampling and analysis results of lead (BLL) and zinc protoporphyrin (ZPP) levels for all workers who are represented by air monitoring results that exceed the Action Level. Typically, the Project Monitor will require blood lead sampling for all workers on a work shift if one or more air sampling results for that shift is above the Action Level.
The written results of the blood sampling analysis must be provided the Owner and/or Project Monitor within 21 days of the exposure over the Action Level or within 12 days of the completion of the project, whichever comes first.
d. Copies of job progress reports and project documentation. This must include the names of all employees onsite, the hours worked and a brief description of the work completed at the site(s).
e. The Contractor must provide all waste disposal documentation.
END OF SECTION
28
Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2023.00 Frontier ES Kitchen Remodel
SECTION 10 14 00
SIGNAGE
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Provision and installation of interior and exterior room identification signs, geometric restroom signs and interior and exterior directional and informational signs including signs for accessible features and regulatory signs.
B. Signs
C. Support posts
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS (List is for the Contractor’s Convenience and May Not Be Complete.)
A. Section 00 72 00: General Conditions
B. Section 06 10 00: Rough Carpentry
C. Section 08 11 00: Metal Doors and Frames
D. Section 09 90 00: Painting
1.03 RELATED CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Accessible signs shall conform with the following requirements as indicated: 1. California Building Code (CBC) Title 24, 2019 Edition. 2. ADA Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG, latest adopted edition). 3. Contracted Grade 2 Braille shall be used whenever Braille symbols are specifically required (CBC Section 11B-703.3 Braille). 4. Means of Egress Identification: CBC 11B-216.4. 5. Tactile Exit Signs: CBC 1013.4, 11B-703.2 & 11B-703.3. 6. Restroom Identification Symbols: CBC 11B-216.8 &11B-703.7.2.6. 7. Signs and Identification: CBC 11B-216.1 &11B-703.1. 8. International Symbol of Accessibility: CBC 11B-703.7.2.1. 9. Identification Signs: CBC 11B-216.2. 10. Direction and Information Signs: CBC 11B-703.1. 11. Symbols of Accessibility: CBC 11B-703.7. 12. Finish and Contrast: CBC 11B-703.5.1. 13. Character Proportions: CBC 11B-703.2.4. 14. Character Height: CBC 11B-703.2.5. 15. Raised Characters and Pictorial Symbol Signs: CBC 11B-703.2 & 11B-703.6. 16. Braille: CBC 11B-703.3. 17. Mounting Height and Location: CBC 11B-703.4.1 & 11B-703.4.2. 18. Symbols of Accessibility: CBC 11B-703.7.2. 19. Color of Symbol: CBC 11B-703.7.2.1. 20. Entrance Signs: CBC 11B-216.6.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer’s technical data and installation for each type of sign required.
B. Submit shop drawings listing sign size, type style and letter heights and construction detail.
10 14 00 - 1 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2023.00 Frontier ES Kitchen Remodel
C. Submit samples of background colors and character colors. Indicate which type styles shall be used for required tactile characters and for required visual characters.
D. Submit proposed sign schedule to comply with scoping requirements above. Architect to provide text for Room ID Signage.
E. Submit under provisions of Section 00 72 00.
F. All signage shall be designed and constructed to comply with signage specifications and drawings.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE, MATERIALS AND FABRICATION TECHNIQUES
A. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Manufacturers shall submit 3 references showing products for projects completed within the last 6 years. Both tactile and non-tactile signage shall be included in the work. 2. Manufacture’s Two-Year Warranties. 3. Contractor shall provide labor and materials to repair or replace defective signs as directed by Owner. Defects shall include: a. Tactile characters and/or Braille dots which come off or are removed. b. Discoloration, wear and scratching off of the surface color. c. All signs and sign components, except for damage by mishandling by Owner, including installation by Owner, or vandalism.
1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver to project site in manufacturer’s original, unopened and undamaged packaging. Store in original packaging under protective cover and protect from damage. Handle materials in such a manner as to prevent damage to products or finishes.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Sign Material (see sign types below)
B. Fasteners: One way tamper resistant screw # 90090A 155 (1.25” minimum, 1” minimum embedment into wall) for wood, masonry or concrete application and self drilling tamper resistant pan head pin in head torx (1”) #92970A for metal application with fastener anchors as appropriate for wall material.
C. Numerals and upper case letters on signs will be minimum 1 inch high (vertical dimension unless otherwise shown on Drawings) embossed text and numerals shall comply with CBC 11B-703.2 & 11B-703.6. Vertical dimension of lower case letters shall be proportional to height of upper case letters. 1. Raised tactile characters shall be raised 1/32 inch minimum and shall be San Serif uppercase and uppercase characters and numerals accompanied by corresponding Grade 2 Braille. 2. Raised tactile characters shall have beveled edges. (2019 CBC)
D. Decals shall be a heavy gauge sticker.
E. Parking stall identification signs shall be reflective.
F. Refer to signage drawings for additional signage information. 1. Sign types shall be as stipulated in Specification Section 10 14 00 unless otherwise 10 14 00 - 2 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2023.00 Frontier ES Kitchen Remodel
shown on the Drawings. 2. Sign sizes shall be as stipulated in Specification Section 10 14 00 unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. 3. Sign text and numeral heights shall be as stipulated in Specification Section 10 14 00 unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. 4. Signage text shall be as shown on the Drawings. 5. Other signage symbols, pictograms, etc. shall be as shown on the Drawings.
G. No substitution of material or design shall be permitted.
2.02 SUBSTRATE
A. Interior plaques shall have eased or rounded edges and corners.
B. Exterior plaques shall have eased or rounded edges.
C. Pole or post mounted signs, projecting signs and aluminum or other metal plaques or signs shall have eased or rounded edges and a minimum 0.125 inch corner radius.
2.03 GENERAL
A. Non-glare (non-reflective) materials shall be used for all signs which identify, direct to, or give information about facilities and their use. 1. Exception: Parking, traffic signs, and exterior safety signs may use reflective materials. Identification signs for accessible parking spaces shall use reflective materials for graphics.
B. Characters shall have a minimum of 70 percent contrast with their backgrounds on all signs which identify, direct to, or give information about facilities and their use.
C. Characters on all signs which identify, direct to, or give information about facilities and their use shall comply with CBC 11B-703.2.4.
D. Type styles of characters on all signs which identify, direct to, or give information about facilities and their use shall not be italic, oblique, or decorative in style.
E. Non-tactile characters (letters, numbers and symbols) shall be Helvetica Regular 1. Characters shall be uppercase unless otherwise shown on Drawings. 2. Upper case letters shall be 1 inch high (unless otherwise shown on Drawings, maximum 1 1/4 inch high). 3. Height of lower case letters (where shown on Drawings) shall be proportional to height of upper case letter.
2.04 TACTILE CHARACTERS
A. Characters required to be tactile shall be San Serif. 1. Characters shall be raised 1/32 inch minimum and a maximum of 1/16 inch from the background. 2. Characters shall be uppercase. Signs shall have tactile characters where shown on Drawings. 3. Upper case tactile letters shall be 1 inch high (unless otherwise shown on Drawings, maximum 1-1/4 inch high). 4. Exception: Characters required by code to exceed 1 1/4 inches, such as elevator hoistway characters, shall not exceed 2 inches in height. Characters on elevator control panels shall not be less than 5/8 inches high.
B. A minimum of 1/8” space between the top surfaces of adjacent characters measuring between 10 14 00 - 3 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2023.00 Frontier ES Kitchen Remodel
the two closest points shall be provided.
C. Drawing Coordination: Sign size, text, mounting locations requirements and other requirements shall be as stipulated in this Specification Section unless other shown on Drawings.
2.05 BRAILLE
A. Braille text shall comply with CBC 11B-703.3.
B. Braille shall California Contracted Grade 2 Braille. All Braille shall be fabricated by a method which produces a rounded or domed dot shape.
C. Braille dot, cell spacing and dot height shall follow specifications as per CBC 11B-703.3 & 11B- 703.3.1.
D. There shall be no Braille indication of capital letters except for proper names, individual letters or acronyms, or beginnings of sentences.
E. Braille shall be centered directly below raised print characters.
F. Braille shall be located on the sign 3/8 inch below the corresponding tactile characters, flush left or centered to the characters depending on the sign layout. (CBC 11B-703.2.9 & 11B-703.3.2)
G. Spacing between Braille and raised characters shall be between 3/8” to 1/2”.
2.06 NON-TACTILE GRAPHICS AND TEXT
A. Non-tactile graphics/pictogram and text shall screen printed on the surface and complying with Paragraph 2.01.A.1.a of this Specification Section.
B. Non-tactile text shall be upper case and one inch high (unless otherwise shown on Drawings), and shall comply with CBC 11B-705 visual characters and be mounted per Table 11B-703.5.5.
2.07 MISCELLANEOUS
A. Furnish all items required for the proper installation of all signage including but not limited to tamper resistant fasteners, adhesives, sealants, metal sleeve spacers, etc.
2.08 SIGN TYPES: Note: At all references to Braille text in the sign types listed below, Braille text shall comply with 2019 edition, CBC 11B-703.3 as follows:
Braille text shall be Contracted Grade 2 Braille and shall be used wherever Braille symbols are specifically required. Dots shall be 1/10 inch on centers in each cell with 3/10 inch space between corresponding dots centers in adjacent cells. Dots height above background surface shall be raised a minimum of 0.025” to maximum of 0.037”.
A. Sign Type S-3: Staff/Unisex Restroom Signs (See Door Schedule for locations) 1. Staff/Unisex Restroom First Sign (door mounted): Provide for each staff restroom door (where scheduled) a 1/4" thick equilateral triangle acrylic plaque with 12” long sides, vertex pointing up, over a 1/4" thick, 12” diameter circle acrylic plaque. A 1/32" raised pictogram of the International Symbol of Accessibility shall be imprinted in the middle of the triangle. Mount sign centered in the width of the door and centered 58”-60” above the finished floor. Triangle to contrast with circle, circle to contrast with door. Color selection from manufacturer’s full range of standard colors. Refer to drawings for additional sign information. 2. Staff/Unisex Restroom Second Sign (wall mounted): Provide for each staff/unisex 10 14 00 - 4 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2023.00 Frontier ES Kitchen Remodel
restroom (where scheduled), Sign shall be a 6” wide by 10” high, 1/8" acrylic plaque. 1" high x 1/32" raised letter text shall read, UNISEX. Corresponding Grade 2 Contracted Braille shall occur below text. Mount sign on the wall on the latch side of the door, centered 5’-0” maximum to baseline of highest raised character above the finished floor. Letters shall be white on contrasting background - background shall contrast against mounting surface. Color selection from manufacturers full range of standard colors. Refer to drawings for additional sign information
B. Sign Type S-5: Room Identification Signs and blank sign panel where occurs (See Drawings for locations). 1. Signs shall be plaque type signs with subsurface screen printed numbers and/or letters with corresponding Grade 2 Contracted Braille below text. 2. Characters shall be subsurface screen printed. 3. Signs shall be 2" high x 9" wide (or wider as required for text length) with 3/4" radius corners. 4. Signage and text shall be 1/16" subsurface screen printed matte finish acrylic with 1/4" thick acrylic base plate backing and 1/16" raised acrylic graphics. All signs have text which shall be number, letter or number-letter combinations, centered and normally spaced with approximately ten (10) characters per sign. 5. Text schedule shall be provided by the Owner during submittal review process. 6. Character Style: a. Number style shall be 1” high Optima Semi-Bold. b. Letter style shall be 1” high Optima Semi-Bold, upper case. 7. Mounting: a. Screw countersunk mounted on wall at strike side of door with sign at 5’-0” maximum to baseline of highest raised character above finish floor. Where side wall mounting is not possible, mount sign on door with sign at 5’-0” maximum to baseline of highest raised character above finish floor. Confirm with Architect prior to installation at location other than strike side of door. b. Provide security head type fasteners, typical. c. Where sign type S5 occurs at location of glass side light adjacent to door, install sign to glass with continuous double-sided adhesive tape on all 4 sides of sign. Provide blank sign panel (no text) of same color as sign panel for installation on inside face of glass to conceal view of sign panel through glass. Align blank panel with sign panel and fasten with continuous double-sided adhesive tape on all 4 sides of blank panel. 8. Color selections of the characters and subsurface background shall be made by Architect from the full range of the manufacturer's standard colors. 9. Provide and install up to ten (10) additional signs of up to 15 characters each. Text and locations shall be provided by the Architect during the submittal process.
C. Parking Lot Signs: (see Drawings for locations, post and footing design and locations, typical) 1. Accessible Parking Stall Sign: (See Drawings for locations) a. Fabricate with a single post and metal panel for each accessible parking stall as indicated on the Drawings. The sign shall display the International Symbol of Accessibility (reflectorized); text shall occur below the symbol and read “MINIMUM FINE $250”. The bottom of the regular handicap accessible parking stall sign shall be mounted 80" above the finish grade. Color shall be white text on blue field. See Drawings for information. 2. Van Accessible Parking Stall Sign: (See Drawings for locations) a. Fabricate with a single post and metal panel for each van accessible parking stall indicated on the Drawings. The sign shall display the International Symbol of Accessibility (reflectorized); text shall occur below the symbol and read “VAN ACCESSIBLE”. The bottom of the van handicap accessible parking stall sign shall be mounted 80" above the finish grade. Color shall be white text on blue field. See Drawings for additional information.
10 14 00 - 5 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2023.00 Frontier ES Kitchen Remodel
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Signs shall be installed with edges horizontal and vertical and face plumb.
B. Install signs with tamper resistant screws and anchors at all wall conditions except glass.
C. Screw length shall be sufficient for minimum 1 inch embedment.
D. Signs mounted onto glass: 1. Sign shall be attached to glass with clear silicone adhesive designed to secure sign material to glass (double stick tape with cushion is not permitted). Contractor shall apply sealant around perimeter of sign. 2. Where interior and exterior signs are to be mounted, signs shall be the same size (the larger sign size shall dictate the size of the smaller sign) and located “back-to-back”. 3. Where only an interior or exterior sign is mounted, a “blank sign” (the same size as the sign) shall be installed and located “back-to-back”.
E. The Contractor is solely responsible for the identification of the material onto which signs are to be mounted. The Contractor shall furnish and install all materials necessary for the proper installation of each sign.
F. Contractor shall notify the Architect of any conflicts between the Drawings, Specifications and the requirements of the CBC and ADA prior to the submission of the Bid Form. No increase of the Contract Sum and no extension of the Contract Time shall be granted for the resolution of CBC, ADA and Contract Documents conflicts.
G. Permanent identification signs for rooms or spaces shall be installed on the wall adjacent to the latch side of the door.
3.02 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Clean and Touch-up: Remove all packing and protection blemishes and thoroughly clean and polish all finish surfaces. Restore any marred or abraded surfaces to their original condition by touching up in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Touch-up shall not be obvious.
B. Defective Work: Remove and replace all defective work which cannot be properly repaired, cleaned or touched-up with no additional cost to the owner.
C. Protect installed work during the construction period to prevent abuse and damage.
3.03 CLEAN-UP
A. Upon completion of the work of this section, remove all surplus materials, rubbish and debris from the premises.
[END OF SECTION 10 14 00]
10 14 00 - 6 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
SECTION 10 28 00
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Toilet accessories.
B. Attachment hardware.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 00 72 00: General Conditions.
B. Section 06 10 00: Rough Carpentry In wall framing and backing for support of accessories.
C. Section 09 21 16: Gypsum Board Systems.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A167-99(2009) - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip.
B. ASTM A269-08 - Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service.
1.04 KEYING
A. All accessories shall be keyed alike, Bobrick Cat-74 key or equal.
1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for installing work in conformance with Title 24 Accessibility Requirements.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s product data and installation instructions for each toilet accessory.
B. Samples: Full-size sample of each toilet accessory item. Acceptable samples will be returned and may be used in the work.
C. Setting Drawings: Furnish setting drawings, templates, instructions, and direction for installation of anchorage devices and cut-out requirements in other work.
1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate the work of this Section with the placement of internal wall reinforcement and reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments.
1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit unless otherwise approved by the Architect.
10 28 00 - 1 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Coordinate accessory locations, installation, and sequencing with other work to avoid interference and to assure proper installation, operation, adjustment, cleaning, and servicing.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Bobrick. As Represented by R.E.EDWARDS & ASSOC.
B. Gamco.
C. American Specialties Inc.
D. Or approved equal.
E. Substitutions under: provisions 00700.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A167-99, latest edition, Type 304.
B. Tubing: ASTM A269-08, stainless steel.
C. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized, tamperproof.
D. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for component and substrate.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. The following model numbers are Bobrick numbers and establish a quality level:
1. Toilet Paper Dispenser:
a. Accessible Stall with stud wall construction: B-3888; 2-roll, semi-recessed, tumbler lock. Satin-finish stainless steel with dispensing mechanism for 2 rolls. Door must have flat face with protruding tumbler lock. Unit must have theft- resistant heavy duty spindles. Unit extends 2-3/4 inches from wall. No exposed edges or sharp corners are acceptable. Provide 10 additional keys.
2. Toilet Seat Cover Dispenser: B-221; surface mounted Satin Stainless Steel with seamless beveled flanges. capacity for 250 single or half-fold covers (staff toilet rooms only) No exposed edges or sharp corners are acceptable.
3. Electric Hand Dryer: Excel Dryer, Inc. Model No. XL-SB-H, ADA Recess Kit 40502, tumbler lock, accepts standard core rolls ranging from 7” to 8” wide and up to 8” in diameter. Provide 10 additional keys.
4. Automatic Liquid Soap Dispenser: B-2012, surface mounted, 30 oz. capacity
5. Mirror: B-293, tilt mirror, size -16”x30”. One piece, roll-formed type 304 stainless steel angle with satin finish. Corners heliarc welded ground and polished smooth. Beveled frame edge mirror. Warranted against silver spoilage for 15 years.
10 28 00 - 2 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
6. Grab Bars: B-6806 Series; snap flange covers, configurations and sizes as indicated on drawings.
a. At accessible toilet stalls: 36” long on back wall, 42” long on side wall or as required by drawings. b. Mount to solid wood blocking.
B. Assemblies:
1. Weld and grind smooth joints of fabricated components.
2. Form exposed surfaces from single sheet of stock, free of joints.
3. Form surfaces flat without distortion. Maintain flat surfaces without scratches or dents.
4. Shop assemble components and package complete with anchors and fittings.
5. Provide steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation.
6. Hot dip galvanize exposed and painted ferrous metal and fastening devices.
2.04 FACTORY FINISHING
A. Satin Finish, Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin luster finish.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and dimensions are as instructed by the manufacturer.
B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site at appropriate time for building-in.
B. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required.
C. Verify exact location of accessories for installation.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Prior to mounting any accessories, Contractor shall provide dimensionally correct cardboard cutouts of all accessories. Contractor shall then walk each toilet room area with District to place all accessories in acceptable locations. This shall take place PRIOR to installing new gypsum board as backing for accessories needs to be installed.
B. Install fixtures, accessories and items in full compliance with CBC (Latest Edition) requirements and per manufacturer’s recommendations.
C. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. Use vandal resistant fasteners where exposed.
3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING 10 28 00 - 3 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
A. Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms function smoothly. Replace damaged or defective items.
B. Clean and polish exposed surfaces of accessories in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations after removing temporary labels and protective coatings.
[END OF SECTION 10 28 00]
10 28 00 - 4 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
SECTION 10 44 16
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Furnish and install fire extinguishers and wall brackets as indicated on the Drawings and specified here.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 00 72 00: General Conditions
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single Source Responsibility: Provide specified items from one manufacturer.
B. Catalog Standards: 1. Manufacturer's catalog numbers may be included on Drawings for convenience in identifying specified items. Unless modified by notation on Drawings or specified, catalog description for indicated number constitutes requirements for the item specified. 2. The use of catalog numbers and specific requirements set forth in Drawings and Specifications does not preclude use of any other manufacturer's products or procedures which may be equivalent. Such numbers and requirements establish standards of design and quality for material, construction, and workmanship.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Section 00 72 00 for submitting the following items: 1. Product Data. 2. Installation Instructions and Drawings.
1.05 STANDARDS
A. California Building Code (CBC), 2019 edition, for fire extinguisher cabinets and location.
B. California Building Code (CBC), 2019 edition, Chapter 11B.
C. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), latest edition.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver undamaged products to site in manufacturer's sealed containers or wrappings with legends intact. Store on site secure from weather, soil and physical damage.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. (Specified)
B. JL Industries.
C. Amerex 10 44 16 - 1 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
D. Badger
E. Or approved equal.
2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS & MOUNTING BRACKET
A. All fire extinguisher units shall be portable and rechargable type with stainless steel discharge lever and fixed carry handle. Valve body shall be chrome-plated brass or aluminim. All units shall have a short hose/horn, visual pressure gauge and red color. Size and model as follows: 1. General Use: 5 lb. dry chemical UL Rating 2A-10B:C; Larsen MP10, JL Industries Cosmic 10E, Amerex B424, or approved equal. 2. Kitchen Fire Extinguisher, 2.5 gal Class K wet chemical UL 2A:K. Amerex B262, or approved equal. 3. Mounting bracket shall be wall mount type constructed of heavy gauge steel with a white or red baked enamel finish. Wall bracket shall be designed to provide support at top and bottom of extinguishers. Bracket shall be equal to Model 846 wall brackets by Larsen's Manufacturing Company, Model MB846 by JL Industries, or approved equal.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Prior to installation of the work of this Section, carefully inspect and verify that the installed work of all other trades is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence.
B. Verify that specified items may be installed in accordance with the approved design.
C. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify Architect. Do not proceed in discrepant areas until discrepancies have been fully resolved.
D. Wall brackets shall be screw mounted into existing wood stud, solid wood backing, existing metal stud or steel backing, or masonry.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install so that top of cabinet or wall bracket is 60 inches above finished floor line so that pull handles or break glass bars are 48" above finish floor with latch force not to exceed 5 lbs.
3.03 PROTECTION
A. Protect work and materials of this Section prior to and during installation, and protect the installed work and materials of other trades.
B. In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the satisfaction of the Architect and at no cost to the Owner.
[END OF SECTION 10 44 16]
10 44 16 - 2 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
SECTION 22 05 10
PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. References.
B. Description of Work.
C. Drawings and Specifications.
D. Industry Standards and Codes.
E. Site Examination.
F. Permits, Fees and Utility Connections.
G. Coordination of Work.
H. Progress of Work.
I. Submittals
J. Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
K. Project Record Documents.
L. Warranty.
M. Quality and Care
N. Access Doors.
O. Starting Equipment and Systems.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including the General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division 1 General Requirements apply to this section.
B. The Contract Agreement, Bidding Documents and all Addenda issued prior to Contract Agreement execution form a part of these specifications and apply to all Contracts or Subcontracts relating to the mechanical systems.
C. The requirements of this Section apply to all Work of Division 23.
D. Section 013300 - Submittals.
E. Section 017000 - Closeout Procedures.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI - American National Standards Institute.
22 05 10 - 1 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
B. ASTM - American Society for Testing Materials.
C. CEC - California Electric Code.
D. NEC - National Electric Code.
E. NEMA - National Electric Manufacturers' Association.
F. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association.
G. OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Act.
H. UL - Underwriters' Laboratories.
I. See detailed References that are listed in individual sections.
1.04 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The work included in this division of the specifications consists of furnishing labor, tools, equipment, supplies and materials, unless otherwise specified, and in performing operations necessary for the installation of the complete Plumbing System as required by these specifications or shown on the Drawings, subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract Agreement.
B. The work shall also include the completion of details of plumbing work not mentioned or shown which are necessary for the successful operation of mechanical systems described on the drawings or required by these specifications. Furnish and install any incidental work not shown or specified which is required to provide a complete and operational system.
1.05 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. Drawings are schematic and diagrammatic. Drawings indicate the general arrangement of equipment, piping, and other plumbing work. Use judgement and care to install mechanical work to fit the job conditions within the building construction and finishes, and to function properly.
B. The Contractor shall investigate the building conditions affecting the Work and shall arrange his work accordingly providing offsets, fittings, valves and accessories to fit the actual job conditions. The Contractor shall be responsible to field measure and confirm new and existing mechanical systems locations with respect to other architectural, structural, and electrical work, existing and new. Do not scale distances off of the mechanical drawings. Use actual building dimensions.
C. The drawings and specifications are complimentary each to the other. What is required by one shall be as binding as if called for by both.
D. Examine all drawings and specifications prior to bidding the Work. Report any discrepancies to the Engineer.
1.06 INDUSTRY STANDARDS AND CODES
A. The Mechanical Contractor shall comply with the latest provisions of all codes, regulations, laws and ordinances applicable to the work involved. This does not relieve the Contractor from furnishing and installing work shown or specified which may exceed the requirements of such codes, regulations laws and ordinances.
22 05 10 - 2 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
B. All materials, products, devices, fixtures forms or types of construction included in this project shall meet or exceed the published requirements of the publications listed below. These publications form a part of this specification.
1. California Building Code, 2019.
2. California Mechanical Code, 2019.
3. California Plumbing Code, 2019.
4. California Electrical Code, 2019.
5. National Fire Protection Association.
6. California Fire Code, 2019.
7. California State Fire Marshal.
8. Occupational Safety and Health Administration, including CAL-OSHA.
9. California Energy Code, 2019.
10. California Green Building Standards Code, 2019.
11. State of California Code of Regulations, Title 24.
12. Other applicable state laws.
C. Nothing in the Drawings or Specifications shall be construed to permit work that does not conform these codes. When Contract Documents differ from governing codes, furnish and install to the higher standard required at no extra charge. The Contract Documents are not intended to repeat the code requirements except where necessary for clarity.
D. No material or product installed as a part of the Work shall contain asbestos in any form.
E. Domestic water piping and components shall be provided and installed in accordance with California AB 1953 Legislation (effective January 1, 2010), which limits the allowable lead content in certain domestic water system components.
1.07 SITE EXAMINATION
A. Contractor shall examine the site, verify dimensions and locations with Drawings, check utility connection locations, and familiarize himself with the existing conditions and limitations. No extras will be allowed because of the Contractor's misunderstanding of the amount of work involved or his lack of knowledge of any site condition which may affect his work. Any apparent variance of the drawings or specifications from the existing conditions at the site shall be called to the attention of the Engineer immediately.
1.08 PERMITS, FEES AND UTILITY SERVICES
A. Contractor shall pay for and obtain all permits and service required in the installation of this work.
B. Contractor shall arrange for all required inspections and will secure approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.
22 05 10 - 3 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
1.09 COORDINATION OF WORK
A. It is recognized that the contract documents are diagrammatic in showing certain physical relationships which must be established within the mechanical work, and in its interface with other work and that such establishment is the exclusive responsibility of the contractor.
B. The Contractor shall give careful consideration to the work of the General, Electrical and other contractors on the job and shall organize his work so that it will not interfere with the work of other trades. He shall consult the drawings and specifications for work of other trades for correcting information, and the pertinent drawings for details and dimensions.
C. Arrange plumbing work in a neat, well-organized manner with the piping and similar services running parallel and/or perpendicular to primary lines of the building construction. Locate operating and control equipment properly to provide easy access, and arrange entire mechanical work with adequate access for operation and maintenance.
D. Verify the location of all equipment, plumbing devices, etc. and if interference develops, the Owner/Engineer's decision will be final and no additional compensation will be allowed for the moving of misplaced air devices or equipment.
1.10 PROGRESS OF WORK
A. This Contractor shall organize his work so that the progress of the mechanical work will conform to the progress of the other trades, and shall complete the entire installation as soon as the conditions of the building will permit. Any cost resulting from defective or ill timed work performed under this section shall be borne by this Contractor.
1.11 STRUCTURAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
A. Plumbing systems and equipment shall be anchored and seismically braced in accordance with all applicable codes and industry standards.
B. Plumbing systems and equipment shall include, but are not limited to, all piping, water heaters, expansion tanks, air compressors, vacuum pumps, electrical and control panels, conduits and other components.
C. Supports, anchorage and restraints, including attachments to building structure, for all piping for standard installation details that comply with the latest edition of the latest edition of the Mason Industries "Seismic Restraint Guidelines", the SMACNA "Guidelines for Seismic Restraints of Mechanical Systems and Plumbing Piping Systems", or equal, shall be used wherever possible. The Contractor shall provide all supporting documentation required for the Engineer and the reviewing authorities. If compliance with one of these standards is demonstrated, separate structural calculations are not required.
D. For all non-standard installations not detailed in one of the approved systems, the Contractor shall provide details of supports, anchorages and restraints, including attachments to building structure, with supporting calculations all stamped and signed by a licensed professional structural engineer registered in the state in which the Work is performed.
1.12 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013300 - Submittals, for additional submittal procedures.
22 05 10 - 4 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
B. Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this Project.
C. Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project.
D. Organize submittals in sequence according to Specification Section. Submit in bound document with tabs identifying each Specification Section. Provide a Table of Contents identifying the Specifications Sections being submitted and the contents within each tabbed section. Prepare Submittals in multiple volumes if required. Provide a complete Submittal package at one time. Do not submit individual Sections piecemeal.
E. Indicate utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances.
F. Furnish, upon request, installation instructions for all equipment and materials to Inspector of Record prior to installation.
G. Maintain a copy of the fire penetration installation instructions on site for use by the Inspector of Record.
1.13 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
A. Instructions to Bidders specify time restrictions for submitting requests for substitutions during the bidding period. Comply with requirements specified in this section.
B. LP Consulting Engineers, Inc. will consider requests for substitutions only within 7 days after date of Agreement.
C. Substitutions may be considered when a product becomes unavailable through no fault of the Contractor.
D. Failure by the Contractor to order materials or equipment in a timely manner will not constitute justification for a substitution.
E. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents.
F. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter:
1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product.
2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product.
3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work which may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to TRUSD.
4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension which may subsequently become apparent.
5. Will reimburse TRUSD and LP Consulting Engineers, Inc. for review or redesign services associated with reapproval by authorities including obtaining reapproval by authorities.
22 05 10 - 5 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
G. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision to the Contract Documents.
H. If excessive review, as judged by the Engineer, is required caused by complicated, numerous or repetitive requests, Contractor shall reimburse Engineer and its Consultants for such review at their standard billing rates.
I. Substitution Submittal Procedure:
1. Submit three copies of request for substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one proposed substitution.
2. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed product equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer.
3. The LP Consulting Engineers, Inc. will notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject request.
4. Present each substitution individually. If a proposed substitute in not found to be acceptable, then the specified item shall be supplied.
1.14 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. See Section 01700 Closeout Submittals for Operation and Maintenance Manual requirements.
B. Provide operating and maintenance instructions, diagrams and parts lists for all components of all mechanical systems and each piece of equipment furnished under these specifications.
C. Operating and maintenance instructions shall be furnished for the following equipment and systems:
1. Plumbing Systems.
2. Medical Gas Equipment, Piping and Alarm Systems.
3. Piping Systems.
4. Temperature Controls Systems.
5. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports.
D. Provide manufacturer's model number, design data, capacities, etc. for each piece of plumbing equipment furnished as a part of the Work.
E. The operating instructions shall include procedures for starting, stopping and emergency manual operation for all equipment and systems.
F. Provide maintenance instructions of each item of individual equipment including applicable maintenance data as recommended by the manufacturer, including frequency of lubrication, lubricants, inspections required, adjustment procedures, belt and pulley sizes, etc.
22 05 10 - 6 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
G. Provide manufacturer's parts bulletins with part numbers for each item of equipment included in the Work. Parts bulletins shall be specific to the equipment provided. Extraneous information that does not apply to the equipment provided shall be eliminated from the literature.
H. Include copies of test reports (startup, check, etc.) and inspections performed for each piece of equipment provided in the Work.
I. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in TRUSD's name and registered with manufacturer.
J. Provide supplier and manufacturer contacts, telephone numbers and addresses in the front portion of the operation and maintenance manual.
1.15 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. See Section 017700 - Closeout Procedures.
B. Provide red-lined drawings accurately showing location of equipment and devices and size and routing of piping. Include notes explaining installed condition for complete understanding.
1.16 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.
B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.
C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from LP Consulting Engineers, Inc. before proceeding.
D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship.
E. Have Work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality.
F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the manufacturer.
G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement.
1.17 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner.
1.18 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01700 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Correct defective Work within a one year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
22 05 10 - 7 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 QUALITY AND CARE
A. All materials shall be new and in perfect condition when installed unless specifically indicated otherwise. Materials shall be tested within the Continental United States by an independent, nationally recognized testing agency and shall be listed in accordance with testing agency requirements. When not otherwise specified, all material shall conform to applicable National Standards (ANSI).
B. All capacities, sizes and efficiency ratings shown on the drawing are minimum. Gas meter and gas pressure reducing valve capacities are maximum allowable.
C. Each category of material or equipment shall be of the same brand or manufacturer throughout the Work wherever possible.
D. The quality of materials and equipment to be provided is defined by the brand names, manufacturers, model and catalog numbers listed on the Drawings and in the Specifications. Contractor shall provide each item listed, of the quality specified, or equal.
E. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products in conformance with manufacturer's recommended practices as outlined in applicable Installation and Maintenance Manuals.
F. Inspect and report concealed damage to carrier within their required time period.
G. Store materials in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory protection and/or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.
H. Equipment which has been damaged, exposed to weather or is, in the opinion of the Engineer or Owner, otherwise unsuitable because of improper fabrication, storage or installation shall be removed and replaced by this Contractor at his expense.
2.02 ACCESS DOORS
A. Coordinate access door requirements with Section 08305. The more stringent requirements shall govern.
B. Provide access doors where access through floors, walls or ceilings is required to access plumbing equipment and plumbing devices or other systems requiring access for maintenance, test or observation.
1. Access doors requiring hand access or access for observation only shall be 14"x14" minimum usable opening.
2. Access doors where entrance of a service person may be required shall be 24"x30" minimum usable opening.
C. Established standard: Milcor of types listed below. Other acceptable manufacturers: Cesco, J.L. Industries, Karp, Larsen's, or equal. Comply with the following:
1. Form doors and frames of welded, ground smooth steel construction, 14 gauge for doors, 16 gauge for frames. Provide prime coat finish except for stainless steel type.
22 05 10 - 8 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
2. Concealed hinges to allow 175 degree opening.
3. Locks: flush, screw driver operated cam lock(s).
4. Provide anchoring devices suitable for the construction into which the doors are framed.
D. Application (as applicable):
1. In gypsum drywall walls and ceilings: Type DW.
2. In ceramic tile walls: Type MS (stainless steel).
3. In fire rated walls: Type Fire Rated (rating as required for wall or ceiling), self closing, 250 F in 30 min. temperature rating.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Access Doors
1. Coordinate the exact location of access doors to provide proper access to the item concealed. Obtain written approval for access door locations from Architect.
2. Coordinate installation of access doors with the trades performing the construction assemblies into which the access doors are placed.
3. Install all access doors neatly and securely, to open and close completely, and to operate freely and without binding. Install rated doors in accordance with their listing requirements.
4. Test operate all doors and make all adjustments required for satisfactory operation. Replace all damaged materials.
5. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with the requirements within this section.
B. Test all piping with no leak or loss in pressure in accordance with the requirements within this section.
3.03 GENERAL TESTING REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING SYSTEMS
A. Contractor shall assign a responsible person to be an independent representative to witness testing and to sign as witness of times, pressure and losses of testing media for all hydronic, duct and gas piping testing.
1. Test all piping as noted below with no leak or loss of pressure. Repair or replace defective piping until tests are accomplished successfully.
2. Submit to the Engineer for review a log of all tests made which shall include time, temperature, pressure, water makeup and other applicable readings, necessary
22 05 10 - 9 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
to indicate the systems have been operated and tested in the manner outlined in the construction documents.
3. After producing the specified test pressure, disconnect the pressurizing source; do not introduce further pressure for the duration of the test period, repair leaky piping and retest. Repeat the procedure until the entire system is proven tight.
B. Test the following systems with the medium listed to the pressure indicated for the time period listed:
1. Sanitary Sewer, Drain, Vent Piping: Pressure=10 Ft.Hd. / Medium= Water / Duration=4 Hours.
2. Domestic Water Piping: Pressure=125 Psig / Medium= Water / Duration=4 Hours.
3. Condensate drains: Pressure=10 Ft.Hd. / Medium=Water / Duration=4 Hours.
4. Gas Piping: Pressure=60 Psig / Medium=Air and soap / Duration=8 Hours.
3.04 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration which affects:
1. Structural integrity of any element of Project.
2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element.
3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element.
4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements.
5. Work of TRUSD or separate Contractor.
B. Execute cutting and patching to complete the work, to uncover work to install improperly sequenced work, to remove and replace defective or non-conforming work, to remove samples of installed work for testing when requested, to provide openings in the work for penetration of mechanical and electrical work, to execute patching to complement adjacent work, and to fit Products together to integrate with other work.
C. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other work, and which will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize damage and restore to original condition.
D. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval.
E. Restore work with new Products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.
F. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.
G. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire rated material in accordance with Code requirements , to full thickness of the penetrated element.
22 05 10 - 10 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
H. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finish. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit.
3.05 PRIMING AND PAINTING
A. Apply primer to all exposed ferrous metals that are not factory primed, factory finished, galvanized, stainless steel or anodized. Exposed black steel piping shall be primed and finish painted, including gas piping outdoors.
1. Primer shall be as recommended by the paint manufacturer for each specific application.
2. Acceptable Products include: Fuller O'Brien Blox-Rust Metal All Purpose Primer, equivalent Rust-Oleum product, or equal. See Section 09900 for other acceptable products.
B. Apply two coats of primer to metal surfaces of items to be insulated or jacketed, except piping, or factory primed or finished.
C. Preparation:
1. Do not start work until surfaces to be finished are in proper condition to produce finished surfaces of uniform, satisfactory appearance.
2. Stains and Marks: Remove completely, if possible, using materials and methods recommended by coating manufacturer; seal stains and marks which cannot be completely removed using Devoe KILSTAIN primers, shellac, or other coating acceptable to paint manufacturer any marks or defects that might bleed through paint finishes.
3. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of trisodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow substrate to thoroughly dry.
4. Galvanized Surfaces:
a. Remove surface contamination and oils by solvent cleaning in accordance with SSPC-SP 1 and allow to dry.
b. Apply Devoe MIRROLAC Galvanized Metal Primer in accordance with manufacturer instructions.
5. Uncoated Steel And Iron Surfaces:
a. Remove grease, rust, scale, and dust from steel and iron surfaces using solvent in accordance with SSPC-SP 1.
b. Where heavy coatings of scale or contaminants are evident, hand tool clean in accordance with SSPC-SP 2 or use other approved SSPC SP method as needed.
6. Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Remove loose primer and dust. Sand and feather edges to smooth surface. Clean areas with solvent and spot prime bare metal surfaces with appropriate Devoe MIRROLAC metal primer or primer recommended by manufacturer.
22 05 10 - 11 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
D. Application:
1. Apply each coat to uniform coating thickness in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, not exceeding manufacturer's specified maximum spread rate for indicated surface; thins, brush marks, roller marks, orange-peel, or other application imperfections are not permitted.
2. Allow manufacturer's specified drying time, and ensure correct coating adhesion, for each coat before applying next coat.
3. Remove dust and other foreign materials from substrate immediately prior to applying each coat.
E. Finish Painting: See Section 09900.
END OF SECTION
22 05 10 - 12 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
SECTION 22 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Nameplates.
B. Tags.
C. Pipe markers.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Refer to the General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division 1 General Requirements. The requirements of these sections apply to this section.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; 2007.
B. ASTM D709 - Standard Specification for Laminated Thermosetting Materials; 2013.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013300 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.
B. List: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical identification.
C. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 IDENTIFICATION APPLICATIONS
A. Heat Transfer Equipment: Nameplates.
B. Major Control Components: Nameplates.
C. Piping: Pipe markers.
D. Pumps: Nameplates.
E. Small-sized Equipment: Tags.
F. Tanks: Nameplates.
G. Valves: Tags and ceiling tacks where located above lay-in ceiling.
H. Water Treatment Devices: Nameplates.
22 05 53 - 1 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
2.02 MANUFACTURERS
A. Brady Corp.
B. Seton Identification Products.
2.03 NAMEPLATES
A. Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved letters.
1. Letter Color: White.
2. Letter Height: 1/4 inch.
3. Background Color: Black.
4. Plastic: Comply with ASTM D709.
2.04 TAGS
A. Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter.
B. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter with smooth edges.
2.05 PIPE MARKERS
A. Comply with ASME A13.1.
B. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings. Secure to pipe using two (2) bands of adhesive tape with flow arrows supplied by the manufacturer. Install securing bands completly around pipe and overlapped.
C. Underground Plastic Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape, minimum 6 inches wide by 4 mil thick, manufactured for direct burial service.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.
B. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain.
C. Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D. Identify domestic hot water heating equipment, including pumps, etc. with plastic nameplates.
22 05 53 - 2 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
E. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags.
F. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet (6 m) on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and Tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.
G. Identify all medium pressure gas piping (over 11" W.C. to 5 PSI pressure) with pressure contained within piping system (for example: "MPG 5 PSI")
END OF SECTION
22 05 53 - 3 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
SECTION 22 07 19
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Piping insulation.
B. Jackets and accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Refer to the General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division 1 General Requirements. The requirements of these sections apply to this section.
B. Section 07270 - Firestopping.
C. Section 22 10 05 - Plumbing Piping: Placement of hangers and hanger inserts.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2014.
B. ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus; 2013.
C. ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2010.
D. ASTM C533 - Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation; 2013.
E. ASTM C534/C534M - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form; 2014.
F. ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation; 2015.
G. ASTM C585 - Standard Practice for Inner and Outer Diameters of Thermal Insulation for Nominal Sizes of Pipe and Tubing; 2010.
H. ASTM C795 - Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel; 2008 (Reapproved 2013).
I. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2015a.
J. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2014.
K. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
22 07 19 - 1 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013300 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures that ensure acceptable workmanship and installation standards will be achieved.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with not less than three years of documented experience.
B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this section with minimum three years of experience.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product density, and thickness.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient conditions required by manufacturers of each product.
B. Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum of 24 hours.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723.
2.02 GLASS FIBER
A. Manufacturers:
1. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.
2. Knauf Insulation: www.knaufusa.com.
B. Insulation: ASTM C547 and ASTM C795; rigid molded, noncombustible.
1. 'K' value: ASTM C 177, 0.22 to 0.28 at 100 degrees F.
2. Maximum Service Temperature: 850 degrees F.
3. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 0.2 percent by volume.
C. Vapor Barrier Jacket: White Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film; moisture vapor transmission when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M of 0.02 perm-inches.
D. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive: Compatible with insulation.
22 07 19 - 2 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
2.03 JACKETS
A. PVC Plastic.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Proto Corporation, Proto-Wrap 30 LoSmoke.
b. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com.
2. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white color.
a. Minimum Service Temperature: 0 degrees F.
b. Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F.
c. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.002 perm inch, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M.
d. Thickness: 10 mil.
e. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive.
3. Covering Adhesive Mastic: Compatible with insulation.
B. Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M) formed aluminum sheet.
1. Thickness: 0.016 inch sheet.
2. Finish: Embossed.
3. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps.
4. Fittings: 0.016 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner.
5. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.015 inch thick aluminum.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials.
B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
C. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature:
1. Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory-applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic.
22 07 19 - 3 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe. Finish with molded PVC fitting covers.
D. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature:
1. Provide standard jackets, with vapor barrier, factory-applied. Secure with self- sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples.
2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe. Finish with molded PVC fitting covers.
E. Inserts and Shields:
1. Application: Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter or larger.
2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts.
3. Insert Location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket.
4. Insert Configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated.
5. Insert Material: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy density insulating material suitable for the planned temperature range.
F. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. At fire separations, use a UL rated fire penetration assembly, 3M or equal.
G. Pipe in Supply Air Plenum or Finished Spaces: Finish with PVC jacket and fitting covers.
H. Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces: Finish with PVC jacket and fitting covers.
I. Exterior Applications (exposed to the weather): Provide vapor barrier jacket. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass mesh reinforced vapor barrier cement. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizontal piping.
3.03 SCHEDULES
A. Plumbing Systems:
1. Domestic Hot and Tempered Water Supply:
a. Glass Fiber Insulation:
1) Pipe Size Range: 2 inch and larger.
(a) Thickness: 2 inch.
2) Pipe Size Range: 1 inch and larger.
(a) Thickness: 1.5 inch.
3) Pipe Size Range: 3/4 inch and smaller.
22 07 19 - 4 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
(a) Thickness: 1 inch.
2. Domestic Cold Water Located in Unheated Areas:
a. Glass Fiber Insulation:
1) Pipe size range: Up to and including 2": Insulation thickness 1".
2) Pipe size range: Over 2": Insulation thickness 1.5".
END OF SECTION
22 07 19 - 5 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
SECTION 22 10 05
PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Pipe, pipe fittings, specialties, and connections for piping systems.
1. Sanitary sewer.
2. Drains.
3. Domestic water.
4. Flanges, unions, and couplings.
5. Pipe hangers and supports.
6. Ball valves.
7. Butterfly valves.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Refer to the General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division 1 General Requirements. The requirements of these sections apply to this section.
B. Section 078446 - Fire-Resistive Joint Systems.
C. Section 22 05 53 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.
D. Section 22 07 19 - Plumbing Piping Insulation.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: Classes 150 and 300; 2011.
B. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; 2012.
C. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings; 2013.
D. ASME B16.23 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV; 2011.
E. ASME B16.29 - Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV; 2012.
F. ASME B31.1 - Power Piping; 2014.
G. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; 2014.
H. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc- Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2012.
I. ASTM A74 - Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings; 2015.
22 10 05 - 1 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
J. ASTM A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service; 2015.
K. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2008 (Reapproved 2014).
L. ASTM B42 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes; 2015a.
M. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2014.
N. ASTM B306 - Standard Specification for Copper Drainage Tube (DWV); 2013.
O. ASTM B813 - Standard Specification for Liquid and Paste Fluxes for Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube; 2010.
P. ASTM B828 - Standard Practice for Making Capillary Joints by Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube and Fittings; 2002 (Reapproved 2010).
Q. ASTM F708 - Standard Practice for Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers; 1992 (Reapproved 2008).
R. AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains; 2005.
S. CISPI 301 - Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste and Vent Piping Applications; 2009.
T. CISPI 310 - Specification for Coupling for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications; 2011.
U. MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation; 2009.
V. MSS SP-67 - Butterfly Valves; 2011.
W. MSS SP-69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2003.
X. MSS SP-89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2003.
Y. MSS SP-110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends; 2010.
Z. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2014 (Errata 2015).
AA. NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content; 2011.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. Provide manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings.
C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves.
22 10 05 - 2 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with State of California, standards.
B. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.
C. Welding Materials and Procedures: Comply with ASME BPVC-IX and applicable state labor regulations.
1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Perform Work in accordance with State of California plumbing code.
B. Domestic water piping and components shall be provided and installed in accordance with California AB 1953 Legislation (effective January 1, 2010), which limits the allowable lead content in certain domestic water system components.
C. Conform to applicable code for installation of backflow prevention devices.
D. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of installation of backflow prevention devices.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.
B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.
C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation.
D. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Potable Water Supply Systems: Provide piping, pipe fittings, and solder and flux (if used), that comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372 for maximum lead content; label pipe and fittings.
2.02 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED
A. Cast Iron Pipe (acceptable alternate): CISPI 301, hubless.
1. Fittings: Cast iron.
2. Joints: CISPI 310, neoprene gasket and stainless steel clamp and shield assemblies. Heavy duty, Husky SD4000, .015 inch thick 304 stainless steel shield, 4-band coupling.
2.03 DRAIN PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight.
1. Fittings: Cast iron.
22 10 05 - 3 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
2. Joints: CISPI 310, neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and-shield assemblies.
B. Copper Tube: ASTM B 306, DWV or ASTM B 88 (ASTM B 88M), Type M (C), Drawn (H).
1. Application: Condensate drains (non-acidic).
2. Fittings: ASME B16.29, wrought copper, or ASME B16.23, sovent.
3. Joints: ASTM B32, alloy Sn50 solder.
C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40, galvanized, using one of the following joint types:
1. Application: Condensate drains outside building (non-acidic).
2. Threaded Joints: ASME B16.3 malleable iron fittings.
2.04 WATER PIPING, BURIED
A. Copper Pipe: ASTM B 42, hard drawn, Type K.
1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22 wrought copper and bronze.
2.05 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A. Copper Tube: ASTM B88 (ASTM B88M), Type L (B), Drawn (H).
1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy.
2. Joints: For sizes 1-1/2" and smaller, ASTM B 32, alloy Sn95 solder.
3. Joints: For sizes 2" and larger, AWS A5.8, BCuP5 silver braze.
B. Provide full solder cup for all fittings.
C. Schedule 40 Screwed Brass: Capped or plugged outlets.
2.06 NATURAL GAS PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40 black.
1. Pipe size 2" and smaller: Malleable iron threaded fittings.
2. Pipe size 2-1/2" and larger: Steel butt welded fittings.
3. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A234/A234M, wrought steel welding type.
4. Joints: Threaded or welded to ASME B31.1.
2.07 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS
A. Unions for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Under:
22 10 05 - 4 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
1. Copper Tube and Pipe: Class 150 bronze unions with soldered joints.
B. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier.
2.08 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Provide hangers and supports that comply with MSS SP-58.
1. If type of hanger or support for a particular situation is not indicated, select appropriate type using MSS SP-58 recommendations.
2. Overhead Supports: Individual steel rod hangers attached to structure or to trapeze hangers.
3. Trapeze Hangers: Welded steel channel frames attached to structure.
4. Vertical Pipe Support: Steel riser clamp.
B. Plumbing Piping - Drain, Waste, and Vent:
1. Conform to MSS SP-58.
2. Steel hanger rods and clevis shall be cadmium or zinc plated.
3. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch to 1-1/2 Inches: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring.
4. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
5. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook.
6. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp.
7. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.
8. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.
9. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.
C. Plumbing Piping - Water:
1. Conform to MSS SP-58.
2. Steel hanger rods and clevis shall be cadmium or zinc plated.
3. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch to 1-1/2 Inches: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring.
4. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
5. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook.
6. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.
22 10 05 - 5 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
7. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.
2.09 BALL VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Nibco, Inc: www.nibco.com.
2. Crane Co., Valve Division
3. Milwaukee Valve Company: www.milwaukeevalve.com.
4. Stockham.
B. Construction, 4 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP-110, Class 150, 400 psi CWP, bronze or ductile iron body, 304 stainless steel or chrome plated brass ball, regular port, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, blow-out proof stem, lever handle with balancing stops, threaded or grooved ends with union.
C. Construction, 4 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP-110, Class 150, 400 psi CWP, bronze, two piece body, stainless steel ball, full port, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, stainless steel blow-out proof stem, lever handle with balancing stops, threaded ends with union.
2.10 BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. Construction 1-1/2 Inches and Larger: MSS SP-67, 200 psi CWP, cast or ductile iron body, nickel-plated ductile iron disc, resilient replaceable EPDM seat, lug ends, extended neck, 10 position lever handle.
B. Provide gear operators for valves 8 inches and larger, and chain-wheel operators for valves mounted over 8 feet above floor.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.
C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.
C. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls.
D. Install piping to maintain headroom, conserve space, and not interfere with use of space.
22 10 05 - 6 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment.
G. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.
H. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed.
I. Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting.
J. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. See Section 22 05 23.
K. Install water piping to ASME B31.9.
L. Copper Pipe and Tube: Make soldered joints in accordance with ASTM B828, using specified solder, and flux meeting ASTM B813; in potable water systems use flux also complying with NSF 61 and NSF 372.
M. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls, and floors.
N. Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1. Install in accordance with ASME B31.9.
2. Support horizontal piping as indicated.
3. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work.
4. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.
5. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe.
6. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.
7. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.
8. Support cast iron drainage piping at every joint.
3.04 APPLICATION
A. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.
B. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Solder adapters to pipe.
C. Install gate valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers.
3.05 TOLERANCES
A. Drainage Piping: Establish invert elevations within 1/2 inch vertically of location indicated and slope to drain at minimum of 1/4 inch per foot slope.
22 10 05 - 7 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
B. Water Piping: Slope at minimum of 1/32 inch per foot and arrange to drain at low points.
3.06 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM
A. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed, and clean.
B. Ensure acidity (pH) of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric).
C. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet, or gas form throughout system to obtain 50 to 80 mg/L residual.
D. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 15 percent of outlets.
E. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours.
F. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment.
G. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L.
H. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 10 percent of outlets and from water entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651.
3.07 SCHEDULES
A. Pipe Hanger Spacing:
1. Metal Piping:
a. Pipe Size: 1/2 inches to 1-1/4 inches:
1) Maximum Hanger Spacing: 6.5 ft.
2) Hanger Rod Diameter: 3/8 inches.
b. Pipe Size: 1-1/2 inches to 2 inches:
1) Maximum Hanger Spacing: 10 ft.
2) Hanger Rod Diameter: 3/8 inch.
c. Pipe Size: 2-1/2 inches to 3 inches:
1) Maximum Hanger Spacing: 10 ft.
2) Hanger Rod Diameter: 1/2 inch.
d. Pipe Size: 4 inches to 6 inches:
1) Maximum Hanger Spacing: 10 ft.
2) Hanger Rod Diameter: 5/8 inch.
END OF SECTION
22 10 05 - 8 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
SECTION 22 10 06
PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Floor drains.
B. Cleanouts.
C. Water hammer arrestors.
D. Trap primers.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Refer to the General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division 1 General Requirements. The requirements of these sections apply to this section.
B. Section 22 10 05 - Plumbing Piping.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASME A112.6.3 - Floor and Trench Drains; 2001 (R2007).
B. ASSE 1019 - Performance Requirements for Wall Hydrant with Backflow Protection and Freeze Resistance; 2011.
C. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2014 (Errata 2015).
D. NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content; 2011.
E. PDI-WH 201 - Water Hammer Arresters; 2010.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. See Section 013300 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.
C. Product Data: Provide component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes.
D. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, and placement of openings and holes.
E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of equipment, cleanouts, water hammer arrestors.
F. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views.
22 10 06 - 1 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with not less than three years documented experience.
1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Perform Work in accordance with State of California plumbing code.
B. Domestic water piping and components shall be provided and installed in accordance with California AB 1953 Legislation (effective January 1, 2010), which limits the allowable lead content in certain domestic water system components.
C. Conform to applicable code for installation of backflow prevention devices.
D. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of installation of backflow prevention devices.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Specialties in Potable Water Supply Systems: Provide products that comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372 for maximum lead content.
2.02 REFER TO PLUMBING SCHEDULE FOR PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES NOT LISTED HEREIN.
2.03 DRAINS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Josam Company: www.josam.com/#sle.
2. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company.
3. Zurn Industries, LLC: www.zurn.com/#sle.
B. Downspout Nozzles:
1. Bronze round with straight bottom section. Zurn Z-199.
C. Floor Drain (FD):
1. ASME A112.6.3; lacquered cast iron or stainless steel, two piece body with double drainage flange, weep holes, reversible clamping collar, and round, adjustable nickel-bronze strainer.
2. Provide accessories suitable for wood raised floor installation.
D. Floor Sink (FS):
22 10 06 - 2 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
1. Lacquered cast iron body with white acid resisting porcelain interior and top complete with aluminum anti-splash bottom dome strainer, square slotted medium duty half grate, anchor and seepage flange.
2.04 CLEANOUTS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company: www.jayrsmith.com/#sle.
2. Josam Company: www.josam.com/#sle.
3. Zurn Industries, LLC: www.zurn.com/#sle.
B. Cleanouts at Exterior Surfaced Areas:
1. Round cast nickel bronze access frame and non-skid cover.
C. Cleanouts at Exterior Unsurfaced Areas:
1. Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover.
D. Cleanouts at Interior Finished Floor Areas :
1. Lacquered cast iron body with anchor flange, reversible clamping collar, threaded top assembly, and nickel bronze round gasketed scored cover in service areas and round or square nickel bronze gasketed depressed cover to accept floor finish in finished floor areas. Zurn ZN-1400.
E. Cleanouts at Interior Finished Wall Areas:
1. Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover, and round stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw. Zurn Z- 1441 or Z-1443.
F. Cleanouts in concealed aboveground cast iron soil or waste lines: Zurn Z-1440A with raised head ABS plastic plug.
2.05 TRAP PRIMERS
A. Provide trap primers, 1/2 inch size, where indicated on drawings. Provide with built-in air gap and install 1/2" shutoff valve. PVC housings are not acceptable. Install trap primer line with 1/4" per foot slope to insure full drainage to floor drain or floor sink. Install tap primer behind wall with access door.
B. Provide a distribution unit with feeder piping for a maximum of four (4) traps where multiple traps are serviced by a single trap primer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface as indicated on plans. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system.
22 10 06 - 3 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
C. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade.
D. Install cleanouts in all horizontal soil and waste piping at 50 feet maximum spacing inside building, 100 feet maximum spacing outside building, at every change of direction and where shown on Drawings.
E. Install two way cleanout in building drain (waste line leaving the building) just outside of the building.
F. Install cleanouts in waste drops from each urinal and sink.
G. Install cleanouts in rain water (storm drain) drops 18 inches above finished floor. For concealed rainwater drops extend cleanout to building exterior for access.
H. Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor.
I. Pipe relief from backflow preventer to nearest drain.
J. Install water hammer arrestors complete with accessible isolation valve on hot and cold water supply piping to and water closets and as shown on plans.
END OF SECTION
22 10 06 - 4 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
SECTION 22 40 00
PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Sinks.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Refer to the General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division 1 General Requirements. The requirements of these sections apply to this section.
B. Section 22 10 05 - Plumbing Piping.
C. Section 22 10 06 - Plumbing Piping Specialties.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASHRAE Std 18 - Methods of Testing for Rating Drinking-Water Coolers with Self- Contained Mechanical Refrigeration; 2008.
B. ASME A112.6.1M - Supports for Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use; 1997 (Reaffirmed 2002).
C. ASME A112.18.1 - Plumbing Supply Fittings; 2012.
D. ASME A112.19.2 - Ceramic Plumbing Fixtures; 2013.
E. ASME A112.19.5 - Flush Valves and Spuds for Water Closets, Urinals, and Tanks; 2011.
F. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2015a.
G. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2014 (Errata 2015).
H. NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content; 2011.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013300 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide catalog illustrations of fixtures, sizes, rough-in dimensions, utility sizes, trim, and finishes.
C. Maintenance Data: Include fixture trim exploded view and replacement parts lists.
D. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in TRUSD's name and registered with manufacturer.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience.
22 40 00 - 1 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Perform Work in accordance with State of California plumbing code.
B. Domestic water piping and components shall be provided and installed in accordance with California AB 1953 Legislation (effective January 1, 2010), which limits the allowable lead content in certain domestic water system components.
C. Conform to applicable code for installation of backflow prevention devices.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Accept fixtures on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage.
B. Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by leaving factory packaging in place to protect fixtures and prevent use.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01700 - Contract Closeout, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for electric water cooler.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Potable Water Systems: Provide plumbing fittings and faucets that comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372 for maximum lead content; label pipe and fittings.
2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. Refer to Architectural drawings for exact locations, fixture mounting heights and ADA accessibility requirements.
B. Insulate domestic hot water, tempered water and waste piping below handicapped plumbing fixtures with molded single piece removable insulation covers, foam, fire resistant, Truebro, or equal. Install insulation covers in accordance with ADA requirements.
C. Provide 85% IPS red brass pipe for each connection to faucets, stops, hose bibs, and other fixtures/trim. Securely anchor brass pipe to structure. Install stop valves on water supply lines for each fixture, except hose bibbs.
D. Provide compression shutoff control stop valves with IPS inlets and threaded brass nipples at pipe connection on water supplies to each fixture. Provide stops with lock shield loose key and key handle for each stop. For combination fixtures, provide with compression stop and IPS inlet on each water supply fitting.
E. Provide cast brass escutcheons, except escutcheons exposed to view shall have chrome plated finish.
F. Provide chromium-plated finish on fittings and accessories exposed to view.
G. Fixture fittings and trim: Conform to ASME A112.18.1M and ASME A112.19.5, as applicable.
22 40 00 - 2 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
H. Centerset faucets: Top-mounted with inlets on not greater than 4 inch centers, unless specified otherwise below.
I. Separate faucets and combination supply fittings: Provide inlets on 8 inch centers.
J. Zinc-alloy or plastic handles are not permitted for faucets and valves.
K. Provide special roughing-in for wheelchair fixtures.
L. Provide 0.35 GPM flow restrictor for all public lavatories.
M. Water closet flush flow rates not to exceed 1.28 GPF.
N. Urinal flush flow rates not to exceed 0.125 GPF.
O. Provide water hammer arrestors at end of pipe runs to two or more fixtures, properly sized with sufficient displacement volume to dissipate calculated energy in the piping systems. Water hammer arrestors shall be stainless steel shell with stainless steel bellows contained within the casing, Zurn Model Z-1700, or equal. See Section 15146. Locate in accessible location or provide access panel with location approved by Architect.
P. Fixture dimensions specified are nominal.
2.03 SEE PLUMBING SCHEDULE FOR FIXTURE REQUIREMENTS.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures.
B. Confirm that millwork is constructed with adequate provision for the installation of counter top lavatories and sinks.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture rough-in schedule for particular fixtures.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning.
B. Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with loose key stops, reducers, and escutcheons.
C. Install components level and plumb.
D. Install and secure fixtures in place with wall carriers and bolts.
E. Solidly attach water closets to floor with lag screws. Lead flashing is not intended hold fixture in place.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or overflow.
22 40 00 - 3 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean plumbing fixtures and equipment.
END OF SECTION
22 40 00 - 4 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
SECTION 23 05 10
MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. References.
B. Description of Work.
C. Drawings and Specifications.
D. Industry Standards and Codes.
E. Site Examination.
F. Permits, Fees and Utility Connections.
G. Coordination of Work.
H. Progress of Work.
I. Submittals
J. Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
K. Project Record Documents.
L. Warranty.
M. Quality and Care
N. Access Doors.
O. Starting Equipment and Systems.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including the General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division 1 General Requirements apply to this section.
B. The Contract Agreement, Bidding Documents and all Addenda issued prior to Contract Agreement execution form a part of these specifications and apply to all Contracts or Subcontracts relating to the mechanical systems.
C. The requirements of this Section apply to all Work of Division 23.
D. Section 013300 - Submittals.
E. Section 017000 - Closeout Procedures.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI - American National Standards Institute.
23 05 10 - 1 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
B. ASTM - American Society for Testing Materials.
C. CEC - California Electric Code.
D. NEC - National Electric Code.
E. NEMA - National Electric Manufacturers' Association.
F. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association.
G. OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Act.
H. UL - Underwriters' Laboratories.
I. See detailed References that are listed in individual sections.
1.04 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The work included in this division of the specifications consists of furnishing labor, tools, equipment, supplies and materials, unless otherwise specified, and in performing operations necessary for the installation of the complete Mechanical System as required by these specifications or shown on the Drawings, subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract Agreement.
B. The work shall also include the completion of details of mechanical work not mentioned or shown which are necessary for the successful operation of mechanical systems described on the drawings or required by these specifications. Furnish and install any incidental work not shown or specified which is required to provide a complete and operational system.
1.05 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. Drawings are schematic and diagrammatic. Drawings indicate the general arrangement of equipment, piping, ductwork and other mechanical work. Use judgement and care to install mechanical work to fit the job conditions within the building construction and finishes, and to function properly.
B. The Contractor shall investigate the building conditions affecting the Work and shall arrange his work accordingly providing offsets, fittings, valves and accessories to fit the actual job conditions. The Contractor shall be responsible to field measure and confirm new and existing mechanical systems locations with respect to other architectural, structural, and electrical work, existing and new. Do not scale distances off of the mechanical drawings. Use actual building dimensions.
C. The drawings and specifications are complimentary each to the other. What is required by one shall be as binding as if called for by both.
D. Examine all drawings and specifications prior to bidding the Work. Report any discrepancies to the Engineer.
1.06 INDUSTRY STANDARDS AND CODES
A. The Mechanical Contractor shall comply with the latest provisions of all codes, regulations, laws and ordinances applicable to the work involved. This does not relieve the Contractor from furnishing and installing work shown or specified which may exceed the requirements of such codes, regulations laws and ordinances.
23 05 10 - 2 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
B. All materials, products, devices, fixtures forms or types of construction included in this project shall meet or exceed the published requirements of the publications listed below. These publications form a part of this specification.
1. California Building Code, 2019.
2. California Mechanical Code, 2019.
3. California Plumbing Code, 2019.
4. California Electrical Code, 2019.
5. National Fire Protection Association.
6. California Fire Code, 2019.
7. California State Fire Marshal.
8. Occupational Safety and Health Administration, including CAL-OSHA.
9. California Energy Code, 2019.
10. California Green Building Standards Code, 2019.
11. State of California Code of Regulations, Title 24.
12. Other applicable state laws.
C. Nothing in the Drawings or Specifications shall be construed to permit work that does not conform these codes. When Contract Documents differ from governing codes, furnish and install to the higher standard required at no extra charge. The Contract Documents are not intended to repeat the code requirements except where necessary for clarity.
D. No material or product installed as a part of the Work shall contain asbestos in any form.
1.07 SITE EXAMINATION
A. Contractor shall examine the site, verify dimensions and locations with Drawings, check utility connection locations, and familiarize himself with the existing conditions and limitations. No extras will be allowed because of the Contractor's misunderstanding of the amount of work involved or his lack of knowledge of any site condition which may affect his work. Any apparent variance of the drawings or specifications from the existing conditions at the site shall be called to the attention of the Engineer immediately.
1.08 PERMITS, FEES AND UTILITY SERVICES
A. Contractor shall pay for and obtain all permits and service required in the installation of this work.
B. Contractor shall arrange for all required inspections and will secure approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.
1.09 COORDINATION OF WORK
A. It is recognized that the contract documents are diagrammatic in showing certain physical relationships which must be established within the mechanical work, and in its interface
23 05 10 - 3 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
with other work and that such establishment is the exclusive responsibility of the contractor.
B. The Contractor shall give careful consideration to the work of the General, Electrical and other contractors on the job and shall organize his work so that it will not interfere with the work of other trades. He shall consult the drawings and specifications for work of other trades for correcting information, and the pertinent drawings for details and dimensions.
C. Arrange mechanical work in a neat, well-organized manner with the piping, conduit, and similar services running parallel and/or perpendicular to primary lines of the building construction. Locate operating and control equipment properly to provide easy access, and arrange entire mechanical work with adequate access for operation and maintenance.
D. Verify the location of all equipment, and devices, etc. and if interference develops, the Owner/Engineer's decision will be final and no additional compensation will be allowed for the moving of misplaced air devices or equipment.
1.10 PROGRESS OF WORK
A. This Contractor shall organize his work so that the progress of the mechanical work will conform to the progress of the other trades, and shall complete the entire installation as soon as the conditions of the building will permit. Any cost resulting from defective or ill timed work performed under this section shall be borne by this Contractor.
1.11 STRUCTURAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
A. Mechanical systems and equipment shall be anchored and seismically braced in accordance with all applicable codes and industry standards.
B. Mechanical systems and equipment shall include, but are not limited to, all piping, heating and ventilating equipment, electrical and control panels, conduits and other components.
C. Supports, anchorage and restraints, including attachments to building structure, for all piping and ductwork for standard installation details that comply with the latest edition of the Mason Industries "Seismic Restraint Guidelines", the latest edition of the SMACNA "Guidelines for Seismic Restraints of Mechanical Systems and Plumbing Piping Systems", or equal, shall be used wherever possible. The Contractor shall provide all supporting documentation required for the Engineer and the reviewing authorities. If compliance with one of these standards is demonstrated, separate structural calculations are not required.
D. For all non-standard installations not detailed in one of the approved systems, the Contractor shall provide details of supports, anchorages and restraints, including attachments to building structure, with supporting calculations all stamped and signed by a licensed professional structural engineer registered in the state in which the Work is performed.
1.12 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures, for additional submittal procedures.
B. Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this Project.
23 05 10 - 4 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
C. Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project.
D. Organize submittals in sequence according to Specification Section. Submit in bound document with tabs identifying each Specification Section. Provide a Table of Contents identifying the Specifications Sections being submitted and the contents within each tabbed section. Prepare Submittals in multiple volumes if required. Provide a complete Submittal package at one time. Do not submit individual Sections piecemeal.
E. Indicate utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances.
F. Furnish, upon request, installation instructions for all equipment and materials to Inspector of Record prior to installation.
G. Maintain a copy of the fire and smoke damper installation instructions on site for use by the Inspector of Record.
1.13 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
A. Instructions to Bidders specify time restrictions for submitting requests for substitutions during the bidding period. Comply with requirements specified in this section.
B. LP Consulting Engineers, Inc. will consider requests for substitutions only within 7 days after date of Agreement.
C. Substitutions may be considered when a product becomes unavailable through no fault of the Contractor.
D. Failure by the Contractor to order materials or equipment in a timely manner will not constitute justification for a substitution.
E. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents.
F. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter:
1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product.
2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product.
3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work which may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to TRUSD.
4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension which may subsequently become apparent.
5. Will reimburse TRUSD and LP Consulting Engineers, Inc. for review or redesign services associated with reapproval by authorities including obtaining reapproval by authorities.
G. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision to the Contract Documents.
23 05 10 - 5 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
H. If excessive review, as judged by the Engineer, is required caused by complicated, numerous or repetitive requests, Contractor shall reimburse Engineer and its Consultants for such review at their standard billing rates.
I. Substitution Submittal Procedure:
1. Submit three copies of request for substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one proposed substitution.
2. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed product equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer.
3. The LP Consulting Engineers, Inc. will notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject request.
4. Present each substitution individually. If a proposed substitute in not found to be acceptable, then the specified item shall be supplied.
1.14 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. See Section 01700 Closeout Submittals for Operation and Maintenance Manual requirements.
B. Provide operating and maintenance instructions, diagrams and parts lists for all components of all mechanical systems and each piece of equipment furnished under these specifications.
C. Operating and maintenance instructions shall be furnished for the following equipment and systems:
1. Ventilating Systems.
2. Air Conditioning Systems.
3. Piping Systems.
4. Temperature Controls Systems.
5. Motors.
6. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports.
D. Provide manufacturer's model number, design data, capacities, etc. for each piece of mechanical equipment furnished as a part of the Work.
E. The operating instructions shall include procedures for starting, stopping and emergency manual operation for all equipment and systems.
F. Provide maintenance instructions of each item of individual equipment including applicable maintenance data as recommended by the manufacturer, including frequency of lubrication, lubricants, inspections required, adjustment procedures, belt and pulley sizes, etc.
G. Provide manufacturer's parts bulletins with part numbers for each item of equipment included in the Work. Parts bulletins shall be specific to the equipment provided.
23 05 10 - 6 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
Extraneous information that does not apply to the equipment provided shall be eliminated from the literature.
H. Include copies of test reports (startup, check, etc.) and inspections performed for each piece of equipment provided in the Work.
I. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in TRUSD's name and registered with manufacturer.
J. Provide supplier and manufacturer contacts, telephone numbers and addresses in the front portion of the operation and maintenance manual.
1.15 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. See Section 017700 - Closeout Procedures.
B. Provide red-lined drawings accurately showing location of equipment and devices and size and routing of ductwork. Include notes explaining installed condition for complete understanding.
1.16 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.
B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.
C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from LP Consulting Engineers, Inc. before proceeding.
D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship.
E. Have Work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality.
F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the manufacturer.
G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement.
1.17 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner.
1.18 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01700 - Closeout Procedures, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Correct defective Work within a one year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
23 05 10 - 7 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 QUALITY AND CARE
A. All materials shall be new and in perfect condition when installed unless specifically indicated otherwise. Materials shall be tested within the Continental United States by an independent, nationally recognized testing agency and shall be listed in accordance with testing agency requirements. When not otherwise specified, all material shall conform to applicable National Standards (ANSI).
B. All capacities, sizes and efficiency ratings shown on the drawing are minimum.
C. Each category of material or equipment shall be of the same brand or manufacturer throughout the Work wherever possible.
D. The quality of materials and equipment to be provided is defined by the brand names, manufacturers, model and catalog numbers listed on the Drawings and in the Specifications. Contractor shall provide each item listed, of the quality specified, or equal.
E. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products in conformance with manufacturer's recommended practices as outlined in applicable Installation and Maintenance Manuals.
F. Inspect and report concealed damage to carrier within their required time period.
G. Store materials in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory protection and/or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.
H. Equipment which has been damaged, exposed to weather or is, in the opinion of the Engineer or Owner, otherwise unsuitable because of improper fabrication, storage or installation shall be removed and replaced by this Contractor at his expense.
2.02 ACCESS DOORS
A. Coordinate access door requirements with Section 083113. The more stringent requirements shall govern.
B. Provide access doors where access through floors, walls or ceilings is required to access mechanical, plumbing, control system components, fire dampers and fire alarm system components (such as smoke detectors, fire/smoke dampers, etc.) or other systems requiring access for maintenance, test or observation.
1. Access doors requiring hand access or access for observation only shall be 14"x14" minimum usable opening.
2. Access doors where entrance of a service person may be required shall be 24"x30" minimum usable opening.
C. Established standard: Milcor of types listed below. Other acceptable manufacturers: Cesco, J.L. Industries, Karp, Larsen's, or equal. Comply with the following:
1. Form doors and frames of welded, ground smooth steel construction, 14 gauge for doors, 16 gauge for frames. Provide prime coat finish except for stainless steel type.
23 05 10 - 8 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
2. Concealed hinges to allow 175 degree opening.
3. Locks: flush, screw driver operated cam lock(s).
4. Provide anchoring devices suitable for the construction into which the doors are framed.
D. Application (as applicable):
1. In gypsum drywall walls and ceilings: Type DW.
2. In ceramic tile walls: Type MS (stainless steel).
3. In fire rated walls: Type Fire Rated (rating as required for wall or ceiling), self closing, 250 F in 30 min. temperature rating.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Access Doors
1. Coordinate the exact location of access doors to provide proper access to the item concealed. Obtain written approval for access door locations from Architect.
2. Coordinate installation of access doors with the trades performing the construction assemblies into which the access doors are placed.
3. Install all access doors neatly and securely, to open and close completely, and to operate freely and without binding. Install rated doors in accordance with their listing requirements.
4. Test operate all doors and make all adjustments required for satisfactory operation. Replace all damaged materials.
5. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with the requirements within this section.
B. Test all piping with no leak or loss in pressure in accordance with the requirements within this section.
3.03 GENERAL TESTING REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING SYSTEMS
A. Contractor shall assign a responsible person to be an independent representative to witness testing and to sign as witness of times, pressure and losses of testing media for all hydronic piping and duct testing.
1. Test all piping as noted below with no leak or loss of pressure. Repair or replace defective piping until tests are accomplished successfully.
2. Submit to the Engineer for review a log of all tests made which shall include time, temperature, pressure, water makeup and other applicable readings, necessary
23 05 10 - 9 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
to indicate the systems have been operated and tested in the manner outlined in the construction documents.
3. After producing the specified test pressure, disconnect the pressurizing source; do not introduce further pressure for the duration of the test period, repair leaky piping and retest. Repeat the procedure until the entire system is proven tight.
B. Test the following systems with the medium listed to the pressure indicated for the time period listed:
1. Hydronic Piping: Pressure=125 Psig / Medium= Water / Duration=4 Hours.
3.04 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration which affects:
1. Structural integrity of any element of Project.
2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element.
3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element.
4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements.
5. Work of TRUSD or separate Contractor.
B. Execute cutting and patching to complete the work, to uncover work to install improperly sequenced work, to remove and replace defective or non-conforming work, to remove samples of installed work for testing when requested, to provide openings in the work for penetration of mechanical and electrical work, to execute patching to complement adjacent work, and to fit Products together to integrate with other work.
C. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other work, and which will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize damage and restore to original condition.
D. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval.
E. Restore work with new Products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.
F. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.
G. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire rated material in accordance with Code requirements , to full thickness of the penetrated element.
H. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finish. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit.
23 05 10 - 10 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
3.05 PRIMING AND PAINTING
A. Apply primer to all exposed ferrous metals that are not factory primed, factory finished, galvanized, stainless steel or anodized. Exposed black steel piping shall be primed and finish painted to match Architectural finsih requirements.
1. Primer shall be as recommended by the paint manufacturer for each specific application.
2. Acceptable Products include: Fuller O'Brien Blox-Rust Metal All Purpose Primer, equivalent Rust-Oleum product, or equal. See Section 092216 for other acceptable products.
B. Apply two coats of primer to metal surfaces of items to be insulated or jacketed, except ductwork and piping, or factory primed or finished.
C. Preparation:
1. Do not start work until surfaces to be finished are in proper condition to produce finished surfaces of uniform, satisfactory appearance.
2. Stains and Marks: Remove completely, if possible, using materials and methods recommended by coating manufacturer; seal stains and marks which cannot be completely removed using Devoe KILSTAIN primers, shellac, or other coating acceptable to paint manufacturer any marks or defects that might bleed through paint finishes.
3. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of trisodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow substrate to thoroughly dry.
4. Galvanized Surfaces:
a. Remove surface contamination and oils by solvent cleaning in accordance with SSPC-SP 1 and allow to dry.
b. Apply Devoe MIRROLAC Galvanized Metal Primer in accordance with manufacturer instructions.
5. Uncoated Steel And Iron Surfaces:
a. Remove grease, rust, scale, and dust from steel and iron surfaces using solvent in accordance with SSPC-SP 1.
b. Where heavy coatings of scale or contaminants are evident, hand tool clean in accordance with SSPC-SP 2 or use other approved SSPC SP method as needed.
6. Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Remove loose primer and dust. Sand and feather edges to smooth surface. Clean areas with solvent and spot prime bare metal surfaces with appropriate Devoe MIRROLAC metal primer or primer recommended by manufacturer.
D. Application:
23 05 10 - 11 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
1. Apply each coat to uniform coating thickness in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, not exceeding manufacturer's specified maximum spread rate for indicated surface; thins, brush marks, roller marks, orange-peel, or other application imperfections are not permitted.
2. Allow manufacturer's specified drying time, and ensure correct coating adhesion, for each coat before applying next coat.
3. Remove dust and other foreign materials from substrate immediately prior to applying each coat.
E. Finish Painting: See Section 09900.
3.06 STARTING EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS/COMMISSIONING
A. Start equipment and systems in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions..
B. Adjust for proper operation within manufacturer's published tolerances.
C. Demonstrate proper operation of equipment to TRUSD's designated representative.
D. Description:
1. Comply with all start up of mechanical and electrical equipment systems as required in the various sections and herein.
2. Coordinate all testing and startup procedures with all other trades so that all non- mechanical and non-electrical work is completed and operational so that the specified testing can be performed.
E. Preliminary Work:
1. Prior to the startup, the Contractor shall ensure that the systems are ready to operate, and the following items have been completed and checked including but not limited to:
a. Proper motor and pump rotation.
b. Flushing and cleaning of the system.
c. Wiring
d. Auxiliary connections
e. Lubrication.
f. Venting.
g. Controls.
h. Installation of filters and strainers.
i. Setting of relief and safety valves .
2. All electrical testing must be completed and test results submitted before equipment startup to avoid power interruptions during mechanical equipment startup and testing.
23 05 10 - 12 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
3. The Contractor shall submit at least 10 days in advance a schedule listing the date of completion of his work as it will be ready for equipment startup of Electrical/Mechanical equipment. This schedule shall include work on a system by system, floor by floor basis.
4. Two weeks prior to the startup of any major equipment, the Contractor shall certify in writing that the systems will be complete and ready for startup. Completeness shall not only include physical installation of individual pieces of equipment, but all related elements of other crafts to make all equipment operate as a system.
a. The startup checklist will cover all related crafts, e.g., controls, electrical, mechanical, and a clean environment for equipment startup.
5. The Contractor shall schedule a tour with the Owner's representative and the Engineer to review startup conditions prior to equipment startup. This tour shall take place during the associated Engineer's regularly scheduled visit. This tour does not relieve the Contractor of any responsibilities to properly start equipment. The Engineer will issue a notice of deficiencies that will be required to be corrected prior to equipment startup. The Contractor will be required to reschedule a back check with the Engineer prior to attempting an equipment startup.
6. Equipment of systems should not be started until systems and associated subsystems are completed. Verify that other continuing work could not possibly damage completed systems if they are in operation. Furnish signed off prestartup check sheet.
END OF SECTION
23 05 10 - 13 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
SECTION 23 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Nameplates.
B. Tags.
C. Pipe markers.
D. Ceiling tacks.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Refer to the General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division 1 General Requirements. The requirements of these sections apply to this section.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; 2007.
B. ASTM D709 - Standard Specification for Laminated Thermosetting Materials; 2013.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures.
B. List: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical identification.
C. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 IDENTIFICATION APPLICATIONS
A. Air Handling Units: Nameplates.
B. Air Terminal Units: Nameplates.
C. Control Panels: Nameplates.
D. Dampers: Ceiling tacks, where located above lay-in ceiling.
E. Heat Transfer Equipment: Nameplates.
F. Major Control Components: Nameplates.
G. Piping: Pipe markers.
23 05 53 - 1 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
H. Pumps: Nameplates.
I. Small-sized Equipment: Tags.
J. Tanks: Nameplates.
K. Thermostats: Nameplates.
L. Valves: Tags and ceiling tacks where located above lay-in ceiling.
2.02 MANUFACTURERS
A. Brady Corporation: www.bradycorp.com.
B. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com/aec.
2.03 NAMEPLATES
A. Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved letters.
1. Letter Color: White.
2. Letter Height: Air Handling Units, Control panels: 1 inch.
3. Letter Height: All others: 1/4 inch.
4. Background Color: Black.
5. Plastic: Comply with ASTM D709.
2.04 TAGS
A. Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter.
B. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter with smooth edges.
2.05 PIPE MARKERS
A. Color: Comply with ASME A13.1.
B. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings. Secure to pipe using two (2) bands of adhesive tape with flow arrows supplied by the manufacturer. Install securing bands completly around pipe and overlapped.
C. Underground Plastic Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape, minimum 6 inches wide by 4 mil thick, manufactured for direct burial service.
2.06 CEILING TACKS
A. Description: Steel with 3/4 inch diameter color coded head.
B. Color code as follows:
1. Fire Dampers and Smoke Dampers: Red.
23 05 53 - 2 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
2. Heating/Cooling Valves: Blue.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.
B. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain.
C. Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D. Identify fans and filter boxes with plastic nameplates. Small devices, such as in-line pumps, may be identified with tags.
E. Identify chilled/hot water equipment, including chillers, boilers, pumps, expansion tanks, air separators, etc. with plastic nameplates.
F. Identify air conditioning units, air handling units, heating and ventilating units, exhaust fans, pumps, heat transfer equipment, tanks, fire/smoke damper access doors, and water treatment devices with nameplates. Small devices, such as terminal units, in-line pumps, may be identified with tags.
G. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates.
H. Identify thermostats/sensors relating to fan unit and/or zone unit with nameplates.
I. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags.
J. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet (6 m) on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and Tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.
K. Locate ceiling tacks to locate valves or dampers above lay-in panel ceilings. Locate in corner of panel closest to equipment.
END OF SECTION
23 05 53 - 3 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
SECTION 23 05 93
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Refer to the General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division 1 General Requirements. The requirements of these sections apply to this section.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AABC (NSTSB) - AABC National Standards for Total System Balance, 7th Edition; 2016.
B. ASHRAE Std 111 - Measurement, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Building HVAC Systems; 2008.
C. NEBB (TAB) - Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems; 2015, Eighth Edition.
D. SMACNA (TAB) - HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting and Balancing; 2002.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Final Report: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance.
1. Submit to LP Consulting Engineers, Inc. within 2 days after completion of testing, adjusting, and balancing.
2. Include actual instrument list, with manufacturer name, serial number, and date of calibration.
3. Form of Test Reports: Where the TAB standard being followed recommends a report format use that; otherwise, follow ASHRAE Std 111.
4. Units of Measure: Report data in I-P (inch-pound) units only.
5. Test Reports: Indicate data on AABC MN-1 forms, forms prepared following ASHRAE Std 111, or NEBB forms.
6. Include the following on the title page of each report:
a. Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency.
b. Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency.
c. Telephone number of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency.
d. Project name.
23 05 93 - 1 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
e. Project location.
f. Project Engineer.
g. Project altitude.
h. Report date.
B. Test and balance shall be performed by an independent test and balance agency.
C. Perform total system balance in accordance with AABC MN-1, ASHRAE Std 111, or NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing, Balancing and Adjusting of Environmental Systems.
D. TAB Agency Qualifications: Company specializing in the testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems specified in this Section with minimum three years documented experience certified by AABC or NEBB.
E. Perform Work under supervision of AABC Certified Test and Balance Engineer or NEBB Certified Testing, Balancing and Adjusting Supervisor experienced in performance of this Work and licensed at the California.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Perform total system balance in accordance with one of the following:
1. AABC (NSTSB), AABC National Standards for Total System Balance.
2. ASHRAE Std 111, Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Building Heating, Ventilation, Air-Conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems.
3. SMACNA (TAB).
B. Where HVAC systems and/or components interface with life safety systems, including fire and smoke detection, alarm, and control, coordinate scheduling and testing and inspection procedures with the authorities having jurisdiction.
C. TAB Agency Qualifications:
1. Company specializing in the testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems specified in this section.
2. Having minimum of three years documented experience.
3. Certified by one of the following:
a. AABC, Associated Air Balance Council: www.aabc.com/#sle; upon completion submit AABC National Performance Guaranty.
b. TABB, The Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau of National Energy Management Institute: www.tabbcertified.org/#sle.
23 05 93 - 2 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
D. TAB Supervisor and Technician Qualifications: Certified by same organization as TAB agency.
3.02 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING AGENCIES
A. RS Analysis, 916-358-5673.
B. Raglen System Balance.
3.03 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure the following conditions:
1. Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition.
2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable.
B. Submit field reports. Report defects and deficiencies that will or could prevent proper system balance.
C. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.04 PREPARATION
A. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Make instruments available to LP Consulting Engineers, Inc. to facilitate spot checks during testing.
B. Provide additional balancing devices as required.
3.05 ADJUSTMENT TOLERANCES
A. Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 5 percent of design for supply systems and plus or minus 5 percent of design for return and exhaust systems.
3.06 RECORDING AND ADJUSTING
A. Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions.
B. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption has been rectified.
C. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings.
D. At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck points or areas as selected and witnessed by TRUSD.
3.07 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE
A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return, and exhaust air quantities at site altitude.
B. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of duct.
23 05 93 - 3 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.
D. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes required. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation.
E. Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet or inlet.
F. Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design conditions.
G. Where modulating dampers are provided, take measurements and balance at extreme conditions. Balance variable volume systems at maximum air flow rate, full cooling, and at minimum air flow rate, full heating.
3.08 SCOPE
A. Test, adjust, and balance the following:
1. Air Handling Units.
2. Fans.
3. Air Filters.
4. Air Inlets and Outlets.
3.09 MINIMUM DATA TO BE REPORTED
A. Electric Motors:
1. Manufacturer.
2. Model/Frame.
3. HP/BHP.
4. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load.
5. RPM.
6. Service factor.
7. Starter size, rating, heater elements.
8. Sheave Make/Size/Bore.
B. Cooling Coils:
1. Location.
2. Service.
3. Manufacturer.
4. Air flow, design and actual.
23 05 93 - 4 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
5. Entering air DB temperature, design and actual.
6. Entering air WB temperature, design and actual.
7. Leaving air DB temperature, design and actual.
8. Leaving air WB temperature, design and actual.
9. Saturated suction temperature, design and actual.
10. Air pressure drop, design and actual.
C. Air Moving Equipment:
1. Location.
2. Manufacturer.
3. Model number.
4. Serial number.
5. Arrangement/Class/Discharge.
6. Air flow, specified and actual.
7. Return air flow, specified and actual.
8. Outside air flow, specified and actual.
9. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual.
10. Inlet pressure.
11. Discharge pressure.
12. Sheave Make/Size/Bore.
13. Number of Belts/Make/Size.
14. Fan RPM.
D. Return Air/Outside Air/Exhaust Air:
1. Identification/location.
2. Design air flow (determined by inital test)
3. Actual air flow.
4. Design return air flow (determined by inital test)
5. Actual return air flow.
6. Design outside air flow (determined by inital test)
7. Actual outside air flow.
23 05 93 - 5 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
8. Return air temperature.
9. Outside air temperature.
10. Actual mixed air temperature.
E. Duct Traverses:
1. System zone/branch.
2. Duct size.
3. Area.
4. Design velocity.
5. Design air flow.
6. Test velocity.
7. Test air flow.
8. Duct static pressure.
9. Air temperature.
10. Air correction factor.
END OF SECTION
23 05 93 - 6 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
SECTION 23 31 00
HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Metal ductwork.
B. Kitchen hood ductwork.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Refer to the General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division 1 General Requirements. The requirements of these sections apply to this section.
B. Section 230713 - Duct Insulation.
C. Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories.
D. Section 23 37 00 - Air Outlets and Inlets.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015.
B. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2015.
C. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; 2015.
D. NFPA 90B - Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air-Conditioning Systems; 2015.
E. NFPA 96 - Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations; 2014.
F. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible; 2005.
G. SMACNA (KVS) - Kitchen Ventilation Systems and Food Service Equipment Fabrication and Installation Guidelines; 2001.
H. UL 181 - Standard for Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors; current edition, including all revisions.
1.04 RELATED SECTIONS
A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including the General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division 1 General Requirements apply to this section.
B. The Contract Agreement, Bidding Documents and all Addenda issued prior to Contract Agreement execution form a part of these specifications and apply to all Contracts or Subcontracts relating to the mechanical systems.
23 31 00 - 1 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
C. The requirements of this Section apply to all Work of Division 23.
D. Section 013300 - Submittals.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013300 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data for duct materials.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate duct fittings, particulars such as gages, sizes, welds, and configuration prior to start of work for all ductwork systems. Provide 1/4"=1'-0" ductwork layout plans showing duct routing, offsets, fittings, duct accessories, fire/smoke dampers, hydronic piping, seismic bracing, etc. Shop drawings shall by fully coordinated with all other trades, including the building structure, finishes, fire sprinkler piping, plumbing piping, hydronic piping and electrical systems.
D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of ducts and duct fittings. Record changes in fitting location and type. Show additional fittings used.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience, and approved by manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install duct sealants when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant manufacturers.
B. Maintain temperatures within acceptable range during and after installation of duct sealants.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 DUCT ASSEMBLIES
A. Regulatory Requirements: Construct ductwork to comply with NFPA 90A standards.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Galvanized Steel for Ducts: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M FS Type B, with G90/Z275 coating.
B. Stainless Steel for Ducts: ASTM A666, Type 304.
C. Joint Sealers and Sealants: Non-hardening, water resistant, mildew and mold resistant.
1. Type: Heavy mastic or liquid used alone or with tape, suitable for joint configuration and compatible with substrates, and recommended by manufacturer for pressure class of ducts.
2. VOC Content: Not more than 250 g/L, excluding water.
23 31 00 - 2 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
3. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of zero and smoke developed index of zero, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
4. Manufacturers:
a. Design Polymerics: www.designpoly.com.com/#sle.
b. Ductmate Industries, Inc, a DMI Company: www.ductmate.com/#sle.
D. Gasket Tape: Provide butyl rubber gasket tape for a flexible seal between transfer duct connector (TDC), transverse duct flange (TDF), applied flange connections, and angle rings connections.
E. Insulated Flexible Ducts:
1. Flexible ducts shall be U.L. listed and shall comply with UMC Standard 6-1.
2. Flexible ducts shall have a flame spread index of not more than 25 and a smoke- density index not exceeding 50 when tested as a composite material.
3. The maximum length of flexible ductwork shall be 5 feet. Ductwork shall be extended to full length whenever possible without severe bends or kinks. Bends shall be made to maintain R/W equal to 1.5.
4. Black polymer film supported by helically wound spring steel wire; fiberglass insulation; polyethylene vapor barrier film.
a. Pressure Rating: 4 inches WG positive and 0.5 inches WG negative.
b. Insulation shall be 1-1/2 inch thick fiberglass.
c. Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm.
d. Temperature Range: -20 degrees F to 175 degrees F.
2.03 DUCTWORK FABRICATION
A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) and as indicated.
B. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated.
C. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows must be used, provide air foil turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation.
D. Round ductwork shall be spiral lockseam, 24 gauge minimum. Round ductwork exposed within occupied spaces shall be spiral lockseam, 20 gauge minimum.
E. Rectangular ductwork exposed within occupied spaces shall be 20 gauge minimum.
F. Ductwork exposed within occupied spaces shall be internally sealed to provide a clean exterior appearance.
G. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible; maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence downstream.
23 31 00 - 3 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
H. Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings in accordance with SMACNA (DCS).
I. Fittings shall be spot welded and internally sealed.
J. Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings two gages heavier than duct gages indicated in SMACNA Standard.
2.04 KITCHEN HOOD EXHAUST DUCTWORK
A. Fabricate in accordance with ductwork manufacturer's installation instructions, SMACNA (DCS), SMACNA (KVS), and NFPA 96.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install, support, and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA (DCS).
B. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.
C. Duct sizes indicated are inside dimensions. For lined ducts, duct sizes must be increased to account for lining.
D. Indoor Applications: Seal all standing seams and transverse joints in all sheetmetal ductwork with Hardcast "Iron Grip" premium flexible water based duct sealant.
E. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities.
F. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports.
G. Connect diffusers boots to low pressure ducts directly or with 5 feet maximum length of flexible duct held in place with strap or clamp.
H. Use stainless steel for ductwork exposed to view in Kitchen areas.
I. Kitchen hood exhaust ductwork shall so be constructed and installed that grease cannot be pocketed in any portion thereof, and the system shall slope not less than 1/4 unit vertical in 12 units horizontal (2% slope) toward the hood or toward an approved grease reservoir.
J. Kitchen hood exhaust ductwork shall be wrapped with a 2 hour fire resistive duct wrap designed for use specifically with kitchen grease ducts, Pabco Super Firetemp fireproofing board, or equal, installed in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
END OF SECTION
23 31 00 - 4 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
SECTION 23 33 00
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Air turning devices.
B. Backdraft dampers - metal.
C. Duct access doors.
D. Duct test holes.
E. Flexible duct connectors.
F. Volume control dampers.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Refer to the General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division 1 General Requirements. The requirements of these sections apply to this section.
B. Section 23 31 00 - HVAC Ducts and Casings.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; 2015.
B. NFPA 96 - Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations; 2014.
C. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible; 2005.
D. UL 555S - Standard for Smoke Dampers; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
E. UL 1978 - Grease Ducts; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 RELATED SECTIONS
A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including the General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division 1 General Requirements apply to this section.
B. The Contract Agreement, Bidding Documents and all Addenda issued prior to Contract Agreement execution form a part of these specifications and apply to all Contracts or Subcontracts relating to the mechanical systems.
C. The requirements of this Section apply to all Work of Division 23.
D. Section 013300 - Submittals.
23 33 00 - 1 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013300 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide for shop fabricated assemblies including volume control dampers, duct access doors, duct test holes, and hardware used. Include electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
1.06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Record actual locations of access doors and test holes.
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience.
B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect dampers from damage to operating linkages and blades.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 AIR TURNING DEVICES
A. Manufacturers:
1. ProRail, Ductmate Industries, Inc.
2. Duro Dyne Corp.
B. Manufactured turning vanes with 2" single thickness curved blades set at 1-1/2" on- center mounted in 2" vane rails, self-aligning, hot dipped galvanized steel.
C. Turning vanes, vane rails and mounting shall be constructed and installed in accordance with the SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards".
2.02 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS - METAL
A. Gravity Backdraft Dampers, Size 18 by 18 inches or Smaller, Furnished with Air Moving Equipment: Air moving equipment manufacturer's standard construction.
2.03 DUCT ACCESS DOORS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Ductmate Industries, Inc, a DMI Company: www.ductmate.com/#sle.
2. Ruskin Company: www.ruskin.com/#sle.
3. Ward Industries, a brand of Hart and Cooley, Inc: www.wardind.com/#sle.
4. or equal.
23 33 00 - 2 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
B. Fabrication: Rigid and close-fitting of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and quick fastening locking devices. For insulated ducts, install minimum 1 inch thick insulation with sheet metal cover.
1. High Temperature Duct Access Doors:
a. Comply with NFPA 96.
b. Comply with UL 1978.
C. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable.
2.04 DUCT TEST HOLES
A. Temporary Test Holes: Cut or drill in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches, neoprene plugs, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist-on metal caps.
2.05 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTORS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Ductmate Industries, Inc, a DMI Company: www.ductmate.com/#sle.
B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) and as indicated.
C. Flexible Duct Connections (Indoors): Fabric crimped into metal edging strip.
1. Fabric: UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A, minimum density 30 oz per sq yd.
a. Net Fabric Width: Approximately 2 inches wide.
2. Metal: 3 inches wide, 24 gauge, 0.0239 inch thick galvanized steel.
D. Flexible Duct Connections (Outdoors): Fabric crimped into metal edging strip.
1. Fabric: Ventfabrics Ventlon UL listed fire-retardant duPont's Hypalon coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A, minimum density 26 oz per sq yd, sunlight, ozone and weather resistant.
a. Net Fabric Width: Approximately 3 inches wide.
2. Metal: 3 inches wide, 24 gage thick galvanized steel.
2.06 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) and as indicated.
B. Single Blade Dampers for Round Ductwork and Rectangular Ductwork up to 10 inches in Height: 16 gauge steel minimum.
C. Multi-Blade Damper for Rectangular Ductwork: Fabricate of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 8 x 72 inch. Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel frame with suitable hardware; Model CD35 Manufactured by Ruskin. Provide Ruskin Model CD50 for installation in medium pressure ductwork and/or ducts with velocities exceeding 1500 FPM.
23 33 00 - 3 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
D. End Bearings: Except in round ducts 12 inches and smaller, provide end bearings, Ventlok Model 607. On multiple blade dampers, provide oil impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings.
E. Quadrants:
1. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers.
2. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or adapters.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 90A, and follow SMACNA (DCS). Refer to Section 23 31 00 for duct construction and pressure class.
B. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans, automatic dampers, at fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers, and elsewhere as indicated. Provide for cleaning kitchen exhaust ducts in accordance with NFPA 96. Provide minimum 8 by 8 inch size for hand access, size for shoulder access, and as indicated. Provide 4 by 4 inch for balancing dampers only. Review locations prior to fabrication.
C. Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes.
D. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, outside air and exhaust systems where branches are taken from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install minimum 2 duct widths from duct take-off.
E. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, grilles, and registers, regardless of whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, grille, or register assembly.
END OF SECTION
23 33 00 - 4 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
SECTION 26 01 10
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, ELECTRICAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 CONTRACT PROVISIONS
A. The requirements of this Section are in addition to the requirements of Division 1, General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This section describes the requirements for the electrical work includes, among others, the furnishing and installation of the following: 1. Power distribution system. 3. Grounding system. 4. Lighting and lighting control systems. 5. Wiring systems including power wiring to plumbing and HVAC and other misc. appliances and equipment.
B. Furnish and install all electrical equipment and systems as shown on the Drawings and as described in this Division of the Specifications to provide a complete and functional electrical installation. This work includes but is not limited to all material and labor required for installation of electrical and special systems complete as described herein this specification and drawings; and connections (and installation where not otherwise provided for) of electrical equipment furnished by others. Provide and install all items of equipment, devices, supports, etc., which are incidental to the major components shown on the Drawings or described in these Specifications.
1.03 RELATED WORK INCLUDED IN OTHER DIVISIONS
A. Finish painting except factory applied finishes and repair of factory finishes shall be provided in accordance with appropriate sections of this Specification. Coordinate "painting" requirements of this Division with other trades as required to assure timely and satisfactory completion of required work. In finished areas, all exposed raceway, boxes, galvanized steel box covers (where allowed), and other electrical "structure" shall be finished to match adjacent structures. Verify that all raceway openings are closed, and box covers are in place prior to finishing work done by others.
B. Examine the drawings and specification for mechanical equipment and provide electrical installation for heating, ventilation and air conditioning equipment, motors, pumps and associated motor starters and controls as described in Division 23.
C. Examine the Architectural drawings and specification for electrical appliances and equipment which may not be shown on the plans to include and provide electrical
26 01 10 - 1 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
installations as described in the architectural division of work.
D. Examine the Architectural drawings and provide all construction necessary to maintain the integrity of the fire rated barriers.
E. Examine the Architectural drawings and coordinate with the Architect to provide access doors, whether shown on drawings or not, where floors, walls, or ceiling must be penetrated for access to electrical equipment, outlet boxes, devices, etc., and as specified in this specification.
F. Provide and install, as part of the work described in this Division, all power and control wiring fed from a source of 30 Volts or more (i.e. all wiring except temperature control wiring) for mechanical equipment described in Division 23.
1.04 APPLICATION OF OTHER DIVISIONS
A. Where carpentry, masonry, concrete work, painting, etc., is required in the installation of equipment specified under this Division, the work shall be done in accordance with the applicable Division of these Specifications. This work could include for example: work associated with panelboard installation, equipment pads or bases, support structures, etc.
1.05 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The information presented in these Specifications and on the Drawings is intended to describe the utilitarian and physical aspects of the systems shown as well as the quality of the entire installation. All information is as complete and thorough as possible, but every condition or situation cannot be anticipated. Exact locations, dimensions, elevations, etc. must be determined "on the job" with careful attention to the "intent" of the Drawings and Specifications.
B. The above paragraph shall not be construed as to allow significant deviation from either the Drawings or Specifications without prior approval of the Architect, but minor changes in conduit routing or equipment locations may be required or desired due to specific conditions encountered. This work shall be accomplished in accordance with these Specifications and no "extra charges" are to be created for any unanticipated labor or material.
C. Any error or omissions of detail in either the drawings or the specifications shall not relieve the Contractor from correctly installing all materials necessary for complete and operating electrical systems.
D. Contractor shall inspect the site and verify all measurements and conditions. No extra compensation will be allowed because of differences between work shown on the drawings and measurements at the site. 1. The Drawings are diagrammatic in nature, but the locations of devices, equipment, outlets, and lighting fixtures are shown approximately where
26 01 10 - 2 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
installations are intended. Architectural, structural, mechanical, and other drawings shall be examined, noting all conditions that may affect this work. Report conflicting conditions to the Architect/Engineer for adjustment before proceeding with the work. Should the Contractor proceed with work without reporting the matter, he does so on his own responsibility and shall alter work if directed by the Architect/Engineer at his own expense.
E. Examine the architectural, structural, mechanical, plumbing, fire alarm and manufacturer's drawings for various equipment in order to determine exact routing and final terminations for all conduits and cables. Conduits shall be stubbed up as near as possible to equipment enclosure.
F. All equipment shall be located and installed so that it will be readily accessible for operation and maintenance. The Owner reserves the right to require minor changes in location of outlets or equipment, prior to rough in without incurring any additional cost or changes.
G. If significant departures from the Drawings or Specifications are considered necessary by the Contractor, details of the changes and the reasons therefore shall be submitted to the Architect as within thirty days after award of contract. Prior written acceptance of the Architect is required for these departures.
H. Clarification of plans and specifications for the purpose of facilitating construction, but not involving additional labor and materials, may be prepared during construction by the Architect/Engineer. Said revised plans and specifications shall become a part of the contract. The Contractor shall conform to the revised plans and specifications at no additional cost to the District.
1.06 CODES, STANDARDS, RULES AND REGULATIONS
A. All work and materials shall be in full accordance with the latest rules, codes, and/or regulations and not limited to the following:
B. NFPA 70 - California Electrical Code (CEC) - 2019 Edition
C. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code
D. NFPA 72 - Fire Alarm Code
E. Title 24 - State of California Administrative Code
F. Uniform Building Code (UBC) OR California Building Code (CBC)
G. City or County Electrical Code as applicable.
H. Utility rules and regulations.
26 01 10 - 3 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
I. Any applicable additional codes and regulatory documents effective at the project site.
J. Nothing on the Drawings or in the Specifications shall be construed to allow work not in conformance with these rules, codes, and regulations. 1. The Drawings and/or Specifications shall take precedence where work and material described therein exceeds that required by rules, codes, or regulations.
1.07 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
A. Follow the manufacturer's instructions when specific installation or connection details are not indicated or specified on the contract documents.
B. Notify the Architect/Engineer of conflicts between the manufacturer's instructions and installation or connection details prior to the installation of materials.
1.08 WORKMANSHIP
A. High quality workmanship shall be evidenced in the installation of all electrical equipment and materials. Use the National Electrical Contractors Association's "Standard of Installation" as a guide to the workmanship required. Be prepared to replace or repair any material or equipment damaged by or installed in a manner exhibiting evidence of poor workmanship.
1.09 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES
A. Examine the Electrical Drawings and refer to the Drawings and Specifications describing other work to be accomplished. Verify and coordinate prior to bid. Continue to coordinate work planning and all work in the field to avoid conflicts, errors, and/or delays. No compensation will be allowed for extra work necessitated by lack of coordination.
1.10 AUTHORITY OF THE ARCHITECT
A. As used in this paragraph only, the word "Architect" shall mean the Architect of record or his designated representative.
B. The authority of the Architect shall be absolute with respect to all performance under this Specification. In case of dispute, the decision of the Architect shall be final.
C. Where optional materials, methods, or installation techniques are allowed under the provisions of this Specification, they may be used at the discretion of the Architect. The Architect may require specific materials, methods, or techniques to be used in specific situations where use of other materials, methods, or techniques might in his judgment result in loss of aesthetics, accidental damage, life safety hazard, or loss of utility over the system design lifetime.
26 01 10 - 4 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
D. No additional charges will be allowed for work or material require to be supplied under the conditions of this paragraph unless the need for such material or work could not have been anticipated by thorough study of the site, Drawings, and Specifications and knowledge of all applicable codes, laws, and ordinances.
1.11 EXAMINATION OF THE SITE
A. The contractor is required to visit the site of construction prior to bid to determine existing conditions and their effect upon the work he will be required to perform. No additional compensation will be allowed for any extra expenses incurred by failure to detect and evaluate all existing conditions that will affect his work to be included in the bid to accomplish this contract document's goal.
1.12 STRUCTURAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. Secure all anchors for electrical equipment in a manner, which will not decrease the structural value of any structure to an unsafe level. Install all equipment, fixtures, and etc. to resist seismic movements. Inform the Architect in advance and provide drawings of any proposed modifications to the structure that involves cutting or patching of concrete, masonry, steel, or wood in this project.
1.13 PERMITS, FEES, AND, INSPECTIONS
A. Obtain all permits and licenses as required and pay all fees incidental to construction.
B. Inspections required by prevailing Local Authorities, and/or ordinances, shall be coordinated and arranged by the contractor. Provide the Architect with a schedule of inspections, where applicable, and submit all certificates of inspection to the Architect.
C. The Contractor shall cooperate with the Architect and shall provide assistance at all times for the inspection of the electrical work. Remove covers, operate equipment, or perform any reasonable work, which, in the opinion of the Architect, will be necessary to determine the quality or adequacy of the work. Work shall not be closed in or covered before inspection and approval by the Architect. Cost of uncovering and making repairs where un-inspected work has been closed in shall be borne by the Contractor. If any material does not conform with these specifications the Contractor shall, within three days after being notified by the Architect, remove the materials from the premises.
1.14 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver materials and equipment to project site in manufacturer's original packaging with labeling showing product name, brand, model, project name, address, and Contractor's name. Store in a location as agreeable to District. Secure material from weather or accidental damage.
26 01 10 - 5 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
1.15 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. Instruct the District as to function, operation, maintenance, and adjustment of each system and piece of equipment provided.
1.16 RECORD DRAWING
A. The Contractor shall keep a separate set of Electrical Drawings at the job site to be used as RECORD Drawings. These Drawings are to be kept current and in a neat and clean condition at all times. They are to be available for inspection by the Architect or Engineer at any time during site visitations. These Drawings shall be "red lined" to indicate all changes in equipment, device, and outlet locations; and to indicate the true locations of all concealed or underground work where different from that shown on the Drawings. Each sheet of this set shall be clearly and permanently marked "RECORD DRAWINGS".
B. Upon completion of the project and prior to final payment, transfer all RECORD DRAWINGS information to the provided original drawings. All information shall be clearly drawn with “RED” ink. The drawings shall be scanned, 100% edited, and converted into an AutoCAD “.dwg” version 2012 (or higher) electronic file. Deliver the original, final sets, and electronic files (flash drive) to the Architect for review and delivery to the District/Owner.
1.17 GUARANTEE
A. All electrical work, material, and equipment shall be guaranteed to be free from defects in workmanship or material for a period of two (2) year from the date of final acceptance. Repair or replace all such defects in a timely manner and any damage to the owner's property resulting from such defect or repair thereof. All equipment and material provided, and all work accomplished under the requirements of this section shall be at no expense to the District.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Unless specifically indicated otherwise, all material shall be new and free from defects; it shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories where applicable. Like items shall be of the same manufacturer (except lighting fixtures - which shall be as specified).
B. Except as noted otherwise, where material of a particular manufacturer is specified, the intent is to describe the quality and function of the item. The term "...or acceptable equal" is implied. A substitution of any of these items will require that the item be presented in a submittal whether specifically listed in the "Submittals" paragraph below or not.
2.02 SUBMITTALS
26 01 10 - 6 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
A. Material submittals shall be complete and submitted all at the same time. The individual groups of submittal types (e.g.: lighting fixtures, wiring devices, distribution equipment, etc.) MUST be prefaced with a list of contents identifying each item by its project name or symbol, manufacturer, and complete catalog number. Each copy of each submittal group shall have the list of contents attached. These lists will be used to report submittal comments. The Contractor is responsible for submitting this information in a timely manner so that material may be ordered early enough to meet the construction schedule. If material is not ordered in time for whatever reason, pay such premium prices and special handling charges as are required to meet the construction schedule. No substitution of an "accepted" item will be allowed due to failure to plan for adequate material procurement lead time.
B. Shop drawings shall be drawn to scale or completely dimensioned and shall give all information required to completely describe the item. The Contractor shall carefully check all the shop drawings for compliance with these specifications and the Plans.
C. If the shop drawings show variations from the Contract requirements because of standard shop practice or other reasons, the Contractor shall make specific mention of such variations in order that if (acceptable) suitable action may be taken for proper adjustment of the Contract. The Contractor will not be relieved of the responsibility for executing the work in accordance with the Contract, even though the shop drawings have been reviewed.
D. Work requiring shop drawings shall not be started before receipt of the Architect's review and acceptance.
E. The Architect's/Engineer's review of the submitted materials, items and shop drawings are for general compliance with the plans and specifications and general design and arrangement only. Therefore, it shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors of any sort in the materials, items, shop drawings or schedules. The Contractor shall verify all dimensions and job site conditions affecting the work and shall be responsible for furnishing and installing the proper materials required by the Contract, whether or not indicated on the drawings and specifications.
F. As a minimum, submittals are required for the following items: 1. RACEWAY COMPONENTS 2. WIRE AND CABLE 3. WIRING DEVICES 4. PANELBOARDS 6. PULL BOXES 7. SAFETY SWITCHES, DISCONNECTS AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 8. LIGHTING FIXTURES, CONTROL SYSTEMS 10. TERMINAL CABINETS
2.03 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Specific brand names and catalog numbers are used to describe materials in order to establish of performance and quality.
26 01 10 - 7 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
B. Only one substitution will be considered for any item. Substitute materials must be equal in quality and function to that specified. Allowance of a substitution does not permit any reduction of system performance or utility, and the Contractor is responsible for additional costs incurred due to use of a substituted item. If the proposed substitute item is "rejected", the specified item shall be provided (re-submittal required) without further discussions or delay.
C. Any Contractor's proposed substitution of material, article, or method in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer are equal to that specified will be accepted, provided the Contractor submits a single written requests, in triplicate, to the Architect, with the following information for each item:
D. Name of Manufacturer or supplier.
E. Trade or brand names.
F. Type, model, style, and/or catalog number. 1. Size or capacity rating.
G. After receipt of a written request from the contractor, the engineer of record will review product substitutions fourteen (14) days prior to the bid date. If system substitutions are submitted after the award of the project contract, the analysis for the whole system substitution will be charged to the contractor at senior engineer hourly rates.
H. The decision of the Architect/Engineer shall govern as to what is equal to the item specified in the plans and specifications. Equality will be judge on the basis of the following: 1. Conformance with description or performance required. 2. Equal in quality. 3. Comparable in appearance and artistic effect where these are in considerations. 4. Comparable operation, maintenance and performance. 5. Equal in longevity and service under conditions of climate and usage. 6. Conformance with space allocations and requirements for operations from in details and construction of related work. 7. Conformance with all applicable codes and regulations.
I. If the Architect/Engineer considers it necessary, tests to determine the quality of the proposed materials shall be made, at the expense of the Contractor, by an unbiased laboratory, satisfactory to the Architect.
2.04 ENCLOSURES
A. Provide enclosures suitable for the specific type of location in which they are installed. 1. Provide NEMA 1 or NEMA 12 boxes and enclosures for dry locations. Dry locations are all indoor areas that do not fall within the definitions below for wet or damp locations. 2. Provide NEMA 3R boxes and enclosures for wet locations. Wet locations are all locations exposed to weather, whether under a roof or not.
26 01 10 - 8 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
3. Provide NEMA 4 boxes and enclosures for damp locations. Damp locations are all indoor spaces wholly or partially underground or any area subject to water spray.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. All equipment shall be set square and plumb, securely mounted, adequately supported, and permanent. Provide workspace around items of electrical equipment as required by California Electrical Code (CEC). In general, equipment is to be installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; but the requirements of these specifications shall take precedence where conflicts exist.
B. WIRING METHODS: The cables and conductors of all systems specified in the Specification are required to be installed in raceway.
3.02 ELECTRICAL WORK FOR EQUIPMENT PROVIDED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
A. Install power conductors and terminate on equipment provided under other specification sections. Verify specific requirements.
B. Install and terminate electrical controls as described on the Electrical Drawings (For mechanical equipment specified in Division 23).
C. Line voltage control wiring of exhaust fans is to be accomplished under this Division. The controlling device may be specified elsewhere.
D. Provide and install all disconnect/safety switches and motor starters except those devices specified to be furnished with equipment specified elsewhere.
E. Unless provided for in another Division, install all items of electrical equipment provided by others.
F. Assist others in equipment testing to verify that wiring and connections made under this Division are correct.
3.03 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. Nameplates shall be installed on all items of electrical equipment as follows: panelboards, terminal cabinets, contactors, motor control switches, wall switches (where noted on the Drawings), motor starters provided under this Division where the function is not immediately obvious, and safety switches.
B. The nameplate shall identify the item by Drawing name where applicable and describe its
26 01 10 - 9 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
use or function in this installation.
C. Permanently mark all utility outlets to show source of power panel and circuit breaker number.
3.04 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
A. Excavation and backfill shall be accomplished as required for installation of electrical equipment as shown on the Drawings. Restore all surfaces, roadways, walks, etc., and any existing underground structures which might be disturbed during this work to their original condition in a manner acceptable to the Architect.
B. Trenches shall be straight except where otherwise indicated. Depth shall be as noted on the Drawings and at least as required to provide the minimum cover specified by applicable codes and regulations for the equipment installed. Bottom of trench shall be smooth and free of any rock points. Place a 4" sand bed in trench if these conditions cannot be met with native material.
C. Backfill shall be clean and free of rocks and debris. Backfill is to be tamped in 6" layers to nominal 95% compaction using a mechanical tamper manufactured specifically for this purpose. In an area of engineered fill or other area of specified compaction, backfill shall be compacted to match that specified for that area.
D. At a depth of 12" below finished grade and at least 6" above installed equipment, lay a 6" wide yellow warning tape on the compacted backfill for the full length of the trench. Do not stretch the tape. Use Brady "Identoline" stating: "CAUTION BURIED ELECTRICAL LINE". Installation under building slabs is not required unless noted otherwise.
E. If at any time during a period of one year dating from the date of final acceptance of the project, there shall be any settlement of conduit trenches, the Architect may notify the Contractor to immediately provide additional fill and to make such repairs or replacements in paving, planting, or structures, as may be deemed necessary at the Contractor's expense
F. Cooperate and coordinate with others in planning for and execution of all trench work. 1. The Contractor is expected to exercise due care when excavating in an area of existing utilities to avoid damage to these facilities. Where it can be determined that underground facilities are likely to exist (either from the Drawings or inspection of the site), the Contractor is required to determine the exact locations of these existing installations. Damage to existing facilities, due to failure to properly accomplish the above, shall be repaired at the Contractors expense to the approval by the Architect and satisfaction of the District. 2. CALL AN UNDERGROUND SERVICE FIRM BEFORE TRENCHING, CALL U.S.A. (800) 624-2444.
3.05 SEALING PENETRATIONS
26 01 10 - 10 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
A. Flash and counter flash roof and wall penetrations with equipment manufactured for the purpose and as described in other Divisions of these Specifications or as Directed by the Architect. Apply mastic as required to seal absolutely watertight.
B. Conduits penetrating floor slabs or block or concrete walls shall be grouted and sealed watertight.
3.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Obtain the Architect's acceptance prior to cutting existing surfaces or surfaces under construction. All such surfaces must be repaired or patched to the satisfaction of the Architect.
3.07 EQUIPMENT ANCHORING
A. Seismic Withstand Requirements: Freestanding or wall-hung equipment shall be anchored in place by methods, which will meet the requirements of the Uniform Building code for seismic loads. The CONTRACTOR shall submit calculations in accordance with “Contractor Submittals”, for the design of the anchoring systems for all equipment, including panels, transformers, etc. in excess of 250 pounds. Calculations shall be performed, signed and stamped by a Structural Engineer or a Civil Engineer experienced in structural design and licensed in the State of California. The calculation shall provide an analysis of lateral and overturning forces and shall include a factor of safety against overturning equal to 1.5. The calculation shall also provide an analysis of both the anchoring system and the foundation or wall system to receive the anchor loads and shall show that the foundation is capable of resisting all anchor loads. Submittal shall include data on attachment hardware and methods that will satisfy withstand criteria.
3.08 PROTECTION CLEANING AND REPAIRS
A. All electrical equipment shall be protected from damage or degradation during construction. Electrical equipment stored or installed shall be protected from dust, water, or damage from other sources.
B. After all other work has been accomplished, such as plastering, painting, etc., and prior to final review by the Architect; all electrical equipment, especially equipment enclosures, panelboards, switchboards, and lighting fixtures shall be thoroughly cleaned (inside and out) of all dirt, water, grease, plaster, paint, or other construction debris. All surfaces shall be clean and in "new" condition. All scratches, dents, marks, cracks, etc., shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Architect or the equipment shall be replaced at no additional cost.
3.09 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT DELIVERABLES
A. Retain and safeguard all detachable and spare devices, equipment, and literature (O&M manuals, instruction books, wiring diagrams, test reports, keys, fixtures, etc.) until
26 01 10 - 11 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
completion of work. At this time, all items will be delivered to the District as directed by the Architect.
3.10 TESTS
A. Prior to energization of equipment, check the insulation resistance of listed circuits, with a 500 volt “Megger”.
B. Take precaution during the testing period to ensure the safety of personnel and equipment.
C. Test all wiring for continuity and grounds before any fixtures or equipment are connected. Where such tests indicate faulty installation or other defects, the fault(s) shall be located and repaired at the Contractor's expense. The repaired installation shall then be retested.
D. Verify rotation of all three phase motors and reconnect if necessary.
E. Verify the resistance of the grounding electrode system(s).
F. Balance all loads on each panelboard and all other types of distribution equipment as applicable.
[END OF SECTION 26 01 10]
26 01 10 - 12 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
SECTION 26 05 19
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES (600 V AND LESS)
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Wire and cable for 600 volts and less.
B. Wiring connectors and connections.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting; National Electrical Contractors Association
B. NETA STD ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association
C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association, 2017 with 2019 California Electrical Code amendments.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide for each cable assembly type.
C. Test Reports: Indicate procedures and values obtained.
D. Design Data: Indicate voltage drop and ampacity calculations for aluminum conductors substituted for copper conductors.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency.
F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and circuits.
26 05 19 - 1 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience and with service facilities within 100 miles of Project.
C. Products: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 WIRING REQUIREMENTS
A. Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire in raceway.
B. Exposed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire in raceway.
C. Above Accessible Ceilings: Use only building wire in raceway.
D. Wet or Damp Interior Locations: Use only building wire with Type insulation in raceway.
E. Exterior Locations: Use only building wire with Type THWN insulation in raceway.
F. Underground Installations: Use only building wire with Type THWN insulation in raceway.
G. Use solid conductor for feeders and branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller.
H. Use stranded conductors for control circuits.
I. Use conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits.
J. Use conductor not smaller than 16 AWG for control circuits.
K. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuits longer than 75 feet.
L. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 277 volt branch circuits longer than 200 feet.
M. Conductor sizes are based on copper unless indicated as aluminum or "AL".
2.02 WIRE MANUFACTURERS (LISTED IN ALPHABETICALLY ORDER ONLY AND NOT NECESSARY BY PREFERENCE)
26 05 19 - 2 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
A. Cerro Wire Inc: www.cerrowire.com.
B. Industrial Wire & Cable, Inc: www.iewc.com.
C. Southwire Company: www.southwire.com.
D. Or Equal.
E. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
2.03 BUILDING WIRE
A. Description: Single conductor insulated wire.
B. Conductor: Copper. 1. For Sizes Smaller Than 4 AWG: Copper. 2. For Sizes 4 AWG and Larger: Copper.
C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.
D. Insulation: NFPA 70, Type THW.
2.04 SERVICE ENTRANCE CABLE
A. Description: NFPA 70, Type SE.
B. Conductor: Copper. 1. For Sizes Smaller Than 4 AWG: Copper. 2. For Sizes 4 AWG and Larger: Copper.
C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.
D. Insulation: Type RH.
2.05 WIRING CONNECTORS
A. Solderless Pressure Connectors:
B. Compression Connectors:
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
26 05 19 - 3 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
A. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather.
B. Verify that mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.
C. Verify that raceway installation is complete and supported.
D. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install wire and cable securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1.
B. Route wire and cable as required to meet project conditions. 1. Wire and cable routing indicated is approximate unless dimensioned. 2. Where wire and cable destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing and lengths required. 3. Include wire and cable of lengths required to install connected devices within 10 ft of location shown.
C. Use wiring methods indicated.
D. Pull all conductors into raceway at same time.
E. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire 4 AWG and larger.
F. Protect exposed cable from damage.
G. Support cables above accessible ceiling, using spring metal clips or metal cable ties to support cables from structure or ceiling suspension system. Do not rest cable on ceiling panels.
H. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors.
I. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards.
J. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors.
K. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible temperature rise.
L. Where aluminum conductors are allowed for use as indicated on plans, terminate
26 05 19 - 4 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
aluminum conductors with tin-plated aluminum-bodied compression connectors only. Fill with anti- oxidant compound before installing conductor.
M. Use split bolt connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger. Tape uninsulated conductors and connector with electrical tape to 150 percent of insulation rating of conductor.
N. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor splices and taps, 8 AWG and smaller.
O. Use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps, 10 AWG and smaller.
P. Trench and backfill for direct burial cable installation as specified in Sections 312316 and 31 2323. Install warning tape along entire length of direct burial cable, within 3 inches of grade, as specified in Section 260553.
Q. Identify and color code wire and cable under provisions of Section 260553. Identify each conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 014000.
B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA STD ATS, except Section 4.
C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.3.2.
[END OF SECTION 26 05 19]
26 05 19 - 5 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
SECTION 26 05 26
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Grounding and bonding components.
B. Provide all components necessary to complete the grounding system(s) consisting of: 1. Metal underground water pipe. 3. Metal frame of the building.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NETA STD ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association
B. NETA STD ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association
C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association, 2017 with 2019 California Electrical Code amendments.
1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Grounding System Resistance: 5 ohms.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements for submittals procedures.
B. Test Reports: Indicate overall resistance to ground and resistance of each electrode.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Quality Assurance. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.
D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and grounding electrodes.
26 05 26 - 1 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
E. Certificate of Compliance: Indicate approval of installation by authority having jurisdiction.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience with service facilities within 100 miles of Project.
C. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Cooper Power Systems: www.cooperpower.com.
B. Framatome Connectors International: www.fciconnect.com.
C. Or Equal..
D. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 ELECTRODES
A. Manufacturers: 1. Cooper Power Systems: www.cooperpower.com. 2. Framatome Connectors International: www.fciconnect.com. 3. Or Equal.. 4. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
B. Rod Electrodes: Copper. 1. Diameter: 3/4 inch. 2. Length: 10 feet.
C. Foundation Electrodes: 2/0 AWG. unless noted on plan.
2.03 CONNECTORS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Mechanical Connectors: Bronze.
B. Exothermic Connections:
26 05 26 - 2 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
C. Wire: Stranded copper.
D. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Size to meet NFPA 70 requirements.
E. Grounding Well: 1. Well Pipe: 8 inch by 24 inch long clay tile pipe with belled end. 2. Well Cover: Cast iron with legend "GROUND" embossed on cover.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work.
B. Verify that final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod electrodes.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install ground electrodes at locations indicated. Install additional rod electrodes as required to achieve specified resistance to ground.
B. Provide grounding well pipe with cover at each rod location. Install well pipe top flush with finished grade.
C. Install 4 AWG bare copper wire in foundation footing where indicated.
D. Provide grounding electrode conductor and connect to reinforcing steel in foundation footing where indicated. Bond steel together.
E. Provide bonding to meet requirements described in Quality Assurance.
F. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Provide separate, insulated conductor within each feeder and branch circuit raceway. Terminate each end on suitable lug, bus, or bushing.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Provide field inspection in accordance with Section 014000.
B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA STD ATS except Section 4.
C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.13.
[END OF SECTION 26 05 26]
26 05 26 - 3 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
SECTION 26 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Conduit and equipment supports.
B. Anchors and fasteners.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ICC-ES AC01 - Acceptance Criteria for Expansion Anchors in Masonry Elements
B. ICC-ES AC106 - Acceptance Criteria for Predrilled Fasteners (Screw Anchors) in Masonry Elements
C. ICC-ES AC193 - Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements
D. ICC-ES AC308 - Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete Elements
E. NECA 1 - Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting; National Electrical Contractors Association
F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association, 2017 with 2019 California Electrical Code amendments..
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer’s catalog data for fastening systems.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
26 05 29 - 1 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS (LISTED IN ALPHABETICALLY ORDER ONLY AND NOT NECESSARY BY PREFERENCE)
A. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com.
B. Threaded Rod Company: www.threadedrod.com.
C. Or Equal.
D. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 SUPPORTS
A. Pipe hangers for individual conduits shall be factory made, consisting of a pipe ring and threaded suspension rod. The pipe ring shall be malleable iron, split and hinged, or shall be springable wrought steel. Rings shall be bolted to or interlocked with the suspension rod socket.
B. Pipe racks for groups of parallel conduits shall be constructed of galvanized structural steel preformed channels of length as required, suspended on threaded rods and secured thereto with nuts above and below the cross bar.
C. Factory made pipe straps shall be one hole malleable iron or two hole galvanized clamps.
D. Supporting rods shall be at least 3/8" diameter and channel shall be at least 3/4" deep. Supporting hardware shall be galvanized steel.
2.03 MATERIALS
A. Hangers, Supports, Anchors, and Fasteners - General: Corrosion-resistant materials of size and type adequate to carry the loads of equipment and conduit, including weight of wire in conduit.
B. Supports: Fabricated of structural steel or formed steel members; galvanized.
C. Anchors and Fasteners:
D. Concrete Structural Elements: Use precast inserts, expansion anchors, powder-actuated anchors, or preset inserts.
26 05 29 - 2 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
E. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps, steel spring clips, steel ramset fasteners, or welded fasteners.
F. Concrete Surfaces: Use self-drilling anchors or expansion anchors.
G. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners.
H. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors or preset inserts.
I. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws.
J. Wood Elements: Use wood screws.
K. Fastener Types: 1. Concrete Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193. 2. Masonry Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC01. 3. Concrete Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193. 4. Masonry Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC106. 5. Other Types: As required. 6. Manufacturers: a. Powers Fasteners, Inc: www.powers.com. b. Or Equal..
L. Formed Steel Channel:
M. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install hangers and supports as required to adequately and securely support electrical system components, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1. 1. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, or conduit. 2. Obtain permission from the Architect and the Structural Engineer before drilling or cutting structural members.
B. Rigidly weld support members or use hexagon-head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts.
C. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors.
D. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards 1 inch off wall.
26 05 29 - 3 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
E. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessed in hollow partitions.
[END OF SECTION 26 05 29]
26 05 29 - 4 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
SECTION 26 05 34
CONDUIT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Conduit, fittings and conduit bodies.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
D. Section 260529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
C. Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems.
D. Section 260537 - Boxes.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI C80.1 - American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC)
B. ANSI C80.3 - American National Standard for Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT)
C. ANSI C80.5 - American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Aluminum Conduit (ERAC)
D. NECA 1 - Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting; National Electrical Contractors Association
E. NECA 101 - Standard for Installing Steel Conduit (Rigid, IMC, EMT); National Electrical Contractors Association
F. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and Cable; National Electrical Manufacturers Association
G. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit; National Electrical Manufacturers Association
H. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubing and Conduit; National Electrical Manufacturers Association
26 05 34 - 1 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
I. NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing; National Electrical Manufacturers Association
J. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association, 2017 with 2019 California Electrical Code amendments..
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements for submittals procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide for metallic conduit, flexible metal conduit, liquidtight flexible metal conduit, metallic tubing, nonmetallic conduit, fittings, and conduit bodies.
C. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual routing of conduits larger than 1 1/4 inches.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Accept conduit on site. Inspect for damage.
B. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate covering.
C. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight.
26 05 34 - 2 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS
A. Conduit Size: Comply with NFPA 70. 1. Minimum Size: 3/4 inch unless otherwise specified.
B. Underground Installations: 1. More than 5 Feet from Foundation Wall: Use plastic coated conduit or thickwall non-metallic conduit. 2. Within 5 Feet from Foundation Wall: Use rigid steel conduit. 3. In or Under Slab on Grade: Use plastic coated conduit or thickwall non-metallic conduit. 4. Minimum Size: 1 inch.
C. Outdoor Locations Above Grade: Use intermediate metal conduit or rigid steel conduit.
D. In Slab Above Grade: 1. Use intermediate metal conduit or thickwall nonmetallic conduit. 2. Maximum Size Conduit in Slab: 3/4 inch; 1/2 inch for conduits crossing each other.
E. Wet and Damp Locations: Use intermediate metal conduit or rigid steel conduit.
F. Dry Locations: 1. Concealed: Use electrical metallic tubing. 2. Exposed: Use intermediate metal conduit or rigid steel for installation up to 8 feet.
2.02 METAL CONDUIT
A. Manufacturers: 1. Allied Tube & Conduit: www.alliedtube.com. 2. Beck Manufacturing, Inc: www.beckmfg.com. 3. Wheatland Tube Company: www.wheatland.com. 4. Or Equal.. 5. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
C. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid steel.
D. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; material to match conduit.
26 05 34 - 3 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
2.03 PVC COATED METAL CONDUIT
A. Manufacturers: 1. Allied Tube & Conduit: www.alliedtube.com. 2. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com. 3. Robroy Industries: www.robroy.com. 4. Or Equal. 5. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
B. Description: NEMA RN 1; rigid steel conduit with external PVC coating.
C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; steel fittings with external PVC coating to match conduit.
2.04 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
A. Manufacturers: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc: www.afcweb.com. 2. Electri-Flex Company: www.electriflex.com. 3. International Metal Hose: www.metalhose.com. 4. Or Equal.. 5. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
B. Description: Interlocked steel construction.
C. Fittings: NEMA FB 1.
2.05 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
A. Manufacturers: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc: www.afcweb.com. 2. Electri-Flex Company: www.electriflex.com. 3. International Metal Hose: www.metalhose.com. 4. Or Equal.. 5. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
B. Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket.
C. Fittings: NEMA FB 1.
2.06 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
A. Manufacturers: 1. Allied Tube & Conduit: www.alliedtube.com. 2. Beck Manufacturing, Inc: www.beckmfg.com. 3. Wheatland Tube Company: www.wheatland.com.
26 05 34 - 4 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
4. Or Equal.
B. Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing.
C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; steel or malleable iron compression type.
2.07 NONMETALLIC TUBING SHALL NOT BE USED FOR THIS PROJECT, NO EXCEPTIONS.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on drawings.
B. Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough-in.
C. Conduit routing is shown on drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as required to complete wiring system.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install conduit securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1.
B. Install steel conduit as specified in NECA 101.
C. All conduits shall be run concealed in walls and/or ceiling. Where conduits can not be run concealed in wall and/or ceiling space, the Contractor shall coordinate with the architectural and structural plans and the Architect for installing and routing of exposed conduits.
D. Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation.
E. Support conduit using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, and split hangers.
F. Group related conduits; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel; provide space on each for 25 percent additional conduits.
G. Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces under provisions of Section 260529.
H. Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports.
26 05 34 - 5 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
I. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires.
J. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance.
K. Route exposed conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls.
L. Route conduit installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls.
M. Route conduit in and under slab from point-to-point.
N. Do not cross conduits in slab.
O. Maintain adequate clearance between conduit and piping.
P. Cut conduit square using saw or pipecutter; de-burr cut ends.
Q. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely.
R. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe nonmetallic conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for 20 minutes, minimum.
S. Use conduit hubs to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp and wet locations.
T. Install no more than equivalent of three 90 degree bends between boxes. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Use hydraulic one shot bender to fabricate bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch size.
U. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system.
V. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit crosses seismic.
W. Provide suitable pull string in each empty conduit except sleeves and nipples.
X. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture.
Y. Ground and bond conduit under provisions of Section 260526.
Z. Identify conduit under provisions of Section 260553.
26 05 34 - 6 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
3.03 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 078400.
[END OF SECTION 26 05 34]
26 05 34 - 7 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
SECTION 26 05 37
BOXES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Wall and ceiling outlet boxes.
B. Pull and junction boxes.
C. Underground boxes.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 078400 - Firestopping.
B. Section 262726 - Wiring Devices: Wall plates in finished areas.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NECA 1 - Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting; National Electrical Contractors Association
B. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and Cable; National Electrical Manufacturers Association
C. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports; National Electrical Manufacturers Association
D. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical Manufacturers Association
E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association, 2019 with California Electrical Code amendments.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
26 05 37 - 1 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Products: Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
C. Contractor shall size all boxes and enclosures per applicable Electrical Code(s), U.L. listed, and suitable for the conditions of installation. Each box and enclosure shall be provided having sufficient volume, proper dimensions, and geometry for the device(s) to be installed and the number of wires and conduits at that location.
D. Provide boxes and enclosures suitable for the specific type of location in which they are installed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Appleton Electric: www.appletonelec.com.
B. Arc-Co./Division of Arcade Technology; www.arc-co.com.
C. Unity Manufacturing: www.unitymfg.com.
D. Or Equal.
E. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 OUTLET BOXES
A. Provide all boxes with extensions, device rings, fittings, hangers, clamps, terminals, studs, etc. as required for the specific conditions of each installation.
B. Provide galvanized, one piece pressed steel or welded gang type in dry locations. Use boxes manufactured for the number and types of devices shown on the Drawings and suitable for the type of construction involved. Use of sectional boxes with removable partitions will not be allowed only to separate switch legs of 120 V and 277 V system.
C. Boxes installed in concrete or block walls shall be masonry boxes approved for the application and shall be listed concrete tight. Masonry boxes shall not be less than 3-1/2" deep unless required by special circumstances and accepted by the Architect.
26 05 37 - 2 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
D. Provide cast steel or aluminum boxes with threaded hubs and covers with gaskets in wet locations.
E. Wiring Device, (switch or outlet), wall or ceiling in frame construction - Galvanized one piece pressed steel or welded type, two gang minimum, with raised device ring cover suitable for the conditions encountered. Single gang boxes may be used only where space limitations are encountered. In concrete or block construction, single gang masonry boxes not less than 3-1/2" deep may be used
F Recessed boxes in framed walls or ceilings must be positioned such that the box opening or the raised device ring surface will be flush with the finished wall surface to avoid "loosely" mounted devices. Carefully examine the Architectural Drawings to determine the thickness of the wall material(s) which must be penetrated by the box or device ring and position the box accordingly.
G. Box device rings must be raised at least 5/8". Device rings raised 1/4" or ½" will not be allowed.
2.03 COVER PLATES
A. Cover plates shall be provided for every box shall be nylon, unless noted otherwise.
1. Smooth Nylon - Arrow Hart (70,000 series) or Hubbell ("P" series). Unless otherwise noted, use nylon in all finished areas. Color to be selected or accepted by the Architect.
2. Stainless Steel - Type 302 - Pass and Seymore 93,000 series, Arrow Hart 93,000 series. Use stainless steel plates only where noted on the Drawings or elsewhere in these Specifications.
3. Pressed Galvanized Steel - In unfinished service areas and rooms and in finished areas where surface raceway systems are used. Flat galvanized steel plates may only be used in attic and soffit spaces not normally occupied; or in industrial or service areas above 8'-0" above finished floor levels.
B. Smooth Plastic - shall NOT be used on this project.
C. Plates for isolated ground receptacles shall be orange nylon with 1/4" black letters indicating "isolated ground" (or "computer only" if noted). Hubbell PJ7CO (single device or) PJ8CO (duplex).
D. Weatherproof covers shall be provided specifically intended for installation on vertically or horizontally mounted devices as applicable.
2.04 PULL BOXES AND ENCLOSURES
26 05 37 - 3 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
A. All pull boxes and enclosures shall be code gauge galvanized steel. All boxes and enclosures shall be approved for use as pull boxes, U.L. listed, and sized per applicable Electrical Codes. Large pull boxes and all equipment enclosures shall be NEMA rated.
1. Provide NEMA 1 or NEMA 12 boxes and enclosures for dry locations. Dry locations are all indoor areas that do not fall within the definitions below for wet or damp locations.
2. Provide NEMA 3R boxes and enclosures for wet locations. Wet locations are all locations exposed to weather, whether under a roof or not.
3. Provide NEMA 4 boxes and enclosures for damp locations. Damp locations are all indoor spaces wholly or partially underground or any area subject to water spray.
4. Pull boxes installed below modular/portable buildings in crawl spaces shall be of the type consistent with the type of conduit installed. Galvanized boxes attached to the bottom of floor supports when EMT is provided and Carlon boxes when PVC conduit is provided.
B. Underground boxes shall be prefabricated reinforced concrete, Christy Concrete Products Inc. or accepted equal.
1. Small underground boxes shall be provided with slab bottom with drain hole, conduit knockouts, and extensions as required. Place a minimum of 18" pea gravel in excavation below slab base. Covers shall be reinforced pre-cast concrete in walkways, planters, or lawn areas and traffic rated covers in paved areas or locations subject to vehicular traffic. All covers shall be secured in place with standard nonferrous hold-down bolts and hardware. Covers are to be permanently marked to indicate contents, e.g.: ELECTRICAL, TELEPHONE, SIGNAL, ETC.
2. Large underground (structures larger than 48 inches cubed) shall include full bottom and sides and central drain sump. Covers for pull boxes shall be traffic rated reinforced concrete or heavy duty steel. All covers shall be labeled, i.e. ELECTRICAL, SIGNAL, TELEPHONE, etc...
a. Cable pulling-in irons shall be furnished as required. Cable racks or supports shall be furnished for units equal to or larger than 48-inch cubed. All cable racks, arms and supports in pull boxes shall be yellow glass reinforced nylon.
26 05 37 - 4 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install boxes securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1.
B. Install in locations as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections, and as required by NFPA 70.
C. Coordinate installation of outlet boxes for equipment connected under Section 262717.
D. Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights indicated.
E. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. 1. Adjust box locations up to 10 feet if required to accommodate intended purpose.
F. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Section 262726.
G. Maintain headroom and present neat mechanical appearance.
H. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only.
I. Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire.
J. Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 078400.
K. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and backsplashes.
L. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as shown on reflected ceiling plan.
M. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices.
N. Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas.
O. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening.
P. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6 inches separation. Provide minimum 24 inches separation in fire-rated and acoustic rated walls.
Q. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to
26 05 37 - 5 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
allow for surface finish thickness.
R. Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs.
S. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness.
T. Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box.
U. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires.
V. Support boxes independently of conduit, except cast box that is connected to two rigid metal conduits both supported within 12 inches of box.
W. Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box.
X. Use gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets.
Y. Use cast outlet box in exterior locations exposed to the weather and wet locations.
Z. Use cast floor boxes for installations in slab on grade; formed steel boxes are acceptable for other installations.
AA. Large Pull Boxes: Use hinged enclosure in interior dry locations, surface-mounted cast metal box in other locations.
3.02 OUTLET AND PULL BOXES
A. Boxes shall be rigidly supported independently of the conduit system. They shall be rigidly secured to structure with wood screws, bolts and expansion anchors, or machine bolts and locknuts as appropriate.
B. Boxes in block walls shall be placed near the center of a block cell at the upper or lower (long) edge of the block. Required block openings shall be saw cut (three cuts required - See Architectural Details on the Drawings for additional information). Boxes shall be placed into the cut openings and rigidly grouted into place. The front edge of the box shall be flush with the finished wall surface. Verify all wall covering materials with the Architect prior to rough-in.
C. All boxes shall be plumb within 1/16" over the major dimension and flat on surfaces where surface mounting is indicated or flush to finished surfaces where recessed. Outlet box interiors and the installed wires are to be kept clean and protected from paint over-spray, rainwater, spackle, plaster, and other contamination and debris.
26 05 37 - 6 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
D. Switch and outlet wall boxes shall be installed to minimize sound transmission between adjacent rooms. Horizontally offset boxes mounted in separate rooms on a common wall to occupy separate stud spaces or block sections. Where separate stud spaces cannot be used, offset within a single stud space and separate the boxes with wall insulation batts. "Through wall" masonry boxes shall not be used in block walls except for specific approved applications where the space on one side of the wall is normally unoccupied.
E. All unused box openings shall be closed in an approved manner, and all boxes shall have suitable covers installed. Protect the interiors of all boxes from paint over-spray, plaster, moisture, and other construction debris.
F. Surface mounted boxes, where allowed in finished areas, shall be painted to match adjacent surfaces.
G. Local switches shall be located 48 inches above the floor unless otherwise noted on the drawings or in the specifications
H. Convenience outlets shall be located 18 inches above the finished floor unless otherwise noted on the drawings or in the specifications.
I. Changes in outlet locations of fixtures, wall switches, receptacles and special equipment found necessary due to interference with structure, pipes, ducts, etc. shall be reported to the Architect for approval. No additional compensation will be given for relocation due to field coordination changes.
J. All boxes shall be of proper code size for the number of wires or conduits passing through or terminating therein, but in no case shall any box be less than 4" square, unless specifically noted as smaller on the drawings. Covers shall be of the types most suitable for the fixture or device used at the outlet, and shall finish flush with plaster or other finished surface. Approved factory made knockout seals shall be used in all boxes where knockouts are not intact. Boxes in concrete shall be a type which will allow the placing of conduit without displacing the reinforcing bars.
K. Outlet boxes shall be used as pull boxes wherever possible, and junction or pull boxes shall be installed only as required by the drawings or specifications, or as directed.
L. For light outlet boxes use minimum of 4" square, 1-1/2" deep, equipped with plaster ring and fixture supporting device as required by the unit.
M. For wall switch outlets, use 4" boxes with single or two gang plaster rings for one or two switches and solid gang boxes with gang plaster rings for more than two switches, unless noted otherwise on the drawings.
N. For convenience outlets, use 4" boxes with single gang plaster ring.
O. For telephone and data outlets, use 4" boxes with single gang plaster ring.
26 05 37 - 7 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
3.03 COVER PLATES
A. Cover plates shall be installed on each outlet box, pull box, or accessible wire way in the raceway system. Covers shall fit tightly to the boxes and be installed straight.
B. Cover plates for flush mounted device or pull boxes shall be set vertically (or horizontally where indicated) within 1/16" over the length of the major dimension. The plates shall be in continuous contact with the wall surface all around and completely cover the wall opening. Use of oversized plates shall not be permitted except where specifically authorized by the Architect.
C. Weatherproof cover plates shall be oriented as designed by the manufacturer to prevent the entrance of rainwater.
D. Gasketing shall be carefully installed in all required locations.
E. Cover plates shall not "compress" the wires or connectors within the box.
F. With the box cover in place, no combustible material is to be exposed to the box interior.
G. Install blank covers over all unused outlets.
3.04 UNDERGROUND BOXES
A. Small underground pull boxes shall be set flush with finished grade on a 18" bed of pea gravel. Lay base slab level on gravel bed and verify that drain hole is open. Set box on base in bed of mastic or grout and level. Similarly, set extension sections as needed. Conduits shall enter through precast knockouts as required and be grouted into place watertight. Cut off conduit ends within 1" of the inside box surface, ream, and de-burr or fit conduit with manufactured bell ends. Keep covers in place for safety during construction and to keep the interiors clean. Install hold-down hardware after inspection. Backfill around the box as required to match adjacent conditions. Compact the backfill to not less than that of the adjacent material.
B. Pull boxes shall be sized by contractor in accordance with CEC Article 370-18. Where box sizes are shown on the drawings is the minimum acceptable. Pull boxes shall be precast concrete type, designed for traffic areas, as shown on the drawings complete with bolt-down steel traffic covers, extension rings and concrete bases, as required. Entire box shall be sealed to prevent entrance of mud and rainwater. Conduits shall enter pull boxes horizontally, not vertically, through knockouts or core drilled holes. Supply and install end bell and sand smooth. Conduit entry shall be grouted in place. Seals shall be installed in conduits around conductors to prevent water from entering the conduit system. Pull box locations are approximate. Final box locations shall be acceptable by the Architect on-site, based upon contractor spray painted locations and orientations.
26 05 37 - 8 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
C. Concrete encase the first ten feet of duct banks that enter manholes, pull boxes and vaults horizontally.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material.
B. Install knockout closures in unused box openings.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material.
B. Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish.
[END OF SECTION 26 05 37]
26 05 37 - 9 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
SECTION 26 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Nameplates and labels.
B. Wire and cable markers.
C. Conduit markers.
D. Field-painted identification of conduit.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 099000 - Painting and Coating.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association, 2017 with 2019 California Electrical Code amendments..
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements for submittals procedures.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 IDENTIFICATION APPLICATIONS
26 05 53 - 1 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
A. Buried Electrical Lines: Underground warning tapes.
B. Conduit: Conduit markers.
C. Control Device Station: Labels.
D. Electrical Distribution and Control Equipment Enclosures: Nameplates.
2.02 MANUFACTURERS
A. Brady Corporation: www.bradycorp.com.
B. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com/aec.
C. HellermannTyton: www.hellermanntyton.com.
D. Or equal.
E. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
2.03 NAMEPLATES AND LABELS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co.; www.kolbipipemarkers.com. 2. Seton Identification Products; www.seton.com. 3. Or Equal.
B. Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, black letters on white background.
C. Locations: 1. Each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure. 2. Communication cabinets.
D. Letter Size: 1. Use 1/8 inch letters for identifying individual equipment and loads. 2. Use 1/4 inch letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads.
E. Labels: Embossed adhesive tape, with 3/16 inch white letters on black background. Use only for identification of individual wall switches and receptacles, control device stations.
2.04 WIRE MARKERS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Brady Corporation; www.bradycorp.com. 2. Seton Identification Products; www.seton.com.
26 05 53 - 2 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
3. HellermannTyton; www.hellermanntyton.com. 4. Or Equal.
B. Description: Vinyl cloth type self-adhesive wire markers.
C. Description: Cloth type wire markers.
D. Locations: Each conductor at panelboard gutters, pull boxes, outlet boxes, and junction boxes each load connection.
E. Legend: 1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number indicated on drawings. 2. Control Circuits: Control wire number indicated on schematic and interconnection diagrams on drawings.
2.05 CONDUIT MARKERS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Brady Corporation; www.bradycorp.com. 2. Seton Identification Products; www.seton.com. 3. HellermannTyton; www.hellermanntyton.com. 4. Or Equal..
B. Location: Furnish markers for each conduit longer than 6 feet.
C. Spacing: 20 feet on center.
D. Color: 1. Fire Alarm System: Red.
2.06 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE
A. Manufacturers: 1. Brady Corporation; www.bradycorp.com. 2. Seton Identification Products; www.seton.com. 3. HellermannTyton; www.hellermanntyton.com. 4. Or Equal.
B. Description: 3 inch wide polyethylene tape, detectable type colored red with suitable warning legend describing buried electrical lines.
C. Description: 4 inch wide plastic tape, detectable type colored red with suitable warning legend describing buried electrical lines.
26 05 53 - 3 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install nameplates and labels parallel to equipment lines.
B. Secure nameplates to equipment front using screws.
C. Secure nameplates to inside surface of door on panelboard that is recessed in finished locations.
D. Identify underground conduits using underground warning tape. Install one tape per trench at 3 inches below finished grade.
[END OF SECTION 26 05 53]
26 05 53 - 4 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
SECTION 26 09 23
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Occupancy sensors.
B. Time switches.
C. In-wall time switches.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
B. Section 260537 - Boxes.
C. Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Labels for lighting control devices.
D. Section 262726 - Wiring Devices: Devices for manual control of lighting, including wall switches, wall dimmers, fan speed controllers, and wall plates.
E. Section 265100 - Interior Lighting.
F. Section 265600 - Exterior Lighting.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NECA 1 - Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction;
B. NEMA 410 - Performance Testing for Lighting Controls and Switching Devices; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2004.
C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association 2017 with amendments from the 2019 California Electrical Code (CEC)
D. UL 773A - Nonindustrial Photoelectric Switches for Lighting Control; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
26 09 23 - 1 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
E. UL 916 - Energy Management Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
F. UL 917 - Clock-Operated Switches; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the placement of lighting control devices with walls, toilet stalls, millwork, furniture, equipment, etc. installed under other sections or by others. 2. Coordinate the placement of wall switch occupancy sensors with actual installed door swings. 3. Coordinate the placement of occupancy sensors with walls, toilet stalls, millwork, furniture, equipment or other potential obstructions to motion detection coverage installed under other sections or by others. 4. Coordinate the placement of photo sensors for daylighting controls with windows, skylights, and luminaires to achieve optimum operation. Coordinate placement with ductwork, piping, equipment, or other potential obstructions to light level measurement installed under other sections or by others. 5. Notify the Architect of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work.
B. Sequencing: 1. Do not install lighting control devices until final surface finishes and painting are complete.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Include ratings, configurations, standard wiring diagrams, dimensions, colors, service condition requirements, and installed features. 1. Occupancy Sensors: Include detailed motion detection coverage range diagrams.
C. Shop Drawings: 1. Occupancy Sensors: Provide lighting plan indicating location, model number, and orientation of each occupancy sensor and associated system component. 2. Daylighting Controls: Provide lighting plan indicating location, model number, and orientation of each photo sensor and associated system component.
D. Field Quality Control Reports.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include detailed information on device programming and setup.
26 09 23 - 2 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for District's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 016000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
H. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations and settings for lighting control devices.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A. Store products in a clean, dry space in original manufacturer's packaging in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions until ready for installation.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain field conditions within manufacturer's required service conditions during and after installation.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for all occupancy sensors.
C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for utility grade locking receptacle-mounted outdoor photo controls.
D. Provide two year manufacturer warranty for all daylighting controls.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ALL LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
A. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
26 09 23 - 3 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
B. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, wiring, connectors, hardware, components, accessories, etc. as required for a complete operating system.
2.02 OCCUPANCY SENSORS
A. Manufacturers: 1. WattStopper; www.wattstopper.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements. 3. Source Limitations: Furnish products produced by a single manufacturer and obtained from a single supplier.
B. All Occupancy Sensors: 1. Description: Factory-assembled commercial specification grade devices for indoor use capable of sensing both major motion, such as walking, and minor motion, such as small desktop level movements, according to published coverage areas, for automatic control of load indicated. 2. Sensor Technology: a. Passive Infrared (PIR) Occupancy Sensors: Designed to detect occupancy by sensing movement of thermal energy between zones. b. Ultrasonic Occupancy Sensors: Designed to detect occupancy by sensing frequency shifts in emitted and reflected inaudible sound waves. c. Passive Infrared/Ultrasonic Dual Technology Occupancy Sensors: Designed to detect occupancy using a combination of both passive infrared and ultrasonic technologies. d. Passive Infrared/Acoustic Dual Technology Occupancy Sensors: Designed to detect occupancy using a combination of both passive infrared and audible sound sensing technologies. 3. Provide LED to visually indicate motion detection with separate color LEDs for each sensor type in dual technology units. 4. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, occupancy sensor to turn load on when occupant presence is detected and to turn load off when no occupant presence is detected during an adjustable turn-off delay time interval. 5. Dual Technology Occupancy Sensors: Field configurable turn-on and hold-on activation with settings for activation by either or both sensing technologies. 6. Passive Infrared Lens Field of View: Field customizable by addition of factory masking material, adjustment of integral blinders, or similar means to block motion detection in selected areas. 7. Turn-Off Delay: Field adjustable, up to a maximum time delay setting of not less than 15 minutes and not more than 30 minutes. 8. Sensitivity: Field adjustable. 9. Adaptive Technology: Field selectable; capable of self-adjusting sensitivity and time delay according to conditions. 10. Integral Photocell: For field selectable and adjustable inhibition of automatic turn-on of load when ambient lighting is above the selected level. 11. Load Rating for Line Voltage Occupancy Sensors: As required to control the load indicated on the drawings. 13. Isolated Relay for Low Voltage Occupancy Sensors: SPDT dry contacts, ratings as required for interface with system indicated.
26 09 23 - 4 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
C. Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors: 1. All Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors: a. Description: Occupancy sensors designed for installation in standard wall box at standard wall switch mounting height with a field of view of 180 degrees, integrated manual control capability, and no leakage current to load in off mode. b. Unless otherwise indicated or required to control the load indicated on the drawings, provide line voltage units with self-contained relay. c. Where indicated, provide two-circuit units for control of two separate lighting loads, with separate manual controls and separately programmable operation for each load. d. Occupancy sensor to be field selectable as either manual-on/automatic-off or automatic on/off. e. Manual-Off Override Control: When used to turn off load while in automatic-on mode, unit to revert back to automatic mode after no occupant presence is detected during the delayed-off time interval. f. Finish: Match finishes specified for wiring devices in Section 262726, unless otherwise indicated. g. Provide vandal resistant lenses for passive infrared (PIR) and dual technology wall switch occupancy sensors where indicated. 2. Passive Infrared (PIR) Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 900 square feet. 3. Ultrasonic Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 400 square feet. 4. Passive Infrared/Ultrasonic Dual Technology Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 900 square feet.
D. Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors: 1. All Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors: a. Description: Low profile occupancy sensors designed for ceiling installation. b. Unless otherwise indicated or required to control the load indicated on the drawings, provide low voltage units, for use with separate compatible accessory power packs. 2. Passive Infrared (PIR) Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors: a. Standard Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 450 square feet at a mounting height of 9 feet, with a field of view of 360 degrees. b. Extended Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 1,200 square feet at a mounting height of 9 feet, with a field of view of 360 degrees. 3. Ultrasonic Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors: a. Standard Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 500 square feet at a mounting height of 9 feet, with a field of view of 360 degrees. b. Medium Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 1,000 square feet at a mounting height of 9 feet, with a field of view of 360 degrees. c. Extended Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 2,000 square feet at a mounting height of 9 feet. 4. Passive Infrared/Ultrasonic Dual Technology Ceiling Mounted Occupancy
26 09 23 - 5 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
Sensors: a. Standard Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 450 square feet at a mounting height of 9 feet, with a field of view of 360 degrees. b. Extended Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 1,200 square feet at a mounting height of 9 feet, with a field of view of 360 degrees. 5. Passive Infrared/Acoustic Dual Technology Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors: a. Extended Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 1,200 square feet at a mounting height of 9 feet.
E. Directional Occupancy Sensors: 1. All Directional Occupancy Sensors: Designed for wall or ceiling mounting, with integral swivel for field adjustment of motion detection coverage. 2. Passive Infrared (PIR) Directional Occupancy Sensors: a. Long Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within a distance of 80 feet at a mounting height of 10 feet. 3. Passive Infrared/Ultrasonic Dual Technology Directional Occupancy Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within a distance of 40 feet at a mounting height of 10 feet.
F. Luminaire Mounted Occupancy Sensors: Designed for direct luminaire installation and control, suitable for use with specified luminaires.
G. Power Packs for Low Voltage Occupancy Sensors: 1. Description: Plenum rated, self-contained low voltage class 2 transformer and relay compatible with specified low voltage occupancy sensors for switching of line voltage loads. 2. Provide quantity and configuration of power and slave packs with all associated wiring and accessories as required to control the load indicated on the drawings. 3. Input Supply Voltage: Dual rated for 120/277 V ac.
H. Accessories: 1. Provide heavy duty coated steel wire protective guards compatible with specified occupancy sensors where indicated.
2.03 TIME SWITCHES
A. Digital Electronic Time Switches: 1. Description: Factory-assembled solid state programmable controller with LCD display, listed and labeled as complying with UL 916 or UL 917. 2. Program Capability: 3. Schedule Capacity: Not less than 16 programmable on/off operations. 4. Provide automatic daylight savings time and leap year compensation. 5. Provide power outage backup to retain programming and maintain clock. 6. Manual override: Capable of overriding current schedule both permanently and temporarily until next scheduled event. 7. Input Supply Voltage: As indicated on the drawings.
26 09 23 - 6 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
8. Provide lockable enclosure; environmental type per NEMA 250 as specified for the following installation locations:
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.
B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are properly sized to accommodate devices and conductors in accordance with NFPA 70.
C. Verify that openings for outlet boxes are neatly cut and will be completely covered by devices or wall plates.
D. Verify that final surface finishes are complete, including painting.
E. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to lighting control devices.
F. Verify that the service voltage and ratings of lighting control devices are appropriate for the service voltage and load requirements at the location to be installed.
G. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.
B. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1, including mounting heights specified in that standard unless otherwise indicated
B. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 260537 as required for installation of lighting control devices provided under this section. 1. Mounting Heights: Unless otherwise indicated, as follows: a. Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors: 48 inches above finished floor. b. In-Wall Time Switches: 48 inches above finished floor. c. In-Wall Interval Timers: 48 inches above finished floor. 2. Orient outlet boxes for vertical installation of lighting control devices unless otherwise indicated.
26 09 23 - 7 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
3. Locate wall switch occupancy sensors on strike side of door with edge of wall plate 3 inches from edge of door frame. Where locations are indicated otherwise, notify LP Consulting Engineers to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work.
C. Install lighting control devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D. Unless otherwise indicated, connect lighting control device grounding terminal or conductor to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.
E. Install lighting control devices plumb and level, and held securely in place.
F. Where required and not furnished with lighting control device, provide wall plate in accordance with Section 262726.
G. Where applicable, install lighting control devices and associated wall plates to fit completely flush to mounting surface with no gaps and rough opening completely covered without strain on wall plate. Repair or reinstall improperly installed outlet boxes or improperly sized rough openings. Do not use oversized wall plates in lieu of meeting this requirement.
H. Occupancy Sensor Locations: 1. Location Adjustments: Locations indicated are diagrammatic and only intended to indicate which rooms or areas require devices. Provide quantity and locations as required for complete coverage of respective room or area based on manufacturer's recommendations for installed devices. 2. Locate ultrasonic and dual technology passive infrared/ultrasonic occupancy sensors a minimum of 4 feet from air supply ducts or other sources of heavy air flow and as per manufacturer's recommendations, in order to minimize false triggers.
I. Unless otherwise indicated, install power packs for lighting control devices above accessible ceiling or above access panel in inaccessible ceiling near the sensor location.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 014000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. Inspect each lighting control device for damage and defects.
C. Test occupancy sensors to verify proper operation, including time delays and ambient light thresholds where applicable. Verify optimal coverage for entire room or area. Record test results in written report to be included with submittals.
D. Test time switches to verify proper operation.
E. Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective lighting control devices.
26 09 23 - 8 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.
B. Adjust occupancy sensor settings to minimize undesired activations while optimizing energy savings, and to achieve desired function as indicated or as directed by LP Consulting Engineers.
C. Adjust position of directional occupancy sensors and outdoor motion sensors to achieve optimal coverage as required.
D. Where indicated or as directed by Architect, install factory masking material or adjust integral blinders on passive infrared (PIR) and dual technology occupancy sensor lenses to block undesired motion detection.
E. Adjust time switch settings to achieve desired operation schedule as indicated or as directed by LP Consulting Engineers. Record settings in written report to be included with submittals.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match original factory finish.
3.07 COMMISSIONING
A. See Section 019113 for commissioning requirements.
3.08 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A. See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for closeout submittals.
B. See Section 017900 - Demonstration and Training, for additional requirements.
C. Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of lighting control devices to LP Consulting Engineers, and correct deficiencies or make adjustments as directed.
D. Training: Train Los Rios Community College District's personnel on operation, adjustment, programming, and maintenance of lighting control devices. 1. Use operation and maintenance manual as training reference, supplemented with additional training materials as required. 2. Provide minimum of two hours of training. 3. Instructor: Qualified contractor familiar with the project and with sufficient knowledge of the installed lighting control devices. 4. Location: At project site.
[END OF SECTION 26 09 23]
26 09 23 - 9 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
SECTION 26 27 26
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Wall switches.
B. Receptacles.
C. Wall plates.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
B. Section 260537 - Boxes.
C. Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Labels for wiring devices.
D. Section 262717 - Equipment Wiring: Cords and plugs for equipment.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. FS W-C-596 - Connector, Electrical, Power, General Specification for; Federal Specification;
B. FS W-S-896 - Switches, Toggle (Toggle and Lock), Flush-mounted (General Specification); Federal Specification
C. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting; National Electrical Contractors Association;
D. NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; National Electrical Manufacturers Association
E. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device -- Dimensional Requirements; National Electrical Manufacturers Association
F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association, 2017 with 2019 California Electrical Code amendments..
26 27 26 - 1 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
G. UL 20 - General-Use Snap Switches; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
H. UL 498 - Attachment Plugs and Receptacles; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
I. UL 514D - Cover Plates for Flush-Mounted Wiring Devices; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
J. UL 943 - Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the placement of outlet boxes with walls, millwork, furniture, equipment, etc. installed under other sections or by others. 2. Coordinate wiring device ratings and configurations with the electrical requirements of actual equipment to be installed. 3. Coordinate the placement of outlet boxes for wall switches with actual installed door swings. 4. Coordinate the installation and preparation of uneven surfaces, such as split face block, to provide suitable surface for installation of wiring devices. 5. Coordinate the core drilling of holes for poke-through assemblies with the work covered under other sections. 6. Notify the Architect of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work.
B. Sequencing: 1. Do not install wiring devices until final surface finishes and painting are complete.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and configurations. 1. Wall Dimmers: Include derating information for ganged multiple devices.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70, with amendments of the current California Electrical Code.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
26 27 26 - 2 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
A. Store in a clean, dry space in original manufacturer's packaging until ready for installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Cooper Wiring Devices: www.cooperwiringdevices.com.
B. GE Industrial: www.geindustrial.com.
C. Leviton Manufacturing, Inc: www.leviton.com.
D. Or equal.
2.02 APPLICATIONS
A. Provide wiring devices suitable for intended use and with ratings adequate for load served.
B. For single receptacles installed on an individual branch circuit, provide receptacle with ampere rating not less than that of the branch circuit.
C. Provide weather resistant GFI receptacles with specified weatherproof covers for all receptacles installed outdoors or in damp or wet locations.
D. Provide GFI receptacles for all receptacles installed within 6 feet of sinks.
E. Provide GFI receptacles for all receptacles serving electric drinking fountains.
F. Unless noted otherwise, do not use combination switch/receptacle devices.
2.03 ALL WIRING DEVICES
A. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
B. Finishes: 1. All Wiring Devices: White with white nylon wall plate unless otherwise indicated. 2. Wiring Devices Installed in Finished Spaces: White with white nylon wall plate unless otherwise indicated. 3. Wiring Devices Installed in Unfinished Spaces: Gray with galvanized steel wall plate unless otherwise indicated. 4. Wiring Devices Installed in Wet or Damp Locations: White with specified weatherproof cover unless otherwise indicated.
26 27 26 - 3 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
2.04 WALL SWITCHES
A. All Wall Switches: AC only, quiet operating, general-use snap switches with silver alloy contacts, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 20 and where applicable, FS W-S-896; types as indicated on the drawings. 1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring and screw actuated binding clamp for back wiring with separate ground terminal screw.
B. Locking Wall Switches: Industrial specification grade, 20 A, 120/277 V with lever type keyed switch actuator and maintained contacts; all switches keyed alike; single pole single throw, double pole single throw, three way, or four way as indicated on the drawings.
C. Wall Switches: Heavy Duty, AC only general-use snap switch, complying with NEMA WD 6 and WD 1. 1. Body and Handle: white plastic with toggle handle. 2. Indicator Light: Lighted handle type switch; red handle. 3. Locator Light: Lighted handle type switch; red color handle. 4. Ratings: a. Voltage: 120 and 277 volts, AC. b. Current: 20 amperes.
D. Switch Types: Single pole, double pole, and 3-way.
2.05 FAN SPEED CONTROLLERS
A. Description: 120 V AC, solid-state, full-range variable speed, slide control type with separate on/off switch, with integral radio frequency interference filtering, fan hum elimination circuitry, field-adjustable trim, power failure preset memory, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 1917. 1. Current Rating: 1.5 A unless otherwise indicated or required to control the load indicated on the drawings.
2.07 RECEPTACLES
A. All Receptacles: Self-grounding, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 498, and where applicable, FS W-C-596; types as indicated on the drawings. 1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring or screw actuated binding clamp for back wiring with separate ground terminal screw. 2. NEMA configurations specified are according to NEMA WD 6.
B. Convenience Receptacles: 1. Standard Convenience Receptacles: Commercial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings. 2. Isolated Ground Convenience Receptacles: Commercial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, with ground contacts isolated from mounting strap; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings.
26 27 26 - 4 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
3. Weather Resistant Convenience Receptacles: Commercial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R,, listed and labeled as weather resistant type complying with UL 498 Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings. 4. Tamper Resistant Convenience Receptacles: Commercial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R,, listed and labeled as tamper resistant type; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings. 5. Tamper Resistant and Weather Resistant Convenience Receptacles: Commercial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R,, listed and labeled as tamper resistant type and as weather resistant type complying with UL 498 Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings.
C. GFI Receptacles: 1. All GFI Receptacles: Provide with feed-through protection, light to indicate ground fault tripped condition and loss of protection, and list as complying with UL 943, class A. 2. Standard GFI Receptacles: Commercial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, rectangular decorator style. 3. Weather Resistant GFI Receptacles: Commercial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, rectangular decorator style, listed and labeled as weather resistant type complying with UL 498 Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations. 4. Tamper Resistant GFI Receptacles: Commercial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, rectangular decorator style, listed and labeled as tamper resistant type. 5. Tamper Resistant and Weather Resistant GFI Receptacles: Commercial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, rectangular decorator style, listed and labeled as tamper resistant type and as weather resistant type complying with UL 498 Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations.
D. Receptacles: Heavy duty, complying with NEMA WD 6 and WD 1. 1. Device Body: white plastic. 2. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, type as specified and indicated.
E. Convenience Receptacles: Type 5 to 15.
F. Single Convenience Receptacles.
G. Duplex Convenience Receptacles.
H. GFCI Receptacles: Convenience receptacle with integral ground fault circuit interrupter to meet regulatory requirements.
2.09 WALL PLATES
A. All Wall Plates: Comply with UL 514D. 1. Configuration: One piece cover as required for quantity and types of
26 27 26 - 5 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
corresponding wiring devices. 2. Screws: Metal with slotted heads finished to match wall plate finish.
B. Nylon Wall Plates: Smooth finish, high-impact thermoplastic.
C. Stainless Steel Wall Plates: Brushed satin finish, Type 302 stainless steel.
D. Galvanized Steel Wall Plates: Rounded corners and edges, with corrosion resistant screws.
E. Weatherproof Covers for Damp Locations: Gasketed, cast aluminum, with self-closing hinged cover and corrosion-resistant screws; listed as suitable for use in wet locations with cover closed.
F. Weatherproof Covers for Wet Locations: Gasketed, cast aluminum, with hinged lockable cover and corrosion-resistant screws; listed as suitable for use in wet locations while in use with attachment plugs connected.
G. Decorative Cover Plates: white, nylon.
H. Jumbo Cover Plates: Ivory, nylon.
I. Weatherproof Cover Plates: Gasketed cast metal with hinged.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.
B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are properly sized to accommodate devices and conductors in accordance with NFPA 70.
C. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates.
D. Verify that final surface finishes are complete, including painting.
E. Verify that floor boxes are adjusted properly.
F. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices.
G. Verify that core drilled holes for poke-through assemblies are in proper locations.
H. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
26 27 26 - 6 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.
B. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1, including mounting heights specified in that standard unless otherwise indicated.
B. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 260537 as required for installation of wiring devices provided under this section. 1. Mounting Heights: Unless otherwise indicated, as follows: a. Wall Switches: 48 inches above finished floor. b. Wall Dimmers: 48 inches above finished floor. c. Fan Speed Controllers: 48 inches above finished floor. d. Receptacles: 18 inches above finished floor or 6 inches above counter. 2. Orient outlet boxes for vertical installation of wiring devices unless otherwise indicated. 3. Where multiple receptacles, wall switches, or wall dimmers are installed at the same location and at the same mounting height, gang devices together under a common wall plate. 4. Locate wall switches on strike side of door with edge of wall plate 3 inches from edge of door frame. Where locations are indicated otherwise, notify LP Consulting Engineers to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work. 5. Locate receptacles for electric drinking fountains concealed behind drinking fountain according to manufacturer's instructions.
C. Install wiring devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent devices exceeds 300 V.
E. Where required, connect wiring devices using pigtails not less than 6 inches long. Do not connect more than one conductor to wiring device terminals.
F. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor clockwise 3/4 turn around screw terminal and tightening to proper torque specified by the manufacturer. Where present, do not use push-in pressure terminals that do not rely on screw-actuated binding.
G. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.
H. Install securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1.
I. Install wiring devices plumb and level with mounting yoke held rigidly in place.
26 27 26 - 7 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
J. Install wall switches with OFF position down.
K. Do not share neutral conductor on branch circuits utilizing wall dimmers.
J. Install vertically mounted receptacles with grounding pole on top and horizontally mounted receptacles with grounding pole on left.
M. Install wall plates to fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough opening completely covered without strain on wall plate. Repair or reinstall improperly installed outlet boxes or improperly sized rough openings. Do not use oversized wall plates in lieu of meeting this requirement.
N. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no wiring devices installed or designated for future use.
O. Install identification label for wall switches and wall dimmers in accordance with Section 260526 indicating load served when controlling loads that are not visible from the control location or multiple wall switches or wall dimmers are installed at one location.
P. Install identification label for all receptacles in accordance with Section 260526 indicating serving branch circuit.
Q. Install receptacles with grounding pole on top.
R. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to outlet box with bonding jumper.
S. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas.
T. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal.
E. Use jumbo size plates for outlets installed in masonry walls.
F. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas, above accessible ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets.
G. Install protective rings on active flush cover service fittings.
3.04 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 260537 to obtain mounting heights specified.
B. Install wall switch 48 inches above finished floor.
C. Install convenience receptacle 18 inches above finished floor.
D. Install convenience receptacle 6 inches above counter.
26 27 26 - 8 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform field inspection, testing, and adjusting in accordance with Section 014000.
B. Inspect each wiring device for damage and defects.
C. Operate each wall switch, wall dimmer, and fan speed controller with circuit energized to verify proper operation.
D. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation.
E. Verify that each receptacle device is energized.
F. Test each receptacle to verify operation and proper polarity.
G. Test each GFCI receptacle for proper tripping operation according to manufacturer's instructions.
H. Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective wiring devices.
I. Verify that each telephone jack is properly connected and circuit is operational.
3.06 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.
3.07 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match original factory finish.
[END OF SECTION 26 27 26]
26 27 26 - 9 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
SECTION 26 28 16 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The requirements of this section are in addition to the requirements of Division 1, General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Scope: Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required, and install overcurrent protective devices as shown on the Drawings and as required to protect all circuits in strict accordance with applicable Electrical Code(s). Overcurrent protective devices may be required as a component of disconnect switches, motor starters, panelboads or mechanical equipment.
B. QUALITY ASSURANCE
C. All overcurrent protective devices shall comply with applicable standards of the Underwriter's Laboratories. Circuit breakers and other devices shall be UL labeled.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Circuit breakers shall be of the proper type and rating for each application. They shall be molded case, thermal-magnetic, with inverse time characteristic response - temperature compensated. The fault current interrupting rating shall not be less than that shown on the Drawings (10,000 ASYM minimum). Only as indicated on the drawings, series rated circuit breaker combinations may be accepted to meet required fault current interrupting ratings. Panelboard circuit breakers shall be “bolt on” type unless noted otherwise. Multiple pole circuit breaker must be manufactured as a single unit - single pole units with handles "bailed" together will not be acceptable. Use of "tandem" circuit breakers or "two in the space normally occupied by one" will not be acceptable.
B. Circuit breaker dedicated for the Fire Alarm system shall be painted color “RED” handle.
C. Enclosed circuit breakers shall be as indicated on the Drawings and as required by applicable Electrical Code. The enclosures shall have been manufactured specifically for the type of circuit breaker provided and shall be UL listed. Use NEMA 1 enclosures dry indoors areas and NEMA 3R/12 (rain and dust tight) in outdoor areas.
26 28 16 - 1 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
2.02 FUSES
A. Fuses shall be provided for all fuse holders as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. They shall be current-limiting, non-renewable as indicated on the Drawings - Fusetron or Limitron type manufactured by Bussman or equal. Provide 3 spare fuses for each size and class of fuse used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Circuit breakers and fuses are to be installed in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. Fuses must seat solidly with all contact surfaces bearing evenly. Replace warped, weak, or broken fuse clamp terminals. Do not attempt to repair or bend back into position.
B. HACR rated circuit breakers shall be provided to protect all feeders and branch circuits to non-fused HVAC and refrigeration equipment and where required by equipment listing conditions.
C. Switch duty rated circuit breakers are to be provided where circuit breakers will be used to control the connected loads.
D. Enclosed circuit breakers are to be installed plumb and rigidly secured to structure or equipment with wood screws, bolts and expansion anchors, or machine bolts and locknuts as applicable. Nameplates shall be installed as indicated in Section 16010, General Requirements, Electrical.
E. Test circuit breakers and ground fault devices when required by the local utility company or building code.
[END OF SECTION 26 28 16]
26 28 16 - 2 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
SECTION 26 51 00
INTERIOR LIGHITNG
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Interior luminaires.
B. Luminaire accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 092116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Additional requirements for support of ceiling mounted fixtures.
B. Section 095100 - Acoustical Ceilings: Additional requirements for support of ceiling mounted fixtures.
C. Section 260537 - Boxes.
D. Section 260923 - Lighting Control Devices: Automatic controls for lighting including occupancy sensors, outdoor motion sensors, time switches, outdoor photo controls, and daylighting controls.
E. Section 262726 - Wiring Devices: Manual wall switches and wall dimmers.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. IEEE C62.41.2 - Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and less) AC Power Circuits
B. IESNA LM-63 - ANSI Approved Standard File Format for Electronic Transfer of Photometric Data and Related Information
C. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting; National Electrical Contractors Association
D. NECA/IESNA 500 - Standard for Installing Indoor Commercial Lighting Systems; National Electrical Contractors Association
E. NECA/IESNA 502 - Standard for Installing Industrial Lighting Systems; National Electrical Contractors Association
26 51 00 - 1 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
F. NEMA LE 4 - Recessed Luminaires, Ceiling Compatibility; National Electrical Manufacturers Association
G. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC); National Fire Protection Association.2005 and amendments from the California Electrical Code (CEC) 2019.
H. NFPA 101 - Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures; National Fire Protection Association
I. UL 924 - Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
J. UL 1598 - Luminaires; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
K. UL 8750 - Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for Use in Lighting Products; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the installation of luminaires with mounting surfaces installed under other sections or by others. Coordinate the work with placement of supports, anchors, etc. required for mounting. Coordinate compatibility of luminaires and associated trims with mounting surfaces at installed locations. 2. Coordinate the placement of luminaires with structural members, ductwork, piping, equipment, diffusers, fire suppression system components, and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others. 3. Coordinate the placement of exit signs with walls, doors, furniture, equipment, signage or other potential obstructions to visibility installed under other sections or by others. 4. Notify the Architect of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: 1. Provide photometric calculations where luminaires are proposed for substitution upon request.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each fixture that is not a standard product of the manufacturer.
D. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including detailed information on luminaire construction, dimensions, ratings, finishes, mounting requirements, listings, service conditions, photometric performance, installed accessories, and ceiling compatibility; include model number nomenclature clearly
26 51 00 - 2 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
marked with all proposed features. 1. Provide electronic files of photometric data certified by a National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) lab or independent testing agency in IESNA LM-63 standard format upon request.
E. Certificates for Dimming Ballasts: Manufacturer's documentation of compatibility with dimming controls to be installed.
F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.
G. Operation and Maintenance Data: Instructions for each product including information on replacement parts.
H. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for District's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 016000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70, with amendments of the current California Electrical Code and NFPA 101.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A. Receive, handle, and store products according to NECA/IESNA 500 (commercial lighting), NECA/IESNA 502 (industrial lighting), and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Keep products in original manufacturer's packaging and protect from damage until ready for installation.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain field conditions within manufacturer's required service conditions during and after installation.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
26 51 00 - 3 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Furnish products as indicated in Lighting Fixture Schedule included on the Drawings
B. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 LUMINAIRE TYPES
A. Furnish products as indicated in luminaire schedule included on the drawings.
B. Or equal in performance and quality acceptable by the Architect and/or the District Representative.
2.03 LUMINAIRES
A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70, with amendments of the current California Electrical Code.
B. Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598, where applicable.
C. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70, with amendments of the current California Electrical Code and NFPA 101.
D. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
E. Unless otherwise indicated, provide complete luminaires and all reflectors, lenses, housings and other components required to position, energize and protect the LED and distribute the light.
F. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, hardware, supports, trims, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system.
G. Provide products suitable to withstand normal handling, installation, and service without any damage, distortion, corrosion, fading, discoloring, etc.
H. Recessed Luminaires: 1. Ceiling Compatibility: Comply with NEMA LE 4. 2. Luminaires Recessed in Insulated Ceilings: Listed and labeled as IC-rated, suitable for direct contact with insulation and combustible materials. 3. Luminaires Recessed in Sloped Ceilings: Provide suitable sloped ceiling adapters.
26 51 00 - 4 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
I. LED Luminaires: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 8750.
J. Luminaires Mounted in Continuous Rows: Provide quantity of units required for length indicated, with all accessories required for joining and aligning.
2.04 LUMINAIRES
A. Furnish products as indicated in Lighting Fixture Schedule included on the Drawings.
B. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 260537 as required for installation of luminaires provided under this section.
B. Install products according to manufacturer's instructions.
C. Install luminaires securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1 (general workmanship), NECA 500 (commercial lighting), and NECA 502 (industrial lighting).
D. Install luminaires plumb and square and aligned with building lines and with adjacent luminaires.
E. Install fixtures securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 500 (commercial lighting).
F. Support luminaires larger than 2 x 4 foot size independent of ceiling framing.
G. Locate recessed ceiling luminaires as indicated on reflected ceiling plan.
H. Install surface mounted luminaires and exit signs plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with each other. Secure to prevent movement.
I. Exposed Grid Ceilings: Support surface mounted luminaires in grid ceiling directly from building structure.
J. Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below.
K. Install recessed luminaires using accessories and firestopping materials to meet regulatory requirements for fire rating.
26 51 00 - 5 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
L. Install clips to secure recessed grid-supported luminaires in place.
M. Install wall mounted luminaires and exit signs at height as indicated on Drawings.
N. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.
O. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for temperature conditions within fixture; use flexible conduit.
P. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for temperature conditions within luminaire.
Q. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 014000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. Inspect each product for damage and defects.
C. Perform field inspection in accordance with Section 014000.
D. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection to verify proper operation.
E. Test self-powered exit signs, emergency lighting units, and fluorescent emergency power supply units to verify proper operation upon loss of normal power supply.
F. Correct wiring deficiencies and repair or replace damaged or defective products. Repair or replace excessively noisy ballasts as determined by LP Consulting Engineers.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A. Aim and position adjustable luminaires to achieve desired illumination as indicated or as directed by LP Consulting Engineers. Secure locking fittings in place.
B. Exit Signs with Field-Selectable Directional Arrows: Set as indicated or as required to properly designate egress path as directed by LP Consulting Engineers or authority having jurisdiction.
C. Aim and adjust fixtures as indicated.
D. Position exit sign directional arrows as indicated.
3.04 CLEANING
26 51 00 - 6 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
A. Clean surfaces according to NECA 500 (commercial lighting), NECA 502 (industrial lighting), and manufacturer's instructions to remove dirt, fingerprints, paint, or other foreign material and restore finishes to match original factory finish.
B. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials.
C. Remove dirt and debris from enclosures.
D. Clean finishes and touch up damage.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Replace luminaires that have failed at Substantial Completion.
3.07 SCHEDULE - SEE DRAWINGS
[END OF SECTION 26 51 00]
26 51 00 - 7 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
SECTION 32 13 13
CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Walks.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 07 90 00: Joint Sealers 2. Section 32 17 26: Tactile Warning Surfacing
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, and ground granulated blast- furnace slag.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Other Action Submittals: 1. Design Mixtures: For each concrete paving mixture. Include alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.
C. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer of detectable warnings ready-mix concrete manufacturer and testing agency.
D. Material Certificates: For the following, from manufacturer: 1. Cementitious materials. 2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories. 3. Fiber reinforcement. 4. Admixtures. 5. Curing compounds. 6. Applied finish materials. 7. Bonding agent or epoxy adhesive. 8. Joint fillers.
E. Material Test Reports: For each of the following: 1. Aggregates. Include service-record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of concrete due to alkali-aggregate reactivity.
F. Field quality-control reports.
32 13 13-1 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Ready-Mix-Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities.
B. Pavement-Marking Paint: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at a minimum ambient or surface temperature of 40 deg F for oil-based materials and 55 deg F for water-based materials, and not exceeding 95 deg F.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cement: Portland cement, ASTM C150, Type II, per ACI 318-14 Section 26.4.
B. Concrete Aggregates: Normal weight aggregates shall conform to ASTM C33, except as modified by this section. Combined grading shall meet limits of ASTM C33. Lightweight aggregate shall conform to ASTM C330, suitably processed, washed and screened, and shall consist of durable particles without adherent coatings.
C. Water: Clean and free from deleterious amounts of acids, alkalis, scale, or organic materials and per ACI 318-14 Section 26.4.1.3.1.
D. Fly Ash: Western Fly Ash, conforming to ASTM C618 for Class N or Class F materials (Class C is not permitted). Not more than 15% (by mass) may be substituted for portland cement.
E. Water Reducing Admixture: Admixture to improve placing, reduce water cement ratio, and ultimate shrinkage may be used. Provide WRDA 64 by Grace Construction Products or approved equal. Admixture shall conform to ASTM C494 and ACI 318-14 Section 26.4.1.4.19(a). Such admixture must receive prior approval by the Architect, Structural Engineer, and the Testing Lab, and shall be included in original design mix.
F. Air-entraining Admixture: Daravair 1000 by Grace Construction Products or approved equal. Admixture must conform to ASTM C260 and ACI 318-14, section 26.4.1.4.
G. Exterior Flatwork Expansion Joint Sealant: 1-part polyurethane sealant, Sikaflex -1c SL or approved equal.
H. Surface Retarder (for exposed aggregate finishes): Rugasol-S by Sika Corporation or approved equal.
I. Form Coating: Material which will leave no residue on concrete surface that will interfere with surface coating, as approved by the Architect.
J. Expansion Joint Material: Preformed 3/8" fiber material, full depth of concrete section, with bituminous binder manufactured for use as concrete expansion joint material, as accepted by the Architect.
32 13 13-2 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
K. Reinforcement Bars: New billet steel deformed bars conforming to requirements of ASTM A615 or ASTM A706; Grade 60. Dowels for installation through expansion joints or construction joints to existing sidewalks or concrete features shall be smooth or shall be sleeved on one end for slippage.
L. Reinforcing supports: Galvanized metal chairs or spacers or metal hangers, accurately placed 3’-0” O.C.E.W. Staggered and each support securely fastened to steel reinforcement in place. Bottom bars in footings may be supported with 3” concrete blocks with embedded wire ties. Concrete supports without wire ties will not be allowed.
M. Truncated Domes: Vitrified Polymer Composite (VPC), Cast-In-Place Detectable/Tactile Warning Surface Tiles; “Armor-Tile”, “Access Tile Tactile Systems”, or approved equal. Tiles shall comply with Americans with Disabilities Act and the California Code of Regulations (CCR) Title 24, Part 2, Chapter 11B. Install tiles as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Color: As selected by the Architect.
N. Curing Compound (for exterior slabs only): Burke Aqua Resin Cure by Burke by Edoco, 1100 Clear by W.R. Meadows or accepted equal. Water based membrane-forming concrete curing compound meeting ASTM C 309 and C1315.
O. Concrete Bonding Agent: Weld-Crete by Larson Products Corp., Daraweld C by Grace Construction Products or accepted equal.
P. Patching Mortar: Meadow-Crete GPS, one-component, trowel applied, polymer enhanced, shrinkage-compensated, fiber reinforced, cementitious repair mortar for horizontal, vertical and overhead applications as manufactured by W.R. Meadows or accepted equal.
Q. Non-shrink Grout: Masterflow 713 Plus by Master Builders or approved equal. Premixed, non-metallic, no chlorides, non-staining and non-shrinking per CRD-C621, Corps of Engineers Specification and ASTM C 1107, Grades B and C.
R. Aggregate Base: Class 2 AB per Caltrans specification section 26-1.02A.
S. Joint sealant for expansion joints: Single component silicone sealant, Type S, ASTM D5893
T. Pre- Formed plastic Expansion Joint; W.R. Meadows 3/8” “Snap Cap”, Tex-Trude expansion joint cap, or an approved equal.
U. Adhesive Anchoring (Epoxy): Hilty HIT-HY 200 Safe Set, or approved equal.
2.2 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Wheel Stops: 1. Precast, air-entrained concrete, 2500-psi minimum compressive strength, 4-1/2 inches high by 9 inches wide by 72 inches long. Provide chamfered corners and drainage slots on underside and holes for anchoring to substrate. a. Dowels: Galvanized steel, 3/4 inch in diameter, 10-inch minimum length.
2.3 CONCRETE DESIGN AND CLASS
A. Class “B”: Concrete shall have 1" max. size aggregate, shall have 3000 psi min. at 28 day strength with a maximum water to cementitious ratio no greater than 0.50. Use for
32 13 13-3 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
exterior slabs, including walks, vehicular paved surfaces, manhole bases, poured-in- place drop inlets, curbs, valley gutters, curb & gutter and other concrete of like nature.
B. Slump Limits: Provide concrete, at point of final discharge, of proper consistency determined by Test Method ASTM C143 with a slumps of 4" plus or minus 1".
C. Mix Design: All concrete used in this work will be designed for strength in accordance with provisions of ASI 318-14 Section 26.4. Should the Contractor desire to pump concrete, a modified mix design will need to be submitted for review. Fly ash may be used in concrete to improve workability in amounts up to 15% of the total cementitious weight.
D. Air Entrainment; Per the Local Jurisdiction minimum requirements, or 3% minimum.
2.4 MIXING OF CONCRETE
A. Conform to requirements of CBC, Chapter 19A.
B. All concrete shall be mixed until there is uniform distribution of material and mass is uniform and homogenous; mixer must be discharged completely before the mixer is recharged.
C. Concrete shall be Ready-mixed Concrete: Mix and deliver in accordance with the requirements set forth in ASTM C94 and ACI 301. 1. Approved Testing Laboratory shall check the first batching at the start of the work and furnish mix proportions to the Licensed Weighmaster. 2. Licensed Weighmaster to positively identify materials as to quantity and to certify to each load by ticket. 3. Ticket shall be transmitted to Project Inspector by truck driver with load identified thereon. Project Inspector will not accept load without load ticket identifying mix and will keep daily record of pours, identifying each truck, its load and time of receipt and will transmit two copies of record to DSA. 4. Placement of concrete shall occur as rapidly as possible after batching and in a manner which will assure that the required quality of the concrete is maintained. In no case may concrete be placed more than 90 minutes from batch time. 5. Water may be added to the mix only if neither the maximum permissible water- cement ratio nor the maximum slump is exceeded. In no case shall more than 10 gallons of water shall be added to a full 9 yard load, or 1 gal. per yard on remaining concrete within the drum providing load tag indicates at time of mixing at plant will allow for additional water.
2.5 MATERIALS TESTING
A. Testing of concrete shall be performed per article 3.07 of this specification.
2.6 EQUIPMENT
A. Handling and mixing of concrete: Project Inspector may order removal of any equipment which in his opinion is insufficient or in any way unsuitable.
32 13 13-4 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPROVAL OF FORMS AND REINFORCEMENTS
A. Forms and reinforcements are subject to approval by the Project Inspector. Before placing concrete, clean tools, equipment and remove all debris from areas to receive concrete. Clean all reinforcing and other embedded items off all coatings oil, and mud that may impair bond with concrete.
B. All reinforcing steel shall be adequately supported by approved devices on centers close enough to prevent any sagging.
C. All reinforcing bar lap splices shall be staggered a minimum of 5 ft.
D. Additional reinforcing steel shall be placed around all utility boxes, valve boxes, manhole frames and covers that are located within the concrete placements. 1. The bars shall be placed so that there will be a minimum of 1 ½” clearance and a maximum of 3” clearance. The reinforcing steel shall be placed mid-depth of concrete slab.
E. At all right angles or intersections of concrete walks, additional 2’x2’ #5, 90 degree bars shall be added at all inside corners for additional crack control. The bars shall be placed 2” from concrete forms and supports at mid-depth of slab.
3.2 PROTECTION
A. Protect work and materials of this Section prior to and during installation, and protect the installed work and materials of other trades.
B. In the event of damage, make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect at no additional cost to the Owner.
C. Sub-Grade in vehicular concrete paved areas: Subgrade shall be clean, shaped and compact to hard surface free from elevations or depressions exceeding 0.05’ in 10' from true plan. Compact per Section 310000. Compaction and moisture content shall be verified immediately prior to placement of concrete. Proof roll subbase in presence of geotechnical engineer prior to placement of aggregate base.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Reinforcement and all other embedded items at time of placing concrete to be free of rust, dirt oil or any other coatings that would impair bond to concrete.
B. Remove all wood chips, sawdust, dirt, loose concrete and other debris just before concrete is to be poured. Use compressed air for inaccessible areas. Remove all standing water from excavations.
3.4 FORMING
A. Form material shall be straight, true, sound and able to withstand deformation due to loading and effects of moist curing. Materials which have warped or delaminated, or require more than minor patching of contact surfaces, shall not be reused.
B. Build forms to shapes, lines, grades and dimensions indicated. Construct form work to maintain tolerances required by ACI 301. Forms shall be substantial, tight to prevent
32 13 13-5 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
leakage of concrete, and properly braced and tied together to maintain position and shape. Butt joints tightly and locate on solid backing. Chamfer corners where indicated. Form bevels, grooves and recesses to neat, straight lines. Construct forms for easy removal without hammering, wedging or prying against concrete.
C. Space clamps, ties, hangers and other form accessories so that working capacities are not exceeded by loads imposed from concrete or concreting operations.
D. Build openings into vertical forms at regular intervals if necessary to facilitate concrete placement, and at bottoms of forms to permit cleaning and inspection.
E. Build in securely braced temporary bulkheads, keyed as required, at planned locations of construction joints.
F. Slope tie-wires downward to outside of wall.
G. Brace, anchor and support all cast-in items to prevent displacement or distortion.
H. During and immediately after concrete placing, tighten forms, posts and shores. Readjust to maintain grades, levels and camber.
I. Concrete paving, Curbs, Curb and Gutters, Ramps: 1. Expansion Joints: Install at locations indicated, and so that maximum distance between joints is 20’ for exterior concrete unless otherwise shown. Expansion joint material shall be full depth of concrete section. Recess for backer rod and sealant where required. Expansion joints shall not exceed ¼ inch depth measured from finish surface to top of felt or sealant, and ½ inch width. 2. Curbs, Valley Gutter, and Curb & Gutter: Install expansion joints at 60’ on center, except when placing adjacent to concrete walks, the expansion joints shall align with the expansion joints shown for the concrete walks. Expansion joint material shall be full depth of concrete section. Recess for backer rod and sealant will be required. 3. Isolation Joints: 3/8” felt between walls and exterior slabs or walks so that paved areas are isolated from all vertical features, unless specifically noted otherwise on plans. 4. Exterior Concrete Paving: Install expansion joints at 20’ on center maximum, both directions, unless shown otherwise on plans. 5. Ramps; whether shown or not all ramps shall have control joints and expansion joints. a. Control joints on ramps shall be aligned and be placed in between with the vertical posts for the handrails. The curbs, if required shall have control joints that align with the handrail posts. b. Expansion joints shall be placed at the upper, intermediate, and bottom landings.
32 13 13-6 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
3.5 FORM COATING
A. Before placement of reinforcing steel, coat faces of all forms to prevent absorption of moisture from concrete and to facilitate removal of forms. Apply specified material in conformance with manufacturer's written directions.
B. Before re-using form material, inspect, clean thoroughly and recoat.
C. Seal all cut edges.
3.6 INSTALLATION
A. General: Reinforcement shall be accurately placed at locations indicated on the drawings within required tolerances and providing required clearances. Reinforcement shall be secured prior to placement of concrete such that tolerances and clearances are maintained. Coverage shall be in accordance with Section 1907A.7 of the CBC. Keep a person on the job to maintain position of reinforcing as concrete is placed. Reinforcement must be in place before concreting is begun. Install dowels as shown on drawings. Give notice whenever pipes, conduits, sleeves, and other construction interferes with placement; obtain method of procedure to resolve interferences. All expansion and construction joints in concrete shall have dowels of size and spacing as shown, or as approved by Architect.
B. Placing Tolerances: 1. Per ACI 301 or CRSI/WCRSI Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars, unless otherwise shown. 2. Clear distance between parallel bars in a layer shall be no less than 1”, the maximum bar diameter not 1 ½ times the maximum size of coarse aggregate. C. Splices: 1. General: Unless otherwise shown on drawings, splice top reinforcing at midspan between supports, splice bottom reinforcing at supports and stagger splices at adjacent splices 5 foot minimum. Bar laps shall be wired together. Reinforcing steel laps shall be as follows: a. Lap splices in concrete: Lap splice lengths shall not be less than 62 bar diameter for No. 5 bar, 56” minimum for No. 6 bars. No. 4 bar shall have a minimum of 24” splice. 93 bar diameters for No. 7 bars and larger. b. All splices shall be staggered at 5 feet minimum.
3.7 INSPECTION
A. Approval of reinforcing steel, after installation, must be received from Inspector.
B. Slope of concrete forms and finish condition shall be checked with a two foot (2’) digital level.
3.8 PLACING OF CONCRETE
A. Adjacent finish surfaces shall be protected at all times during the concrete pour and finishing. Verify that all formwork is tight and leak-proof before concrete is poured. Finish work defaced during the concrete pour and finishing shall be replaced at no extra cost to the owner.
B. Transport concrete from mixer to place of final deposit as rapidly as practicable by methods which will prevent separation or loss of ingredients. Deposit as close as practicable in final position to avoid re-handling or flowing. Partially hardened concrete
32 13 13-7 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
must not be deposited in work. Concrete shall not be wheeled directly on top of reinforcing steel.
C. Placing: Once started, continue concrete pour continuously until section is complete between predetermined construction joints. Prevent splashing of concrete onto adjacent forms or reinforcement and remove such accumulation of hardened or partially hardened concrete from forms or reinforcement before work proceeds in that area. Free fall of concrete shall not to exceed 4'-0" in height. If necessary, provide lower openings in forms to inject concrete and to reduce fall height.
D. Remove form spreaders as placing of concrete progresses.
E. Place footings as monolithic and in one continuous pour.
F. Keep excavations free of standing water, but moisture condition sub-grade before concrete placement.
G. Compacting: All concrete shall be compacted by mechanical vibrators. Concrete shall be thoroughly worked around reinforcement and embedded fixtures and into corners of forms. Vibrating shall not be applied to concrete which has already begun to initially set nor shall it be continued so long as to cause segregation of materials.
H. Grout under column bearing plates: Dry pack with specified Non-shrink Grout, as recommended by manufacturer. Use as little water as practicable. Ram grout solid into place.
I. Concrete Flatwork: 1. All flatwork shall be formed and finished to required line and grades. Flatwork shall be true and flat with a maximum tolerance of 1/8" in 10’ for flatness. Flatwork which is not flat and are outside of the maximum specified tolerances shall be made level by the Contractor at no additional expense to the Owner. 2. Thoroughly water and soak the exterior slabs, curbs, curb and gutters, footing subgrades with multiple daily waterings for at least three (3) days or as required to achieve required moisture content prior to the concrete pour in order to place the subgrade soils in full expansion. Provide damming as required to keep standing water within the formed area and to allow for proper saturation and full expansion of the subgrade soils. Remove any standing water before concrete placement.
J. Placing in hot weather: Comply with ACI 305R-91. Concrete shall not exceed 85 degrees F at time of placement. Concrete shall be delivered, placed and finished in a sufficiently short period of time to avoid surface dry checking. Concrete shall be kept wet continuously after tempering until implementation of curing compound procedure in accordance with this specification.
K. Placing in cold weather: Comply with ACI 306R-02. Protect from frost or freezing. No antifreeze admixtures are permitted. When deposited concrete during freezing or near- freezing weather, mix shall have temperature of at least 50 degrees F but not more than 90 degrees F. Concrete shall be maintained at temperature of at least 50 degrees F for not less than 72 hours after placing or until it has thoroughly hardened. Provide necessary thermal coverings for any flat work exposed to freezing temperatures.
L. Horizontal construction joint: Keep exposed concrete face of construction joints continuously moist from time of initial set until placing of concrete; thoroughly clean contact surface by chipping entire surface not earlier than 5 days after initial pour to
32 13 13-8 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
expose clean hard aggregate solidly embedded, or by approved method that will assure equal bond, such as green cutting. If contact surface becomes contaminated with soil, sawdust or other foreign matter, clean entire surface and re-chip entire surface to assure proper adhesion.
3.9 CONCRETE FINISHES
A. Concrete Slab Finishing: Finish slab as required by ACI 302.1R. Use manual screeds, vibrating screeds to place concrete level and smooth. Use “jitterbugs” or other special tools designed for the purpose of forcing the course aggregate below the surface leaving a thick layer of mortar 1 inch in thickness. Surface shall be free from trowel marks, depressions, ridges or other blemishes. Tolerance for flatness shall be 1/8" in 10'. Provide final finish as follows: 1. Flatwork, medium broom finish: Typical finish to be used at all exterior walks, stairs and ramps. Brooming direction shall run perpendicular to slope to form non-slip surface. 2. Under no circumstances can water be added to the top surface of freshly placed concrete.
B. Curb Finishing: Steel trowel.
C. Joints and Edges: Mark-off exposed joints, where indicated, with ¼” radius x 1” deep jointer or edging tool. Joints to be clean, cut straight, parallel or square with respect to concrete walk edge.
D. Tool all edges of exposed expansion and contraction joints, walk edges, and wherever concrete walk adjoins other material or vertical surfaces. 1. The expansion joints shall be full depth as shown in the plan details. Failure to do so will result in non-compliance and shall be immediately machine cut by the contractor at his expense.
3.10 CURING
A. Cured Concrete in Forms: Keep forms and top on concrete between forms continuously wet until removal of forms, 7 days minimum. Maintain exposed concrete in a continuous wet condition for 14 days following removal of forms.
B. Flatwork/Variable Height Curbs, Curb and gutter, Valley Gutter: Cure utilizing Curing Compound. If applicable, the Contractor shall verify that the approved Curing Compound is compatible with the approved colorant system. Upon completion of job, wash clean per manufacturer’s recommendations. 1. Curing compound shall be applied in a wet puddling application. Spotty applications shall be reason for rejection and possibly concrete removal and replacement at the contractor’s expense with no compensation from the owner.
C. No Curing Compound shall be applied to areas scheduled to receive resilient track surface including, curbs, ramps, run ways, etc.
3.11 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE
A. Determination of defective concrete shall be made by the Architect or Engineer. His opinion shall be final in identifying areas to be replaced, repaired or patched.
B. The Owner reserves the right to survey the flatwork, if it is determined to be outside of the maximum tolerance for flatness. If the flatwork is found to be out of tolerance, then the
32 13 13-9 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
Contractor will be required to replace concrete. The Contractor will be responsible for reimbursing the Owner for any surveying costs incurred. Determination of flatwork flatness, surveying and any remedial work must be completed far enough in advance so that the project schedule is maintained, delays are avoided and the new flatwork or flatwork repairs are properly cured.
C. As directed by Architect, cut out and replace defective concrete. All defective concrete shall be removed from the site. No patching is to be done until surfaces have been examined by Architect and permission to begin patching has been provided.
D. Permission to patch any area shall not be considered waiver of right, by the Owner, to require removal of defective work, if patching does not, in opinion of Architect, satisfactorily restore quality and appearance of surface.
E. Defective concrete is: 1. Concrete that does not match the approved mix design for the given installation type. 2. Concrete not meeting specified 28-day strength. 3. Concrete which contains rock pockets, voids, spalls, transverse cracks, exposed reinforcing, or other such defects which adversely affect strength, durability or appearance. 4. Concrete which is incorrectly formed, out of alignment or not plumb or level. 5. Concrete containing embedded wood or debris. 6. Concrete having large or excessive patched voids which were not completed under Architect's direction. 7. Concrete not containing required embedded items. 8. Excessive Shrinkage, Traverse cracking, Crazing, Curling; or Defective Finish. Remove and replace if repair to an acceptable condition is not feasible. 9. Concrete that is unsuitable for placement or has set in truck drum for longer than 90 minutes from the time it was batched. 10. Expansion joint felt that is not isolating the full depth of the concrete section, and recessed as required for backer rod and sealant where required. 11. Concrete that is excessively wet or excessively dry and will not meet the minimum or maximum slump required per mix design. 12. Finished concrete with oil stains from equipment use, and or rust spots that cannot be removed. 13. Control joints (weakened planed joints) that do not meet the required minimum depth shown on the drawings.
F. Patching: Install specified Patching Mortar per manufacturer’s recommendations.
3.12 CONCRETE TESTING
A. Comply with CBC Section 1903A, 1905A.1.16, 1910A and 1705A.3 and as specified in B. below. Costs of tests will be borne by the Owner.
B. Four identical cylinder samples for strength tests of each class of concrete placed each day shall be taken not less than once a day, or not less than once for each 50 cubic yards of concrete, or not less than once for each 2,000 square feet of surface area for slabs or walls. In addition, samples for strength tests for each class of concrete shall be taken for seven-day tests at the beginning of the concrete work or whenever the mix or aggregate is changed.
C. Strength tests will be conducted by the Testing Lab on one cylinder at seven (7) days and two cylinders at twenty-eight (28) days. The fourth remaining cylinder will be available for
32 13 13-10 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
testing at fifty-six (56) days if the 28-day cylinder test results do not meet the required design strength.
D. On a given project, if the total volume of concrete is such that the frequency of testing required by paragraph B. above would provide less than five strength tests for a given class of concrete, tests shall be made from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five batches are used.
E. Cost of retests and coring due to low strength or defective concrete will be paid by Owner and back-charged to the Contractor.
F. Each truck shall be tested for slump before concrete is placed.
3.13 REMOVAL OF FORMS
A. Remove without damage to concrete surfaces.
B. Sequence and timing of form removal shall insure complete safety of concrete structure.
C. Forms shall remain in place for not less than the following periods of time. These periods represent cumulative number of days during which temperature of air in contact with concrete is 60 degrees F and above. 1. Vertical forms of foundations, walls and all other forms not covered below: 5 days. 2. Slab edge screeds or forms: 7 days. 3. Concrete columns and beam soffits: 28 days.
D. Concrete shall not be subjected to superimposed loads (structure or construction equipment) until it has attained its full design strength and not for a period of at least 21 days after placing. Concrete systems shall not be subjected to construction loads in excess of design loads.
3.14 CLEANING
A. Refer to Section 01710.
B. Upon completion of work of this Section promptly remove from the working area all scraps, debris and surplus material of this Section.
C. Clean excess material from surface of all concrete walks and utility structures.
D. Power wash all concrete surfaces to remove stains, dried mud, tire marks, and rust spots.
[END OF SECTION 32 13 13]
32 13 13-11 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
SECTION 32 17 23
PAVEMENT MARKINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Traffic marking and striping for pavement and curbs as shown on Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's specifications for paint.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Traffic Surface Paint: Approved products include, but are not limited to the following:
1. Sherwin-Williams, Pro-Park www.sherwin-williams.com Waterborne Traffic Marking Paint B97 Series, or STAR-Brite Latex Traffic Line Paint S11 Series.
2. PPG Architectural, Ennis www.ppg.com Waterborne Traffic Paint Lead Free Yellow 445017, Waterborne Traffic Paint White 445018, or Zoneline Traffic & Zone Marking Paint 11-53.
3. Kelly-Moore, Traffic Marking Paint www.kellymoore.com Curb Marking Paint waterborne Semi-Gloss 1473, Zone Marking Paint Lead Free Waterborne 1472.
4. Benjamin Moore www.benjaminmoore.com, Coronado Super Kote Quick Dry Acrylic Traffic Paint 1406 Line, or Insi-x Traffic Paint Acrylic Latex TP-2200.
5. Lanco www.lancopaints.com Super traffic waterborne, Super Traffic TL Line, or Painters Marking Coat, Painters traffic VA Line.
6. Ennis-Flint www.ennisflint.com EF Series Standard Dry Waterborne traffic paint.
7. Professional Pavement Products, Inc. www.pppcatalog.com Prostripe Plus Waterborne Traffic Paint.
8. Sealmaster Pavement Products and Equipment www.sealmaster.net Sealmaster Acrylic Traffic Paint.
9. Products listed in the Caltrans Standard Specifications for Construction of Public Works (Green Book).
B. Traffic Surface Paint Colors: As follows, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings:
1. Stall Striping and Traffic Markings: Traffic White
2. Van Accessible Handicap Markings: Traffic Blue.
32 17 23-1 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
3. Fire Lanes: Red.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Prepare chalk layout and obtain Architect's approval prior to start of marking and striping.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Thoroughly clean surfaces of substances which may inhibit bonding.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply paint with equipment suited for that purpose in accordance with Manufacturer's directions.
B. Paint lines straight and true to pattern layout. Correct errors by sandblasting. Apply paint at manufacturer's recommended rates to obtain a dry film thickness of 8 mils minimum.
C. Stall Divisions: Provide between standard size parking stalls, a single 4 inch wide stripe, stall width as shown on Drawings.
D. Arrows and Pavement Signs: Paint directional arrows with stencils or other approved method. Strokes of letters, islands and "No Parking" areas to have 3 inch wide strips.
E. Accessible Handicap Stalls: Provide symbol and other markings as approved by Architect.
F. Fire Lanes: Provide red painted curbs as required.
G. Protect completed Work until dry.
[END OF SECTION 32 1723]
32 17 23-2 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
SECTION 32 17 26
TACTILE WARNING SURFACING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Furnishing and installing cast-in-place tactile panel modules (truncated domes) where indicated.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 32 13 13: Concrete Pavement
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s literature describing products, installation procedures and routine maintenance.
B. Samples for Verification Purposes: Three full size cast-in-place tactile panels of kind proposed for use.
1. Samples may be installed as job site mock-up.
C. Shop Drawings: For products specified, showing fabrication details; composite structural system; plans of tactile panel placement including joints, and material to be used; outline installation materials and procedure.
1. Design and show tactile panel pattern between existing expansion joints with panel rib dimension used for cut size of panels.
D. Material Test Reports: Test reports from qualified independent testing laboratory indicating that materials proposed for use are in compliance with requirements and meet properties indicated.
1. Conduct tests on cast-in-place tactile panel system as certified by qualified independent testing laboratory.
E. Maintenance Instructions: Copies of manufacturer’s specified maintenance practices for tactile panel.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide cast-in-place tactile panels and accessories as produced by single manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications: Engage experienced installer certified in writing by tactile panel manufacturer as qualified for installation, who has successfully completed tile installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project.
1. Manufacturer’s supervisor is required to be present at start of installation.
C. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA): Provide tactile warning surfaces which comply with detectable warnings on walking surfaces section of Americans with Disabilities Act (Title 49)
32 17 26-1 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
CFR Transportation, Part 37.9, “Standards for Accessible Transportation Facilities”, Appendix A, Section 4.29.2, “Detectable Warnings on Walking Surfaces”.
1. In addition, comply with California Title 24 requirements regarding pattern, color and sound on cane contact.
D. California Code of Regulations (CCR): Provide only approved DSAAC detectable warning products as provided in California Code of Regulations (CCR). Title 24, Part 1, Articles 2, 3 and 4 and Part 2, Section 205 definition of “Detectable Warning”, Section 11B-247.1.2.2 for “Curb Ramps” and Section 11B-247.1.2.5 for “Detectable Warnings at Hazardous Vehicle Areas”.
E. Vitrified Polymer Composite (VPC) Cast-in-Place Tactile Panels: Epoxy polymer composition with ultra violet resistant coating employing aluminum oxide particles in truncated domes, complying with following:
1. Water Absorption (ASTM D 570): Not to exceed 0.35%.
2. Slip Resistance (ASTM C 1028): Combined wet/dry static coefficient of friction not less than 0.80.
3. Compressive Strength (ASTM D 695): Not less than 18,000 psi.
4. Tensile Strength (ASTM D 638): Not less than 10,000 psi.
5. Flexural Strength (ASTM C 293): Not less than 24,000 psi.
6. Chemical Stain Resistance (ASTM D 543): Withstand without discoloration or staining—1% hydrochloric acid, urine, calcium chloride, stamp pad ink, gum and red aerosol paint.
7. Abrasive Wear (Tested with BYK—Gardner Tester (ASTM D 2486): With reciprocating linear motion of 37 ± cycles per minute over a 10" travel.
a. Abrasive medium: 40 grit Norton Metallite sand paper, fixed and leveled to holder.
b. Combined mass of sled, weight and wood block to be 3.2 lb.
c. Average wear depth not to exceed 0.030 after 1000 abrasion cycles measured on top surface of dome representing average of three measurement locations per sample.
8. Fire-Resistance (ASTM E 84): Flame spread less than 25.
9. Gardner Impact: To geometry "GE" of standard when tested in accordance with ASTM D 5420
a. Mean failure energy expressed as function of specimen thickness of not less than 450 in. lbf/in.
b. Failure is noted if hairline fracture is visible in specimen.
10. Accelerated Weathering (ASTM G 26): Exhibit no deterioration, fading or chalking of surface of tile after 2000 hours.
32 17 26-2 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
F. VPC Cast-in-Place Tactile Panels Embedded in Concrete: Meet or exceed following test criteria:
1. Accelerated Aging and Freeze Thaw Test (ASTM D 1037): Show no evidence of cracking, delamination, warpage, checking, blistering, color change, loosening of tiles or other defects.
2. Salt Spray Performance, Tile and Adhesive System (ASTM B 117): Not show deterioration or other defects after 100 hours of exposure.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Package or crate tactile panels to prevent damage in shipment or handling.
1. Protect finished surfaces with sturdy wrappings.
2. Identify panel type by part number.
B. Deliver tactile panels to location as directed at Project site for storage prior to installation.
1.06 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions and Protection: Maintain minimum temperature of 40 degrees F in spaces to receive tactile panels for at least 48 hours prior to installations, during installation, and for not less than 48 hours after installation.
1. Store tactile panel material in spaces where they will be installed for at least 48 hours before beginning installation.
2. After installation, maintain minimum temperature of 40 degrees F in areas where work is completed.
B. Control and contain use of water for Work, cleaning or dust control
1. Do not allow water to come into contact with public.
2. Provide barricades or screens complying with Section 01 50 00 to protect public.
C. Comply with federal state and local laws and ordinances for disposal of liquids or other materials of possible contamination.
D. Provide cleaning materials that have code acceptable low VOC solvent content and low flammability if used on site.
1.07 GUARANTEE
A. Provide manufacturer’s written guarantee for period of five years from date of final completion.
1. Guarantee includes defective work, breakage, deformation, fading and chalking of finishes, and loosening of tactile panels.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS / PRODUCTS
32 17 26-3 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
A. Basis-of-Design: Design of Vitrified Polymer Composite (VPC) Cast-in-Place Tactile Panel is based on Armor-Tile as manufactured by Engineered Plastics Inc.
1. Tile Style No. ADA-C-2436, in-line domes; Size: 24” x 36” x 1-3/8”, unless indicated otherwise.
B. Subject to compliance with specified requirements, existing engineered and field tested products may be submitted by alternate manufacturers in accordance with requirements for product substitutions specified in Section 01 60 00 and the following:
1. Submit items listed in Article 1.04 and as specified in Section 01 33 00, for evaluation of proposed system.
2. Complete project shop drawings for similar project may be submitted in lieu of shop drawings for this Project.
3. Performance Tests of Identical Systems: Meet or exceed specified performance criteria and characteristics
4. Copy of manufacturer's finish and material guarantee.
C. Color: Homogeneous throughout tactile panel.
1. As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard colors.
2.02 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Sealant: Heavy-duty elastomeric polyurethane sealant.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. During concrete placement and panel installation procedures, ensure adequate safety guidelines are in place and are in accordance with applicable industry and government standards.
B. Comply with physical characteristics of concrete specified in Section 32 13 13
1. Maintain slump range of 4–7 inches to permit solid placement of tactile panel system.
B. Overly wet concrete mix may cause tactile panel system to float.
1. Under such conditions, place suitable weights such as concrete blocks or sandbags (25 lb) on each tile module.
D. Prior to placement of tactile panel system, review manufacturer’s shop drawings and prepare layout drawing to resolve issues related to pattern repeat, panel cuts, expansion joints, control joints, curves, end returns and surface interferences.
E. Concrete placement and finishing operations require typical mason tools.
1. Following are specific to and required for installation of tactile panel system:
a. Mason’s line, radius edge (1/8 inch x 3/16 inch return) tool.
32 17 26-4 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
b. 4 foot long x 2 inch wide x 1/8 inch thick steel straight edge.
c. 25 lb. weights
d. Vibrator wand.
e. Small sledge hammer with 2 inch x 6 inch x 20 inch wood tamping plate.
F. Place and finish concrete level, true and smooth to required dimensions prior to tactile panel placement.
1. Immediately after placing concrete, string mason’s line parallel to roadway to act as reference line for placement of tactile panels.
2. Place tactile panel assembly true to paving edge and to each other on concrete.
3. Tamp or vibrate tactile panels into fresh concrete to ensure that field level of tactile panel is flush to adjacent concrete or pavement edge surface.
4. Ensure that tactile panel field level (base of truncated dome) is flush to adjacent surfaces as indicated on shop drawings, to permit proper water drainage and eliminate tripping hazards between adjacent finishes.
a. Tolerance for elevation differences between tile and adjacent surface is 1/16 inch.
G. Immediately after tactile panel placement, check panel elevation to adjacent concrete height with steel straight edge.
1. Set tactile panel elevation consistent with shop drawings to permit water drainage to or away from pavement as edge design dictates.
H. While concrete is still workable, use steel edging trowel 1/8 inch radius x 3/16 inch return to edge tactile panel to adjacent concrete surfaces running parallel to pavement edge.
1. While edging, ensure that clean edge definition is created between tactile panel and adjacent concrete and that tactile panel to concrete elevations meet shop drawing tolerances.
I. Ensure that placement of tactile panel assemblies to each other and to mason’s line or form edge are true and parallel to develop true line consistent with pavement edge.
1. In order to best achieve tight panel to panel placement, rake out concrete at butting edge to avoid trapping concrete or aggregate between panel or form edge.
J. During and after tactile panel installation and concrete curing stage, do not allow walking, leaning, or external forces placed on panel that could rock panel, causing void between underside of panel and concrete.
K. Following tactile panel placement, review installation tolerances with shop drawings and adjust panel before concrete sets.
1. Place suitable weights of 25 lb. on each panel and additional weights at panel to panel assemblies as necessary to ensure solid contact of panel underside to concrete.
32 17 26-5 Harrington Design Associates Twin Rivers Unified School District A/E Project Number 2022.00 Foothill HS Kitchen Remodel
L. Following curing of concrete, remove protective plastic wrap from panel face by cutting plastic with sharp knife tight to concrete/panel interface.
1. If concrete bleeding occurs between panels, use wire brush to clean residue without damaging panel surface.
M. Apply approved elastomeric urethane sealant to panel edges running parallel to pavement edge or curb.
1. Surface Preparation: Mechanically etch panel and adjacent surfaces with sandpaper or carbide burr and wipe clean and dry with acetone.
2. Apply urethane sealant to be level to adjacent surface and in a straight line formed to panel edge.
3. Mask panel face with duct tape to ensure clean definition of sealant to adjacent surfaces.
3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Protect panels against damage during construction period to comply with tactile panel manufacturer’s specification.
B. Protect panels against damage from rolling loads following installation by covering with plywood or hardboard.
C. Clean tactile panels not more than four days prior to date scheduled for inspection intended to establish date of substantial completion in each area of Project.
1. Clean tactile panel by method specified by panel manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
32 17 26-6